A Sanskrit Primer

SAN SK RIT PRIM ER

BASED ON THE

LEITFADEN

ELEMENTAR- CURSUS DES SANSK RIT

OF J PROF E SSOR GE ORG BUHL E R

OF VI E NNA

EDWARD DELA AN ERRY V R ,

L M BI A OL L E E N EW - OR OF C O U C G , Y K .

’I/

BOSTON

GI N N A N D COM PA N Y

1 88 5 . E n ter ed a cco r din to Act o f C o n r ess i n th e y ea r 1 88 g g , 5 ,

B E . D P RY Y . E R ,

I n th e Ofﬁ c f th L ibr a r ia n o f C o n r ess a t W a sh in to n e o e g g .

Qromp ositi on ﬁg iat rssfn ork 11g

GE BR D R R O H N W I L N E U N GE , J S ON A N D S ON ,

C E E 1 A u m v s ns n v p es s S HON E B RG R S T R AS SE , 7 , n .

E I N W C A M B RI D E B RL , S . G , M A S S . P f e r e ac .

* I n a t o k o f a v the p ref ce the wor which the following is re ision ,

ii H L E R a s : Prof. B writes follows

The following L ei tf a den w a s writte n l a st winter [1881 a n d m a u w a s u d u o f , p rinted in n scrip t form , se in the instr ction

I t u u q u ite a l a rge n u m ber o f schol a rs . is b a sed p on the p rely

a a m a k u w a s du a t p r ctic l ethod of S ns rit instr ction , which intro ced

’ H AU G s a n d m o w n a I a da y inst nce into the ndi n secon ry schools ,

’ n d h a BH K N D RK AR a a s become esta blished there by me ns o f R. G . K S

- k a a E a u n i text boo s . The ttemp t to tr nsfer this method to u rop e n ve r si ti es u a a u a s is j stiﬁed by the p r ctic l s ccess which , my ex “

e r i e n ce s b a th e r e . F o r I a v u a p hows , is to e g ined hy h e fo nd th t

a u o f a v a d a n d beginners m ster the ﬁrst difﬁc lties S nskrit ery r pi ly, th a t le a rners ta ke the m ost li vely a n d contin u ed interest in the

u d u t a v o n o wn a v n st y, if opport ni y for cti ity their p rt is gi e them

v a n d a r e. du d a t v from the ery ﬁrst , they intro ce once into the li ing d a u a . v th e u o f o f m a l ng ge Moreo er, q estion economy time is e the m ore weighty by the fa ct th a t the elem ents of S a nskrit form a n

Leitfa den fii r den Ele m e n ta r c u r su s des S a nskrit ; m i t U e b u n gs

stii ck e n u n z lo r e n o n E O R 3 . d ssa . V G RG B UI I L E . W 188 wei G ien ,

I h a ve tra nsl a ted a bo ve a little freely. i v

a a i d u d o f C a a a n d m a e t imp ort nt to st ents l ssic l G er nic Philology, y to a l a rge n u mber o f su ch a r e a ccessible only when the s u bject c a n a d a a d di sa d be m stere in short time . On the other h n , the va nt a ges necess a rily enta iled by the p u rely p ra ctica l method m a y rea dily be remo ved l a ter by a short methodica l exp osition o f the gra mm a r The verses in the exercises a r e t a k en chieﬂy

‘ from B OE H TL I N GK S I n di schen Sp r a chen ; the sentences a r e in p a r t d v va u a k k o r d d a f a a eri ed from rio s S ns rit wor s , mo elle ter p ss ges

a k a v cont ined in them . To the l a st lessons no S a ns rit exercises h e

a d d a d N a la o f been pp en e , since the re ing of the or some other e a sy S a n skrit work m a y v ery well be begu n a s soon a s the form

h a ” a tion of the p erfect s been lea rned .

After u sing the L ei tf a den for some time in the instru ction o f a a I w a s v d o f a m a s a a a cl ss , con ince its gre t erits pr ctic l intro d u ction to the l a ngu a ge ; while o n the other h a nd it seemed v ery u n u a t a d t u u to a v a a fort n e th t it hel hro gho t the n ti e system of gr mm r,

’ W I E a a a o f . H T Y k which , since the pp e r nce Prof N S wor , we in

d u America a t le a st h a v e lea rned to distru st . U n er these circ m

’ sta nces i t seemed a d vis a ble to a ttem pt a combin a tion o f Bﬁ H L E R s

’ p ra ctica l exercises with W H I TN E Y S theory ; a n d to this e n d the

k h a s a u t h a s e a dd boo been re lly rewritten . An introd c ion be n ed ,

gi ving a genera l view o f the str u ct ure o f the l a ngu a ge ; the exo r

‘ a v u d h e r e a n d v cises h e been p r ne there , chieﬂy to remo e forms

which seemed too u n u s u a l or do u btfu l to h a ve a j u st cl a im o n

’ the beginner s memory ; a n d the n u mber o f lessons h a s bee n r e

d u c e d - t - ﬁ ve b d d from forty eight to for y , y con ensing the escrip tion ,

d u o f a a t v a n d d nee lessly f ll for beginners , the orist, p rec i e , secon

r a v a y conj ug tions . I h a e endea vored to reta in nothing b u t wh a t

wo u l d s u pply the re a l wa n ts o f those fo n wh o m the book is de e t an d r a v m a a k signed ; y here the e , h ing in mind those who y t e

u u d u a a I a v a dd d a a p this st y witho t te cher, h e e expl n tions which

d a v fo r a u a b u I sho ul otherwise h e left or l comm nic tion y the instr ctor .

A deta iled expl a n a tion of the ch a nges in the gra mm a tica l p a rt

v o f the boo k wo u l d req u ire to o m u ch sp a ce to be gi en here . They

m a y be s u mm a ri z ed in th e s ta tement th a t I h a v e stri ven t o remo v e

“ ” a t n o n - a I n a a ll forms p resent qu ot ble . the explic tion of the

u I a v u be bu t v a a r les h e so ght to brief, ne er to the s criﬁce of cle r

n v a a u a bu t a ness . I ery m ny c ses not only the s bst nce lso the

’ W H I TN E Y s u a v words of Prof. r les h e been incorp ora ted into those

f a d t d u o w s a . I the Primer, which one with his s nction seeme q ite

- nee dless to design a te a lls u ch borrowings by qu ot a tion m a rks .

M a ny a ck nowledgments a r e d u e to those whose a i d h a s m a de

’

a a a . ii H L E R s p ossi ble the p p e r nce of the work . Prof B rea dy gene

r o si ty in consenting to the rendering of his book into a ve ry

di fferent form from th a t which he g a v e it deser ves most gra tefu l

W H T o . I TN E m ention . Prof Y I owe deep gra tit u de fo r m a ny va l u

a ble s u ggestions ; h e w a s kind en ou gh to look over the work in

(

m a u a n d a u t a t m d a a dva n scrip t , , l ter, to p y is p os l the nce sheets of

- va u a o f v . P his in l ble collection erb forms To rof. LAN M A N I a m

eq u a lly in de bted ; a s well for m a ny u sefu l hints a s for the a rd u o u s

a k v - w b e d o n t sk of loo ing o er p roof sheets , hich imp ose himself

u V a a r a d . . J K O W . A N . M . C with ch r cteristic e iness y p pil , Mr A S , a a a ssisted me not a little in the compil tion of the Gloss ries . M y

d E BE a a r e a d u e G . U G E R cknowle gments lso to the p rinters , N

T u RI M M o f a u a i n a ( . G ) Berlin , for the c ref l m nner which their p rt o f the work h a s been done .

’ “ ” F u d a V . PTE s G C I a v rom S . A i e to S nskrit omp osition h e

v d a a a deri e occ sion l ex mples . The a pp ea ra nce of the book h a s been del a yed considera bly

d a u beyon the da te origin a lly pl a nned for it . The p rinting w s beg n

v a b u t w a s u d b m a n d a r e in No ember l st, interr pte y y illness , su lti n a d d g st y of consi era ble length in the W est I n ies .

I sh a ll esteem it a fa vor if a n y who m a y u se this book will notify me of misp rints o r in a ccu ra cies of a n y sort which they m a y

a k rem r .

u u 1 85 . Berlin , A g st 8 D P E . . . T ble f n tent a o Co s,

i n s ste m a ti c r a m m a ti c a l a r r a n e m y g g en t .

T ﬁ u r e n h a v t e r e fe r t o a r a r a h s h e g s i e y yp p g p .

xi . I n tr odu ctory su g g esti ons, p .

' Al h a b t a n d So u d . I . p e n s

—2 a o f u a n d u a C a a 0 . C a h r cters , l ssiﬁc tion So nds , Pron nci tion , — n d H a v a 48 . n 5 6 . 2I 47 . a Light e y Syll bles , Acce t ,

Ch a n o f S u n d . Gu a a n d Vr ddh i . I I . g es o s n 49—5 4 .

. Ru l f u h o i i n I I I e s o E p n c Com b n a ti o . — Ru V C b a IO5 l06 I5 6 l6l I64 . G a les of owel om in tion , , , , ener l — a F a 23 9 242 . a a 242 . L ws concerning in ls , De spir tion ,

a a A a 244 249 428 u d a m So n a n t Tr nsferr l of spir tion , , , S r L

f a a l47 I4S 2 66 2 67 . C a o F Assimil tion , , , , ombin tions in l — 8 a n d r 95 ll7 l23 I29 . C v o f s t o s . 27 , , , on ersion , p M l 1 I92 342 5 2 v o f n . 32 9 3 . C I66 . , , , on ersion to n, p (note ) ,

C ve D a u L u a a n d Pa a a I49 I5 O on rsion of ent l M tes to ing ls l t ls , , , — . 99 3 42 . C a n . 29 ISS I40 p (note) , ombin tions of , p (note) , , ' k I 4 . C 8 C c c 2 I65 . a a o f ch . 7 h nge to , p (note ombin tions

f m d 7 IS4 a o . 29 . F a ii a n F 16 266 , p (note) in l [ 3] . in l , t, p , . — F a t I4S l5 l. in l , l D e n i n . I V. c e s o

G d N u a 3 —8 9 - d 90 9I C 8 . C a . en er, mber, se , se en ings , ,

P a da - d 9l 24I . en ings , ,

V. S ub ta n ti n d d s ves a A jecti ve s .

Vo wel - stems

a . n . l03 III . i m II3 II5 n . II4 II5 . Stems in , m , , Stems in , , ; , , i n d u f . 6 37 . a u m . l28 n . l3 | Stems in , , ; , , Stems in , ,

— - l8 5 I8 7 . a i 72 : a R d . I n a 2 I2 2 I3 Stems in , , ( ) oot wor s , , ;

i 18 9 2I2 2I4 i t l97 2I2 2 I4 . b va v . in , , , ; in , , ( ) Deri ti e Stems , f , — 5 208 . I n a I62 5 I8 3 it IQ S . i n 2 OI 20 , ; in , ; in , Stems r, ,

m : o 209 mi n m i 277 . Ste s in Diphthongs g , ; , ,

Conson a nt - stems — — - a 237 242 . a R 243 244 246 25 0 . Gener l , ( ) oot stems , , , — D v n a s i s u s 25 2 25 4 . I n a n a n m a n b va . I ( ) eri ti e Stems , , , ( , ,

a in s i n 25 ! I n a n t a n t m a n t va n t v n 265 . I n i n i n m ) , ( , , ) , ( , , ) — 25 6 2 64 a va n s 268 . C a a v . Perfect P rticip les in , omp r ti es

i n a s 2 5 5 . g , — I rregu la r No u ns : 2 69 2 8 4. — C a 3 37 345 . omp rison ,

- — F a F l87 25 I 25 5 262 264 268 . orm tion of eminine stems , , , , ,

N u m er a l . VI . s — 328 3 3 6 .

I I . n V Pro ou ns . 223 —23 6 28 5 —28 8 , , 413 .

o n u a ti n . VI I I . C j g o V V M d u 5 7 65 . a Ad oice , Tense , o e , N mber , Person , erb l — — e c ti ve s a n d u 6 6 da u a 69 70 . 68 . C j No ns , Secon ry onj g tion ,

d a n d - 7l Mo e Tense stems, .

I X r e en t - S tem . P s ys .

C u a C a 72—8 0 onj g tion l sses, .

F irst Conj uga tion .

a 3 8 3 —3 87 Gener l , .

- - — I . R a H du d o r a d a 404 4I2 4l4 oot cl ss ( in secon cl ss) , , —42 9 . — I I R du o . a C a H . bu cla ss 430 440 . e plic ting l ss ( third or ) ,

- — I I I . a a C a H . v r r dlz 44 o a a l 446 . N s l l ss ( se enth cl ss) ,

- V. N u n I a d u C a ( H . a n d su a n d ta n l sses ﬁfth eighth , or

a 3 8 8 —395 cl sses) , .

- - V . N at C a H . o r kr i a 399 4 03 . l ss ( ninth cl ss) , - o r a C u a . Second , onj g tion

a - C a r bli tz- a 92—94 97—l02 I34 VI . H . l ss ﬁrst o cl ss) , , , ,

135 15 2 - 4 5 4 178 2 182 ISS l93 —l96 I99 2 00 2 06 , , , , , , , , 207 2 10 222 260 , , , . — - - VI I . A d C a H du o r ta d a l07 IIO ccented l ss ( in sixth cl ss) , ,

— - I5 2 I5 4 a a . etc . (a s for cl ss) — — - - VI I I . a C a H u di v a I24 I27 I3 I l34 y l ss ( . fo rth or cl ss) , , , — - l5 2 IS5 a s fo r a a . etc. ( cl ss) — - a v C u a I68 l76 I X . d et C a o r Accente y l ss P ssi e onj g tion , ,

I8 8 I99 20 0 2 I0 222 . , , , ,

d u a a r l z [Ca u s a ti ve a n Denomin a ti ve Conj g tion (p t y H . tenth — - — - o r cu r a I4I I46 l5 2 I5 4 . a s a a cl ss) , , etc ( for cl ss) ;

a 2 l — lso 5 22l. ]

- r f t S t m . X . Pe e c ys e 47—47I 474 4 , .

a 472 473 . Periphr stic Perfect, ,

- X Ao r i t S tem . I . s ys

- - G a 48 6 . m : R a 48 7 a a t ener l , Si ple Aorist oot orist , ; oris ,

48 8 . R du a d 48 9 490 a e plic te Aorist , , . Sibil nt Aorist

- - - - s a 49l ri a 492 si a 493 sa a 494 . orist , ; g orist , ; s orist , ; orist , 4 5 A a v 9 496 . orist P ssi e , ,

u - XI I . F tu r e Syst em . — a 475 . F u u 476 48 l. C a 48 2 . Gener l , Simp le t re , ondition l ,

a F u u 48 3—4 8 5 . Perip hr stic t re ,

’

. e r b a d e ti s a n I n n i i e XI I I g A j c ve d Su bsta n ti ve s : Pa r ti ci ple s, ﬁ t v , ( e r u nI1 — a v a ta o r n a 28 9 3 OI . a v P a r P ssi e P rticip le in , P st Acti e

i i l a va n r n 2 o lu ti ve t c e t t o n a va t 3 0 3 03 . G u d : Abs s p in , , er n s

— I v — 22 3 04 3 I3 . 3 I4 3 . F u u a v a nﬁniti e , t re P ssi e P rticiples

u d v 3 23 —327 Ger n i es , .

X I V D er i va ti ve o r Se o n d a r Con u a ti o n . . c y j g s

4 4 Ca u a v 5 07 5 08 . a 97 a v 98 . G ener l , . P ssi e , s ti e, , — — I v 499 5 02 . d a v 5 03 5 06 . m a ntensi e , Desi er ti e, Deno in

v 5 09 SIO ti e , , .

r i h r a n u a i o n XV. Pe p sti c Co j g t . — 472 473 . F u u 48 3 48 5 . Perfect, , t re , r b a l ﬁ e : Ad ve b a n d r o i i o n s. X VI . Ve Pre x s r s P ep s t — SI 8 2 IS7 l90 3 95 3 97 . , , , ,

m a i o f o m oun t m . X VI I . F o r t on C p d S e s — d — C a a 3 46 35 3 . C u a v C u 35 4 3 5 7 . l ssiﬁc tion , op l ti e om po n s ,

a v C u d 35 8 d 3 5 9—3 6I Determin ti e omp o n s , ; Dep en ent , ; De

v 2— 5 C u d 3 66 3 6 3 6 . da d v scri pti e , Secon r A jecti e om p o n s , — y 370 v 37l 377 G v d F a M b 3 78 . Possessi e , ; with o erne in l em er , d — A v C u a s N u a n d dv b 3 5 0 379 3 SI . jecti e omp o nds o ns A er s , ,

d - - d n d a r u a u . 1 D va va u . 136 T t u 37 [ comp o n s, p (note) ; p s comp o n s , p

- - K a r m a dha r a a u d . 137 D vi u c o m (note) ; y com p o n s , p (note) ; g

- u d 3 8 0 B a huvr i hi u d . 142 Av a i bha va p o n s , ; comp o n s , p (note) ; y y

u d comp o n s ,

X . a ti al VI I I Syn t c c Rule s .

d . W d 67 35 . R Position of Mo iﬁers , p (note) ep etition of or s , p .

A A d v 245 . F C a greement of jecti es , orce of ses,

IO4 II2 . C a 8 2 ISO. [ri m , Prep ositions with ses , , with

I u a a n d G v . 89 . C u nstr ment l ( eniti e) , p (note) onstr ction with

C a a v 345 . u a 3 3 3 . u 225 234 om r ti es , N mer ls , Prono ns , , — p 23 6 . i ti . 47 . F o f : 96 , p (note) orce Tenses Present, ; 4 4 F M d I I8 2 7 48 6 . m p erfect , ; Perfect, ; Aorist , orce of o es — I a v I94 I96 a v 2 07 . C a u a v 22l. mper ti e , ; Op t ti e , s ti e,

a v l77 . a a v a 2 90 . Pa A v P ssi e , P st P ssi e P rticip le , st cti e

d 3 ll— I I v 32 — 22 a 3 03 . G u S 3 . 0 3 . P rticip le , er n , nﬁniti e ,

F u u a v a 3 27 t re P ssi e P rticiple , .

n di App e x .

H du a d H du A in N mes of Letters . Mo ern in ccent ua tion o f

S a nskrit . e i n f i n i e Sugg st o s or us g the Pr m r .

The Primer c a n be ﬁnished by e a rnest stu dents in sixteen or

v k k e r k a n d se enteen wee s , rec oning three lessons p wee , with here ’ a n u w A a L AN M A N S a k R a d there ho r for re vie . fter th t S ns rit e er, a n d u k a d d h e u intro ction to which this wor is p rtly inten e to , sho ld

a k u u d a r e d v e be t en p . St ents strongly recommen ed to p ro id

’ u themsel ves with W H I TNE Y S S a ns krit G ra mm a r a t the o tset . I t seemed a d vis a ble to lea v e the I ntrod u ction u n di vi ded into

a s d ff a m a a a a lessons , i erent te chers y prefer to imp rt the lph bet ,

. d o f t e a a t ff a o f d . etc , to their schol rs i erent r tes sp ee Some h exercises for tra nsl a tion m a y be fo u nd ra ther too long to be c o m

le te d i n I n u a l a p one lesson . s ch c ses it wil p rob bly be better , a fter requ iring the tra nsl a tion o f only so m a ny sentences a s th e p u p il m a y re a son a bly be ex p ected to m a ster in the prep a ra tion of ’ o n e d a e so n i n the y s lesson , to p roceed directly to the next l s

n u a v u a a e e n c a v . following ho r, le ing the ntr nsl ted s t es for re iew

v a u a a a r e n o t a u v The o c b l ries p reﬁxed to e ch exercise exh sti e , since words which h a ve been tre a ted o f immedi a tely before a r e

d a a t e n d sometimes omitte from them . The gloss ries the of the

u d b u t book will , it is hoped , be fo n comp lete for the exercises ; the mea ning o f compo u nd words m u st in most ca ses be le a rned

m m a n d a a v d fro their ele ents ; p rop er n mes h e often been omitte , their S a nskrit forms being discernible from the tra nslitera tion . The ta ble o f contents in system a tic gra mm a tic a l a rra ngement i s designed to fa cilita te the ﬁnding of a ny desired a rticle ; it m a y a lso be fo u nd u sefu l a s a n o u tline for a ra p id gra mm a tica l re vie w .

m i u a a r e a a d Ar r a n g e en t o f Vo ca bula r es . The voca b l ries rr nge a a d . All u u b in strict l ph betic or er (see below) no ns , whether s

d r - - ta n ti ve s o r a i v a e v . A llv b s ject es , gi en in the stem form er forms a r e p la ced u n der the root ; p rep osition a l comp o u nds o f verbs like

a n d i n a a b a o f . Of wise, not the l ph etic pl ce the p reposition

v a a d v a n d u a a v n v erb l jecti es no ns, some im p ort nt ones h e bee gi en

a a a bu t a o f o f m u in their lp h betic pl ces, the me ning most the m st

be a d v a le rne from their resp ecti e roots . Prono u ns a r e gi ven gener lly i n m o f a v the for the nomin ti e .

Al h a b ti Or der . a a a v I p e c The l ph betic order is th t gi en in § , bu t the following p oints a r e to be noticed here : The vi sa r g a sta nds next a fter the v owels ; b u t a vi sa r g a r e ga rded a s eq u i va lent to a sibil a nt a n d exch a nge a ble with it h a s

a o f a a the a lph a betic p l ce th t sibil nt .

“ ’ it a n u svar a o f d d The sign , rep resenting the more in ep en ent ” h a a b a ll m a u da ir a n d s te s . origin , its pl ce efore the etc ; th s y da nstr a sta n d before d a ksa .

’ nz a n a a m a d a d The sign , representing ssimil ted , is p l ce ccor ing

va u 1 . I f nz u a a to its p honetic l e . , res lting from the ssimil tion of m a e v b a o r 22 a a a v o r to s mi owel , si il nt , , represent n s l semi owel ’ b a n u sva r a a k a i t . u u nzs , then its p l ce is li e th t of Th s p comes efore

’ ' k 2 Bu t nz be du o f p u nya a n d sa nzpa ya before sa rt. . if the p ro ct m a a d to a u a n n o r m ssimil te m te , rep resenting , , n, , , then its pl a ce is th a t o f the n a s a l so rep resented . i n I n troduct o .

l A phabet.

I a n i i s m a th e . S skr t co monly written in wh t is ca lled

D eva n a a r i a a . a a o f a n d E u a g l ph bet The ch r cters this , the rop e n

a a h u a a m a r e a s : ch r cters whic will be sed in tr nsliter ting the , follows

n o r m .

Consonants.

gutt u ra l G ish 7 1 9

p a l a ta l 6 0 h W

M utes lingu a l 3 th E d d denta l W th . g

l a bi a l

r r an skr i t r i er . Pe y , S P m I tr u n n od ctio .

pa l a ta l a y lingu a l r Sem i vowe ls d v J enta l a z l a bi a l a .

‘ b : ‘ i 4 Si il a nts p a l a ta l 11 c ; lingu a l t s; denta l G s. A ‘ ‘ h sp ira tion g .

2 a v i s a u a r e a a u . The bo e order th t in which the so nds c t log ed by n a ti ve gra m m a ri a ns ; a n d E u rop ea n schol a rs have a dop ted it

a s th e a a fo r a . u lph betic order, diction ries , etc The writing r ns from left to right .

a a a r i f 3 . o f dev n m o r a The theory the g ode w iting is syll bic .

a n d a a . a i s a d a s u n o t conson nt l Th t , it reg r s the written nit , the

u d bu t a a n d u a a s su b simple so n , the syll ble ; f rther, it reg rds the sta n ti a lp a rt o f the syll a ble the conson a nt (o r the conson a nts) p r e

v a m d a s the ceding the owel this l tter being erely implie , is

a a a o r c se with short i t , except when initi l, , if written , being

n b a u a a a a writte y s bordin te sign tt ched to the conson nt . H 4 . ence follow these two p rinciples

o f - a a v a A . The forms the vowel ch r cters gi en bo ve a r e u sed

v a a b o r n o t b only when the owel forms syll le by itself, is com ined

a d a : a a o r d with p rece ing conson nt th t is , when it is initi l , p rece ed

b a v w . I n a a a y nother o el combin tion with conson nt , other modes

r e u d of rep resenta tion a se .

I f a o n e a a v B . more th n conson nt p recede owel, forming w a a a a m u d ith it single syll ble, their ch r cters st be combine into

a a single ch a r cter .

5 . o H u v a a According t the ind mode of di iding syll bles , e ch

‘ a u a v o r i nsa r a a n usvar a a t syll ble m st end in owel , g , or , excep t the end o f the word ; a n d a s ordin a ry H ind u u s a ge does not di vide

d o f a a ﬁ a a m the wor s sentence in writing, n l conson nt is co bined into o n e syll a ble with the initi a l vowel or conson a nt o f the followi ng

d so a a a a a a t wor , th t syll ble ends in conson nt only the end of the sentence . I ntrod u ction .

' ' ’ ' Th us the sentence ksetr esu szktabbir m eghan am a dbkzr dban ya ni

’ ‘ p r a r zldlza m by the w a ter which dro p s from the clo u ds u p on the

’ ﬁelds the gra in grows ta ll wo u ld b e consi dered a s consisting o f

’ the syll a bles hse tr e su sz kta bhi r m a gba n a m a dbhi r dha n ga rn

’ r a r h a m E a o f a u d d p zt d . ch these syll bles wo l be in ica ted by a

u u a n a v single gro p of signs , witho t y reference wh te er to the di vision o f the words comp osing th e sentence ; a n d the syll a bles a r e a a wr i tten m lw ys indep endently , with ore or less closeness o f a p pro a ch ; either like this ’ ' a t o r ma r fi fi g fn n t f n fi m a m fis cir i n s e q tt e ss

6 . I n a k E u m a S ns rit works p rinted in ro p e , the com on pr ctice is to sep a ra te the words so fa r a s this c a n be done witho u t a n y

a a o f . u i n dr a a n a m a z lter tion the written form Th s , {W a n : g l; bu t ta t sa vi ta r va r en a m a u ﬁ a i it a n d W W W y , bec se the n l t

“ u g r a r e n o t written with their f ll forms . B u t some few works

a v b d b a u se o f a a d vi r a ma h e een p rinte , in which , y free sign c lle

b w d v du a a r e a a . I n tr a n slite ( see elo , the in i i l words sep r ted r a ted texts there is no good rea son fo r p rinting otherwise tha n with a llthe words sep a r a ted .

n der A. V d a 7 . U owels combined with p rece ing conson nts a r e written a s follows

a a h a n o a t a ll - 1 . : Short s written sign ; the conson a nt sign

a a u m v - itself imp lies following , nless so e other owel sign is

o o r vi r am a se e w u a tta ched t it ( else the belo , Th s

a - v a v a r e a ka the conson nt signs gi en bo e re lly the signs for ,

“ h a kba ca cha . a s fa r a s . , , , etc ( 3 )

db . a : kit . ca . a 2 . $1 i n HT etc

‘ ’ di n kt t z i e i a n d a: ki . i . . . . v d . 3 . fi g; fi r p fi r an fi p i}

b o o k a v u t o r The bo e, t rning to the lef to the right , is bistori

t a a a a a v a ca lly the essen i l p rt of the ch r cter , h ing been origin lly I ntrod uction .

o f b o o ks a o the whole it ; the were only l ter p rolonged , s

a s a a ll w a to re ch the y down beside the conson a nt . Obser ve

a i - k a n d u - k v a v th t the hoo s the hoo s , resp ecti ely bo e a n d

a r e a a u below the line, n logo s in tu rning to the left for the

v a n d short owel to the right for the long .

4. u a n d it : kn . b cu . E u . kﬁ . n 5 q d i i o . 31 b . Owing

o f a d - to the necessities combin tion , conson a nt a n vowel sign

‘ “ a r e m d u ; u da i an r u m someti es isg ised th s , g , i ; Q , Q ; g

“ o r hu 1127 , 3 .

“ d i kr - 5 . a n : . . k . i f . W h th e h r i p r f a it sign , i E E v - u u a a a d dd the owel hook is s lly tt che to the mi le ; th u s ,

h . : E r 6 . 1

Ic 7 . . e : e s . e. t k i t a : a . Wa t Dip hthongs E . ﬁ p a y at .

t ‘ ‘ ” “ 0 : ko . bho . (i n : ka u J . T u ﬂ ﬁ a) (R a .

I n d o a n d a n a r e a a some p rinte texts the signs for sep r ted ,

- a . a v a a n d v the or being p l ced o er the conson nt sign , not o er the

d u a str o k e th u ko kau ; s Q T ﬁ t . p erp en ic l r _ , ,

8 a - m a d t o . A conson nt sign y be m a e signify the so u n d o f

a a a u a n a dd d v b a th t conson nt lone , witho t e owel , y writing bene th

’ ’ a k a d m r ama u k h t s d . it stro e c lle the res , th s , a , g , g

vi r am a u d u a t a Strictly, the sho l be sed only the end of sentence ; b u t u d o r dd o f a d it is often se by scribes , in print, in the mi le wor

o r a v a a d d u a u sentence , to oid wkw r or ifﬁc lt combin tions ; th s ,

’ li bkz t li su m d l, m t .

a a a r e a 9 . Un der B . The combin tions of conson nts in gener l

d u d u a a n d z a a r e not ifﬁc lt . The p erp en ic l r hori ont l lines common

a a ll a n d wo o r m a r e m to lmost ; if t ore to be co bined , the following

d u u d a a a o f a a - metho is p rs e . The ch r cteristic p rt conson nt sign

th a t is to be a dded to a nother is ta k en (to the excl u sion of the

d u a z a a - o f a n d p erpen ic l r or of the hori ont l fr ming line , or both) ,

a r e u t a v d they p together ccording to con enience , either si e by side,

6 I u ntrod ction .

th u s conta ining r a s its ﬁrst m ember i s followed by o n e of the

v i i e 0 at (i n o r u a a a 7' owels , , , , , , with witho t n s l symbol , the

‘ u a a t u r ke r ko r ka u sign m st st nd the extreme right ; th s , af , a? , éﬁ ,

’ “ “ ‘ ‘ a r kz r ki é r ka nz r kansz r hi rii f il , all , fi , afifi t , zfl b .

2 . I f u d a a a o r a r p rono nce fter nother conson nt conson nts, is

‘ d a d b a a k u r a m in ic te y sl nting stro e below , to the left ; th s , q g , 11 p ,

? er a dr a . A n d d a d a 3 , 31 , with mo iﬁc tions of the prece ing conson nt k a v tr a m. I n dd o f a sign li e those noted bo e , a , 3 7 p the mi le

u r h “ a s a n a s a t ; u r a sr va . gro p , the s me sig the end th s, y g , g

3 W r w a . hen is to be combined ith following a; r , it is

v u a a a n the owel which is written in f ll , with its initi l ch r cter , a d

’ ‘ d ' a u a u r r n i r tz. the conson nt in s bor in tion to it ; th s , g , ﬁ iﬁ fa g

f 14. C a o u v ﬁ ve a ombin tions three, fo r , or e en conson nts (this

a v a a r e a d a a u u l tter excessi ely r re) m e ccording to the s me r les ; th s,

‘ ' ttva ddb a dv a dr a Y sva ts a c a ﬂ , 3 1 y , g} y , 3 T y , E p , EQ y , w p y ,

" nksva r a m r tsn a . B stb a , st F 2 ts a F RI a y g g] y , 8 1 y Q y

- 15 . a n d d d a i n Both MSS . typ e fonts iffer consi er bly their

a o f - a b u t a a w m a n gement conson a nt combin tions, little p r ctice ill

en a ble o n e who i s thoro u ghly fa mili a r with the simp le signs a nd

o f d a s a s m a k with the p rincip les combin a tion to ecip her , well to e

fo r a ll u u himself, s ch gro p s .

‘ ’ 16 a a va r a ha a a u . A sign (S) c lled the g , or sep r tor , is sed in

p rinted texts to m a rk the elision o f initi a l a a fter ﬁn a l 6 p r 0 (see

' ' ‘ u F v te br a c a n . B u t below , th s lq a t some texts ,

a d I a . es peci lly those p rinte in ndi , disp ense with this sign

I n o u r tra nslitera tion this sign will be re presented by the

t v a a a u v . I n . in erted comm , s in the ex mp le j st gi en the MSS the a

a u a s a a n d m a s a a k o f a u . is lso sed hyphen , so etimes m r hi t s

7 0 u d m a a n o f a 1 . The sign is se to rk omission something e sily;

d m o r m v u d u nderstoo (whether fro the context , fro p re io s knowle ge), l u I ntrod ction . 7

a n d u a m a o f a v a u t 0 o th s becomes rk bbre i tion ; th s , rai t “ aa

- - a ta s ta m ten a . . a ta m a ten a g , i e g g etc .

18 u u a . The only signs of p nct tion a r e a n d ll

u a u r 19 . The n mer l ﬁg res a e

I n a a u a r e u combin tion , to exp ress l rger n mbers , they sed p recisely d a s a r e E u a u 24 485 7620 . rop e n igits ; th s , Q 3 , , S 63 0 This

o f a a I a a n d w a s u u system not tion origin ted in ndi , bro ght to E rop e

a a l I a a by the Ar bs , who c l it the ndi n system , s we style it the

a Ar bic .

2 I n a H u 0 . writing S nskrit the ind s genera lly begin a t the left o f a n d m a k z a to - k a u ‘I the letter, e the hori ont l p stro e l st ; th s , 7 , ,

i 9 c . Bu t z a k a t; , 31: a ; h, 3 often the hori ont l stro e is m de

a n d u a a dd u a en ﬁrst , the p erp endic l r stroke ed witho t r ising the p

a u from the p p er ; th s , 1 , a ; 1 , 3 !

tem of Sounds : Pronun i t Sys c a ion.

21 a k u I a a v m u a s . The S ns rit is sed in ndi to this d y ery ch

L a tin w a s u sed in E u rop e in the p re vio u s cent ury : it is a com m on

d u o f m u a a na i v me i m com nic tion between the le rned , be their t e

u a m a a n d v a u a a n tong es wh t they y, it is not the ern c l r of y district

H a a the r o n u n ci a ti o n ' o f Sa n wh a te ver . ence it is not str nge th t p skr i t words va ries gre a tly a mon g schol a rs fro m diff erent p a rts of

I ndi a ; a n d p rob a bly n o one system rep resents the tr u e a ncient

o f u a u a mode tter nce with m ch ex ctness .

ls. l. Vowe

- 22 . Th e a i a n d u o we l . u . A , , v s These three occ r both short

‘ ’ a n d a n d a r e u I a a m a a s long, to be p rono nced in the t li n nner

- or a n a n d a ther i n a n d i u e u lla n d r u le v . in ( ) g f , p p q , p , resp ecti ely The u 8 I ntrod ction .

' a vowel sta nds in n o r el a tion o f kindred with a n y o f the cl a sses

o f a a u d . B u t i v n a a a a n d conson nt l so n s the owel is disti ctly p l t l ,

- a a the u vowel s distinctly l bi a l .

- Th a n d vowels. o f r 23 . B . e r l Both thes e a e pl a inly the

‘ resu lt o f a bbre vi a ting syll a bles conta inin g a g r o r i t I a long with a v : u k r e E br e nother owel r is to be so nded li e the in the nglish ﬁ ,

l a ble I like e in .

24 . C . Th e di h th on s. . Th e e a n d 0 a r e a wa p g 1 , which l ys

u ve e a n d o - u E the long , sho ld recei the long so nds of the nglish y

a n d bon e u u d n a a a . n , witho t tr e iphtho g l ch r cter I their origin , both

u m a u d e a i o a u were do btless in the in p re ip hthongs ( , ) ; b u t a a v a d they lost this ch r cter a t a ery e rly p erio .

at a n d (i n a r e k a i E a i sle a n d a n 2 . The sp oken li e the in nglish

m a B a um o u E house a a s u d in Ger n ( in nglish ) ; th t is , p re ip hthongs

l m . e a d u d with long p rior e e ent They wer origin lly , o btless , istin

ui sh e d m 6 a n d 0 g fro only by the length of the ﬁrst elem ent .

11. Consona nts.

2 . M a t s. n a o f u r 5 . A e I e ch series m tes there a e two s u rd

m m two a a n d o n e a a a a . . e bers , son nts , n s l ( lso son nt) ; e g , in the

a a u a n d h a b a n d bh a n d l bi l series , the s rds p p , the son nts , the

m son a nt .

26 a n d m m o f a a r e a . The ﬁrst third e bers e ch series the ordin ry

u a n d a m a te s E u a a u a u corresp onding s rd son nt of rop e n l ng ges ; th s,

k a n d t a n d d a n d b. g , , p

27 . a a a n m d u u Nor i s the ch a ra cter of the n s l y ore o btf l .

W a i n a n d b o r n t a n d d a a a h t is to p , is to , th t is lso e ch other n a sa l to its o w n series of m u tes : a son a nt exp u lsion o f bre a th into a n d u h n th e m u a a r e u thro g the ose, while o th org ns in the m te conta ct .

2 n d u o f a a r e a a u 8 . The second a fo rth e ch series sp ir tes ; th s , I n u n trod ctio . 9 beside the s u rd m u te 10 w e h a ve the corresp ondi n g s u rd a Sp i r a te

Ich a n o a d a a h . I t , d beside the s n nt g , the corresp on ing sp ir te g is u su a l a m ong E u rop ea n schol a rs to p ronou nce both cl a sses o f a S pi ra tes a s the corresponding non a sp ira tes with a very closely fol

. s b a th u s h ha ha z r d d h . i h a a o o e a s a h lowing ; e . g , ne rly in , p in p , a s m a dhouse a u a so fa r a s a a r e in . This is i n cc r te the son nts con cerned ; bu t the q u estion of their origin a l so u nd is o n e o f gre a t

u a n d u . difﬁc lty , still nsettled

a a r e u . 29 . The a sp ir tes not do ble letters

v a u - n o w a u a The se er l m te series will be t ken p in det il .

3 0 . 1 . Gu ttur a l : k kh h 73 . a r e a s , , g , g , These the ordin ry

“ E 10 a n d a - u w a nglish 9 ( h rd so nds , ith their corresp onding sp ira tes

a n d na a a n si n i n . s l ; the l st, like g in g g ii h h . 3 1. 2 . a la t a l : 0 c va v P s , , j , j , This whole series is deri ti e , l being genera ted by the corr up tion o f origin a l g u ttu ra ls . (The p a l a ta m u te c a n d the sibil a nt 9 often represent tw o s u ccessi ve sta ges o f u o f k d u o f a r corr p tion , the corresp on ing degrees of corr p tion 9 e

F o r a u both rep resented by j . ) this re son the e phonic tre a tm ent o a u a a a u f the p a l a ta ls is in m ny resp ects p ec lia r . The p l t l m tes c a n d j a r e p ronou nced with the comp ou n d so u nds o f E nglish

oh a n d a s chur ch a n d u d e. a 28 . j , in j g See lso

3 2 . 3 . Li n u a ls : h h . u a m a te s a r e a g t, t , 4, a , n The ling l s id

to be u ttered with the tip of the tongu e t u rned u p a n d dra wn b a ck

m o f a a a a s E o r a into the do e the p l te , somewh t the nglish ( r ther

m a r ver u . I n A eric n) smooth , e . g . in y is p rono nced p ra ctice

E u rop ea n S a nskritists m a ke no a ttemp t to distingu ish them from

d a : u t d a n d o n . the ent ls t is p rono nced like , d like , so

3 3 . 4 . D en t a ls: t th d dh n . a r e a a , , , , These pr ctic lly the

* - u va o f o u r o a t d n . eq i lents s ca lled dent ls , ,

Bu t the H ind u s genera lly u se lingu a ls to represent the E nglish ‘ ’ a u la a n a dent ls ; th s , m a nd London . l0 I u ntrod ction .

34. 5 . L a bi a l : h b bh m . a r s p , p , , , These e ex a ctly the equ i

va le n ts o f E b m the nglish p , , .

3 5 . . Sem i vowel : r l v . 1 . a a a v B s y, , , The p l t l semi owel y

sta n ds in the closest rel a tionship with the vowel i (short o r long) :

a e a a the two exch ng with one nother in c ses inn u mera ble . Very p roba bly the S a nskrit 3; h a d e verywhere m ore o f a n i - ch a ra cter

a o u r th n y.

3 6 . 2. r a a u u I t u The is cle rly ling a l so nd . th s resembles

r a n d a v u n tr ille d . the E nglish smooth , like this seems to h e been

li s a d o f E . 7 . 3 . u a u a s 3 The so n dent l p osition , q ite in nglish

4 . a a v u a s E o r F v 3 8 . The l bi l is p rono nced nglish rench by

d n H u e r t d a t gg p r _ c on sp p gn the mo er ind s pp g ece ed by wd hen

x c a m s lble E w (e p the s e ylg , n li h ; g tﬂ a n d E u rop ea n schol a rs follow the s a me p ra ctice (with o r withou t

u t a d a d the s a me excep tion) . B strictly the v st n s rel te to a n u

a s a n i - v : a i s a w- u i n v owel p recisely y to owel th t , it is so nd the

a k n i n u i o F o . E nglish sense , or p erh p s more li e the rench The

“ o a k u a ff u a n d a ru les f S ns rit e p hony ecting this so nd , the n me semi

” v a v a a u a w - u d : a v u owel , h e no pp lic tion excep t to s ch so n so nd

G a w v bu t a a k E i h ( erm n ) is no semi owel , sp ir nt , li e the nglish

u d a n d so n s f .

3 9 . C . Si bi la n t : s. 1 . s o f a n a a : a s c, s, The is p l i ch r cter

a a n d a k E 8 a s lesson v a s dent l , ex ctly li e the nglish ( in ne er

a se in c ) .

40 2. a u d u a . . The s is the sibil nt p rono nce in the ling l p osition

I t a k d o f sh - u d a n d b E u a u is , therefore , in so n , y rope ns is p rono nced a s a E sh n o a m a d v ordin ry nglish , ttemp t being e to gi e it its

u u p rop er ling a l q a lity .

41. 3 . a ll a v a u d d a s a a a The 9 is by n ti e thorities escribe p l t l .

I t u u a sh u E u H du a r e a is the s l so nd of nglish , tho gh the in s s id I u ntrod ction . 1 1

a ff n a B u to Sp e a k it somewh t di erently owa d ys . y E rop ea ns it is

u a 8 a a sh va rio u sly p rono nced p erh p s oftener a s th n s .

42 a a r e a a u d . . All three sibil nts lw ys s r

4 A ir a ti on : h . u u a y u k 3 . D . sp This is s ll p rono nced li e the

h B u ordin a ry E u rop e a n sur d a sp ira tion . t its tr u e va l u e in the

a I t i e u p hony of the l a ngu a ge is th a t of son a nt . s not a n origin a l

u o f a u a b u t a a n h so nd the l ng ge, comes in most c ses from older g ,

I t a n in som e fe w ca ses from dh o r bh . pp ea rs to i cl u de in itself two sta ges o f corru p tion of gh z one corres p onding with th a t o f k

c a k . to , the other with th t of to c

44 . E . Vi a r a : . a a m a u a . s g h The h pp e rs to be erely s rd bre th

a ﬁ a h u E u a o f h u d ing , n l so nd (in the rop e n sense ) , ttere in the a u a v vi sa r a rtic l ting p osition o f the p receding owel . The g is not

a bu t a a a u u ﬁ a 8 o r r . origin l , lw ys mere s bstit te for n l

' 45 F in a a u d . An u var a . a n usva r a it a . s The , or , is n s l so n l a cking th a t clos u re of the orga ns w hich is requ ired to m a k e a n a s a l m u te ; in its u ttera nce there is n a s a l reson a nce a long with

’ e o f o u E u a a v some d gree op enness f the mo th . rop e n schol rs gi e

a n usva r a va u o f a a F - a n - on - eh - i a the the l e the n s l in the rench , , , ,

. a a a o f v . etc , which is mere n s l coloring the p receding owel

46 . d ff a n d i i a r e u d i n M SS . Two i erent signs , 3. , se the to

d a a n u sva r a m i s l in ic te the . Most co monly emp loyed ; fl wil

d to a k a not often be met with in p rinte texts , excep t m r the ch nge

’ o f a a a u a n usvci r a a v e a n s l m te to before following semi ow l , p rti t c ula r l 1 u a G taff lla bdhan . Cf . ag . y ; th s , m y ra m

47 I t v d u a . is con enient in tra nslitera tion to isting ish the ssi

s d m a ll a b a a i ii m a n usvar a o f mil te (in c ses) y s peci l sign , fro the

m it . ore indep endent origin , re p resented by u I ? I ntrod ction .

Light and Heavy Syllables.

8 F o r m a u a v a r e 4 . etric l p rp oses syll bles (not owels) di s

’ ‘ ’ i n i h e d ‘ v a n d a a v i ts v t gu s a s hea y light . A syll ble is he y if owel

a n d d m a o n e a “ is long , or short followe by ore th n conson nt ( long by Vi sa r ga a n d a n usvar a a r e here co u nted a s fu ll con

Th o f u do t c o u n t a s u a . e a a m u son nts s ir ted tes , co rse, do ble p pa ' letters .

Changes of Sou nds. Guna and Vrddhi .

a v a n d 49 . The ch nges to which both the owels the conson a nts o f a k a r e u a r v u S ns rit s bject e ery n m ero u s . Am ong the v owel

a m u a a n d u a r e so - a u a n d ch nges , the ost reg l r freq ent the c lled g n a vr ddhi a r e o f u u va a n d g , which freq ent occ rrence in deri tion inﬂection .

5 0 a a : . The following t ble exhibits these ch nges

5 1 a a T u . Theoretic lly the ch nges of wo ld coincide with those o f a n d v ddhi o f u b e d l bu t a tua l a r, the r ! wo ld ; c c ses of these

l u a r e u u k . u a a a s a o f i s a r q ite n nown The g n of lis (j st th t r ) ,

b u t u k . be u it occ rs only in one root, lp As will seen in the seq el , the gu na - so u nd coincides with the res u lt of the combin a tion o f

n a v d a u a u a a 3 1 with the simp le owel corresp on ing to th t g n ; th s , 3 1

‘ a i o r 5 6 a combines with following 3: i into Q , which is lso the

a o f i a n d i . v ddhi k a l gun { i The r , in li e m nner , is identica w ith the res u lt o f combining a n 3 1 a with the corresp on ding

u a u a a 1 6 at the g n ; th s , 3 ! combines with following 1 into ﬁ ,

i o r th e a vrddhi o f 1 i a n d . F the p resent t ble is to be lea rned o u tright .

ll u a e a m a u a o r 5 2. n a g n ting proc sses 3 re ins nch nged , I ”

14 I ntrod u ction .

Accent.

5 6 . m a o f a a r e H u a m m a a The p heno en ccent , by the ind gr ri ns o f a lla a k d d a n d a d a s d d o n a va a ges li e , escribe tre te ep en ing ri tion o f a n d f o f v v d a k tone or p itch ; of y if erence stress in ol e , they m e k V d a u . a a r e a a no cco nt These ccents m r ed only in cert in e ic texts , a n d a a a u d emp loyed only in their recit tion , where s the ccents se now a da ys by H ind u s i n the p ron u nci a tion o f S a nskrit (a n d left

d - o f u a r e m a u a . . va a n enoted in writing) inly ict s ccents , i e ri tions

a v a n stress . The p rincip les of the l tter system will be gi en in

d m o f h a a a i m a pp en ix . The older syste a ccents s gre t etymologic l p orta nce ; the l a tter none wh a te ver ; a n d only the older system l will be referred to in the following . Here it wil be eno u gh to sta te th a t the p rim a ry tones o r a ccent - p itch e s o f the older system a r e

: a a u a n d a o r a v . d a two higher, or c te ; lower , gr e A thir , c lled sva r i ta a a o f da d a u t , is lw ys secon ry origin , being or in rily the res l o f a ctu a l combin a tion o f a n a cu te vowel a n d a gra ve vowel into

o n e a . I t u d d a s u a u n syll ble is niformly eﬁne comp o nd in p itch , nio

n o f higher a d lower tone within the limits of a single syll a ble . I t i s thu s identica l in p hysica l cha ra cter with the G reek a n d La tin

u a n d u d a a a circ mﬂex , f lly entitle to be c lled by the s me n me .

W v u a m d u ur de hene er , in the seq el , ccent is entione , witho t f ther

ﬁ n i ti o n a u a u a n d , the c te ccent is to be nderstood ; it will be de sig n a te d by the ordin a ry a cu te sign .

Conjugation of Verbs.

5 7 a k v b a a . The S ns rit erb exhi its the closest n logy with th a t o f G k d v d - a s u o f a ree , being e elo pe in tense systems , o tgrowths cert in

- I n d a a u . a . . o tense stems the ol er st ge of the l ng ge , i e in the s

a d V d d da a a t o f a h - m c lle e ic p erio , the mo l r miﬁc ions e c tense ste a r e a s u u a s k b u t a a a k n mero s in Gree ; in the l ter st ge, the S ns rit

a a th e a a a ua u a ve p rop er ( lso c lled cl ssic l l ng ge), these o tgrowths h I u ntrod ction . been lopp ed o ff to so very grea t a n extent th a t with o n e insigni

ﬁ c a n t a v o r a a v excep tion , the p rec ti e orist Op t ti e, only the p resent

n a va a system still reta ins a y mod l riety wh te ver .

5 o r d a u a o f v a t 8 . a There is simple or in ry conj g tion erb l roo s , which we ca ll p r i m a r y ; a n d there a r e cert a in more o r less fu lly de velop ed s e con da r y o r d e ri va ti ve conj u ga tions

5 9 o i e . a r e v a v a n d d t d . V c s There two oices , cti e mi dle , which ex en

o r thro u gho u t the whole system o f conj u ga tion . F the p resent system a lone there is a Speci a lp a ssi ve inﬂection ; the mi ddle form s

u d a a n d v a r e a o tsi e th t system , sometimes e en within it , li ble to

u d k v a v a be se li ewise in a p a ssi e sense . An cti e form is c lled by

‘ ’ the H ind u gra mm a ri a ns p a r a smai p a da m word f o r a nother ; a

‘ ’ ’ m d a tm a n e a da m fo r . v b a r e id le form , p word one s self Some er s

u a v conj g ted in both oices, others in one only ; sometimes some of

a r e d v the tenses inﬂecte only in one oice, others only in the other v o r o f a v u u a o n e v a oice , in both ; erb s lly inﬂected in oice Sp or dic form s o f the other occu r ; a n d sometimes the voice di ff ers a s the v i s u d d a erb comp o n e with cert in p rep ositions.

60 . r n an d N u m ber . a r e s : Pe so s s There three p erson ﬁrst, s a n d a n d a s u a v a v a n d r o econd , third ; , with s bst nti es , djecti es , p

u d n d n u : u a u a a u a . o ns , three n mbers sing l r, l , p l r l All these p ersons — a n d n u mbers a r e m a de from e very tense a n d m ode excep t th a t

r u u the ﬁrst p ersons o f the imp er a tive a e rea lly s bj ncti ve forms .

61. The n a ti v e gra mm a ri a ns denote a s the ﬁrst p erson Wh a t

’ we a a n d a s a r e a o f v Ae m c ll the third ; we wont to sp e k the erb y ,

’ v t o a z th e v a mo . so H u u se a the erb px n , erb , etc , the ind s for inst nce

bhdva ti 3r d . i n di e . bhil unﬁ t ( sing p res . of V ) to signify the whole

m o f v a m a a d syste erb l for s from th t root , since “Hf? he s the list

’ o f m s a v a a a s M er o r i o m o r a m o for in the n ti e gr mm r, y , pX M , , does

o r a o f in Greek L tin . The Hind us e ven m a ke s u bsta nti ves o u t 1 6 I ntrod u ction .

u a m a n d i n ﬂe c t m a d o f s ch c tchword for s , the ccording to the nee s expression .

62 n u a - a o f v . I the following, the conj g tion cl ss erbs will be d a 3r . . . a a a indic ted by the sing p res ind , p l ced in p renthesis fter

“ '

u 3! N ut bha va ti . the root ; th s, (Ra fa )

Ten e 31 d m ode m o f a n d u t 63 . s s s . The sche e tenses modes p

t e H du a a u a a n d forth by h in s holds good only for the l ter l ng ge, even there u tterly confou nds the idea s o f m ode a n d tense .

l o f d a n d 64 . The only logica a rra ngem ent the mo es tenses in

S a nskrit is shown in the following ta ble (which incl u des only th e cl a ssica l sp eech) :

- I r e n S m : . . . e t te a I a . b . I I a v P s ys ndic ti ve mp erfect . c. mp er ti e

v d . Op ta ti e . e . P a rticip le :

- I I . e f m r t S t e . a . I a v a . P ec ys ndic ti e . b . P rticiple

I I I . Ao r i t m S te s a . I a v . . s ys (of trip le form a tion) . ndic ti e b Op

t a ti ve (sometimes

F ut u r te m . I V . e Sys s

= . a F u u a I a v . b . A Sibil nt t re . . ndic ti e Preterit (

c . Pa rticip le .

i I d a v . B . r i h r a t u u a . P e p s c F t re . n ic ti e

65 . u d a s a n d The tenses here disting ishe imp erfect , p erfect, a orist recei v e those n a mes from their correspondence in mode o f

a t so a d a ua o f a form tion wi h tenses c lle in other l ng ges the f mily,

a i n a n d a t a ll m a n ff o f m esp eci lly Greek , not fro y di erences ti e

a d I n o a a n a design te by them . no p eriod f the S nskrit l gu ge is

there a ny exp ression o f imp erfect o r p l up erfect ti m e nor o f

“ ” d a ua a h as p erfect time , excep t in the ol er l ng ge , where the orist

va u i n a a n d a o f this l e ; the l ter sp eech , imp erfect, p erfect, orist (

u e a r ra re s ) e so m a ny u n discrim ina te d p a st tenses o r p rete rits . I ntrod u ction .

‘ VerbalAdjectives and Substantives.

- a ti i le . a 66 . P r c p s The p rticiples belonging to the tense system s

h a v a a a a a t 64. e been lre dy indic ted in the t ble § There is, besides, a a d m o f v p rticip le formed irectly fro the root the erb , which is

o p re va ilingly f p a st a n d p a ssi ve (someti m es ne u ter) m ea n i ng .

v fu tu r e as i ve a o r er u n di es o f v a Moreo er , p s p rticiples , g v , se er l

ff a a r e m a b u t u di erent form tions , de , witho t connection with the

u u - f t re stems .

67 . I n n i h v ﬁ i t ve. T e cl a ssica l S a nskrit h a s a single inﬁniti e .

I t a a n a u a v a o f a v a n u a v is re lly cc s ti e c se erb l o n , h ing nothing

a v - wh te er to do with the tense systems .

- 68 . Ge r u n d . so a u o r a u v a A c lled ger nd, bsol ti e , is esp eci lly

u a n d v a a - i n freq ent, is , like the inﬁniti e , stereotyp ed c se form ( str u m e n ta l I ts va u i s a o f a n ) o f a deri va ti ve verb a l no u n . l e th t

a a v a a b u t a indeclin ble cti e p rticiple , with indetermin te, oftenest p st,

m l te p ora force .

Secondary Conjugationsi

69 a u a a r e a s : 1 . a s i ve . The second ry conj g tions follows P s ;

2 . I n n si D e si der a ti ve 4. Ca usa ti ve . I n te ve ; 3 . 5 these , not the

m bu t a u a - m u si ple root , conj g tion ste , nderlies the whole system o f e l a a o f inﬂections . Y t in them a l is p l a inly visible the ch r cter a - a a m o r m u a p resent system , exp nded into ore less co plete conj g — - m a 5 8 5 9 . tion ; the p a ssi ve is p a lp a bly a present system . Co p re

. D en mi n a ti ve 70 U nder the sa me genera l hea d belong : 6 . o

u a u v o f u - m conj g tion , which res lts from the con ersion no n ste s, both

- u a v a n d a v u a 7 . Co m oun d s bst nti e djecti e , into conj g tion stems ; p con

u a u m r e ﬁ xi o u o f to o r j g tion , res lting fro the p p rep ositions roots ,

a d a u - m a n d er i h r a ti c from the dition of u xili a ry verbs to no n ste s ; 8 . P p s

u a m h n o f u v a l conj g tion, fro t e loo ser com bin a tio a xili a ries with erb n u a n d a o ns djecti ves .

er r a n kr i t r i er . P y , S s P m u 1 8 I ntrod ction .

1 a a o f a . . o r a l 7 . The ch r cteristic p rop er (i e ﬁnite p erson ) v - m a d B a d erb for is its p erson l en ing. y this lone is determine its

a a a s a a n d u a n d a a a s a d ch r cter reg rds p erson n mber , in p rt lso reg r s

a n B u t o f d a n d a r e mode d tense . the distinctions mo e tense

a m a d a o f a n d — m inly e by the form tion mode tense stems , to which ,

a o f a a d a r e a d d . inste d to the b re root, the p erson l en ings pp en e

a Conjug tion Classes.

- 72 . w c u a i m Of the hole onj g tion , the p resent system is the

n d a I t r u r o p orta nt a p rominent p rt . s forms a e very m ch more f

u a a ll q ent th n those of the other systems together . As there is a lso grea t va riety in the m a nner in which di ff erent roots form their

- a s u u d ff p resent stems , this , being their most consp ic o s i erence , is m a de the b a sis of their p rincip a l cl a ssiﬁca tion ; a n d a v erb is s a id

o f a n u a o r a a d w a to be this or th t co j g tion , cl ss , ccor ing to the y

~ in which its p r e se n t ste m is m a de .

- 73 . Of u a a h a r e u d these conj g tion cl sses t ere nine, incl ing the

- a v a a . ﬁ ve p ssi e, which is re lly p resent system only The ﬁrst exhibit coinci dences eno ugh to j u stify their incl u sion into one c o n

u a a n d a u k a d j g tion , the rem ining fo r will com p ose li ewise secon

u a d u a r e conj g tion . The chief istinctions between the two gro p s a s follows

74 . I n ﬁ r t a a v a s the s , the cl sses h e in common , their fu nda m a a a a a : n o w u ent l ch r cteristic, shift of ccent the tone is p on the

- a n o w u o r a . p erson l ending , p on the root the cl ss sign Along with

a va a s h a s a this goes ri tion in the stem it elf, which stronger, or

u a u a n d a a k f ller , form when the ccent rests p on it, we er , or briefer, form when the a ccent is o n the en ding . W e disting u ish these

a n d a k - v forms a s the strong the we stem forms resp ecti ely.

I n d o u a ti on o n a a 75 . n se o n the c c j g , the contr ry, the ccent ha s a a m a a a u n a m a o f th e ﬁxed pl ce , re ining lw ys p o the s e syll ble I u n ntrod ctio . 1 9

m a n d v d a n d o f ste , ne er being shifted to the en ings ; the distinction

- a n d a k u k . v strong we forms is n nown Moreo er , the present stem o f v v u a o f u a a e ery erb in the fo r cl sses this conj g tion ends in 3 1 .

r o f d ff There a e a lso other p oints i erence .

76 a a u a H d u a n d . The cl ssiﬁc tion c rrent mong the in , hitherto a E u a a a a u a mong the rop e n , gr mm ri ns com p rises ten conj g tion

d a d n o a a a a v . cl sses , rr nge ccor ing to intelligible p rincip le wh te er

“ ” n a v a a - a a t a ll b u t a The ti e tenth cl ss is re lly no p resent cl ss ,

a u a v a d va v u a c s ti e , i . e . eri ti e conj g tion , which extends beyond the

- r a a a b limits of the present system . P ob bly the f ct th t y no mea ns a ll conj u ga tion - stems forme d by the ca u s a ti ve sign h a d rea lly a

a u u u a c s a ti ve va l e indu ced the n a ti ves to a dop t s ch p resent cl a ss .

H u a u a v The ind scheme lso q ite omits the p ssi e .

77 . H d u u a n d a so The in ﬁrst , sixth , fo rth , tenth cl sses form the

a u a d a s c lled ﬁrst conj g tion of their scheme , which corresp on s, excep t

a d a o u r d u a . m a reg r s the tenth cl ss , with secon conj g tion The re inder

’ o f a a v d u a a the cl sses form the n ti es secon conj g tion , which grees

a o u r in the m in with ﬁrst .

78 a r . The cl sses a e then a s follows

First t “ ” M g I - — I . r o ot cla r a o f H u The ss ( second o a d cl ss , the ind s) ; its

‘ ’ - m d u a ed e a t ; p resent ste is coinci ent with the root itself; th s , g ,

‘ i o ’ d ‘ ’ , ; vi a . g 5 1 s, h te

I - I . The r edupli ca ti n g cla ss (third or hu cl a ss) ; the root i s

d u a d hu p u S u hu m V , re lic te to form the present stem ; th s , ISj fro i? ‘ ’ ‘ ’ a da rk? Vda v s criﬁce ; {3 1 from , gi e .

- I I I . n a a l c a s v o r r u dh a a a a The s l s (se enth cl ss ) ; n s l , extended

a n a a m i s a to the syll ble [n ] in strong for s , inserted before the ﬁn l

“ “ a u i ru n dh r u a dh m conson nt of the root ; th s , ( t (or ( m n ) fro

r u dh ‘ b ’ w , inder . I u 20 n trod ction .

- a . Th n la a i I V . e u c ss (ﬁfth o r cu cl ss) ; the syll a ble a n u s

‘ ’ a d u 1 sun u su . ded to the root ; th s , £3 from V3 , p ress

- - b . A v ery sm a ll n u mber o f roots (only h a lf a doz en) ending a a d n a n d a v a n d u a lre y in a , lso one ery common irreg l rly inﬂected

so ’h a dd 3 i t a th e root not ending (3 r , lone to form

- ta n a o f H u a p resent stem . This is the eighth or cl ss the ind gr m m a a a a s a su b - a u - la u 7 ta n u ri ns ; it is best r nked cl ss , the c ss ; th s , 73

‘ m ta n ’ fro V “ , stretch .

V . n a cla o r kr i a a n ot The ss (ninth cl ss) ; the syll ble WT (or,

' a k m 7 n i a u kr i a o r in we for s , h ) is dded to the root ; th s , W T n (

’ ‘ ‘ ’ kr i i kr i b u 2 m . . 3 . afiqfi n ) fro Vafi , y See note , p

—éd A / Second Con u at on. ( A é j g i ,

- - - VI . a l a n t d a c l ss o r bli tz a The c a ss, or u n cce e p (ﬁrst cl ss) ;

a a - i s a a n d w a the dded cl ss sign simp ly ; the root , hich be rs the

a b u a u u a a o f ccent, is strengthened y g n thro gho t , if it be c p ble

' a k u a 5 2 u bha va u t ing g n (see th s , Ha (thro gh the inter

‘ ’ - b u a a bhd a h . medi te st ge ) from V i , be

VI I . a tu d a The a cla ss, or a ccen t e d cl a ss (sixth or cl ss) ;

- th de d a a a s di a bu t. h a s ga cl ss sign is , in the p rece ng cl ss ; it the

a a n d u a u a u ccent , the n ccented root is not strengthened by g n ; th s ,

' ‘ ’ tu da m tu d u SS fro V ﬁg , thr st .

- a dd d VI II . The ya cla ss (fo u rth or di v cl a ss) ; ya is e to the

- w h a s a u a di v a di v b root, hich the ccent ; th s , ﬁ t y from Vi i 1 ( y d ‘ ’ H u v a s di v a . the in s gi en Q 3 ; ) , p l y

I X a i e a a - m . The p ss v conj u g a tion is lso p roperly p resent syste

h a v a a - d only, ing cl ss sign which is not exten ed into the other

systems ; tho u gh it differs m a rk edly from the rem a ining cl a sses

a v a a a n d m a a ll a in h ing sp eciﬁc me ning, in being for ble from tr n

si ti ve v bu t m v . I t m erbs , with endings of the iddle oice only for s

22 I ntrod u ction .

Declension .

o f u a v a n d a a v 8 3 . The declension s bst nti es th t of djecti es cor respond so closely tha t the two cl a sses o f words m u st be trea ted

. u a n d u m a a together The p rono ns n er ls , on the other h nd , exhibit here a s in the k indred l a ngu a ges m a ny stri king p ecu li a rities .

8 4 . N u m be r s a n d en der . a r e u u a G s There three n mbers , sing l r , d u a a n d u a a n d u u a d a u l , pl r l ; the s l three gen ers , m sc line , feminine ,

n d u d u v l a a d neu ter . The a l is u se m ch more extensi e y th n in

k a a a m u d a . Gree , where it pp e rs in orib n st te

8 5 r u r v . Ca e . a a e a s s The c ses eight in n mbe , gi en gener lly in the

d : a v a u a v u a da ve a b a v following or er nomin ti e , cc s ti e , instr ment l , ti , l ti e ,

v a v a n d v a v . b u a a geniti e, loc ti e , oc ti e The o ject so ght in the rr nge m ent is simply to se t next to o n e a nother those ca ses w hich a r e

a a o r o n e u b o r a de a to gre ter less extent, in n m er nother, i ntic l in

a n d u m a v a s a d a form ; , p tting the no in ti e ﬁrst , le ing c se , there is n o other order by which th a t object co u l d be a tta ined . — W h . 2 05 F o r the u ses of the ca ses in deta il see 67 3 .

6 m u a v a n d a v m a fo r v 8 . The ste s of s bst nti es djecti es y con enience

d : a . I L Ste m s i a n d u . be cl a ssiﬁe a s follows I . Stems in 3 1 in { 3

‘

d i d : a . a d a a n d a I I I . a n n Stems in a n , Q , m n mely, A r ic l stems,

I V. d k d va v . m few others inﬂecte li e them ; B . eri ti e stems Ste s in

o r V . c On n a n t . 23 r (o r a t ) . Stems in so s

7 r n a n d ea k a e . I n a 8 . o St g w c s s stems ending in conson nts , a n d 3 a r a d o f those in a r (or 1K ) , there is seen istinction stem

- d ff a . a r e form in i erent c ses Sometimes the stem forms two , when they a r e ca lled strong a n d we a k resp ecti vely ; sometimes three :

dd a n d a k . a v va a strong , mi le , we est As is the c se with erbs , this ri tion

- - - o f o f stem form often goes h a nd i n h a nd with a shift a ccent .

I n u a n d a a r e 8 8 . a the m sc line feminine , the strong c ses the

d n o l n o m n d a . . a n d u a a n m . . . a cc , both sing d l , the p The rest I ntrod u ction . 23

r a e o f - a e we k ; or , if ther be the distinction three stem forms , then

l. . . . a n d a da t. a b en . a n d lo c . d . the instr . , , , g , sing , the gen loc ,

d . l. a ll a k n w a v a n the gen p ( of which t e e dings beginning ith owel) , b ] d u d l. a r e a k a n d . da t. a n d a b . . . a t. a we est ; the instr , , , the instr , , ,

r dd . a n d . l. a a e loc p ( whose endings begin with conson nts) , mi le

8 9 I n n u a a r e . a n d . the e ter, the only strong c ses the nom

a c c . l. r t n o w . a n d a c c . p ; if there be the t ip le distinction , hen the

dd a n d a a u a r a k . . a r e a e sing mi le , the s me c ses in the d l we est

th e a a r e a a s a s Otherwise c ses cl ssiﬁed in the m c uline .

- - 90 . Ca en di n . a a a s se gs The norm l scheme of c se endings , recogni z ed by the n a ti ve gra mm a ri a ns (a n d con veniently to be a u a s a a i s ss med the b sis of sp eci l descrip tions), this

Sing u l a r D u a l Pl u ra l f m . . n . . m . m . f. n . f n .

N s m a u a s

a m d u a s A .

I d bhyd m bhi s

’ D e bhya m bhya s

b a s h bh A . b yam ya s

a s a s a m G .

i a s su L .

I t a a - a n d a d a d v pplies entire to conson nt stems , to the r ic l i ision o f i a n d u- u n d v - d a stems ; to other owel stems , with consi er ble va a a n d d a v a o r ri tions modiﬁca tions . The en ings which h e lmost

u u k a u a ll a a r e bh am a n d q ite nbro en r nge, thro gh stems of cl sses , y

d u o 0 8 d u a a n d bhi s bh a s a m a n s f u a . of the l , , y , , the p l r l

- - 91. a d a en di n . a d bh am bhi e bh a s a n d P g s The c se en ings y , , y ,

u r a c i . e . those of the mid dle ca ses a e c lled p a da

- endings . The tre a tment of stem ﬁ n a ls be fore them is genera lly the

a m a o f w r ds n a s e s in the co m bin a tions o with o e nother . n 24 Lesso I .

L esso n I .

- 92 er s. r e n t n d i a i . n a . V b P se I i c a t ve ct ve U cc en t ed a cla ss. A

m o f n u a n u ber roots co j g a ted in this cl a ss h a ve m edi a l short i t .

“ ” “ I a u a s a u a a dd a n a n sm ch 3 1 is its own g n , these roots merely a

' - - . va d m va da . to for the p resent stem ; e . g , Hg , p resent stem 3 g

a d The ﬁn a l 3 1 of the stem is lengthene in the three ﬁrst p ersons .

u a Sing . D l . Pl u ra l .

' ’ ’ va dam i va da va s a dd ma s I . W W E m v

' ' 2 va da si vdda tha s va da tha . W m m

’ ’ ' va a a ti vdda ta i da n ti 3 . W W s “ f n va

93 o f r d u a n ti u ff . The ending the 3 p l r. is p rop erly wﬁ ﬂ ; it s ers

“ a v a w v b o f i ts a v bbre i tion , ho e er, y the loss 5 : , in erbs whose stem

d a en s in a .

’

94. a h ea v a i n a c o n so n a n t ca n n o t b e u a d As y syll bleending g n te ,

i i a t “ a root lik e Ghq j v m a kes its 3 r d sing . Gfia fi t j v i ; fi g n i n d

m a n i n da li . 5 3 . kes ﬁ g ﬁ t , etc See

5 u h n i r . e n d o f a a d 9 . E p o c ule At the word st n ing in the

“ a a a s a n d 1 r a a ﬁn l p osition of sentence, or lone , Q : lw ys become vi sa r a a n d e a a k Ich h a n d g h; g ner lly lso before i , g , q p , q; p ,

a i s a d a before sibil nts [i t p, t , Q whether these st n in the s me e d o r a s a d . . r wor , initi l in the following wor ; e g a 3 m B g

n va da ta u n a va da ta s p u a r becomes a lw a ys 3 3 71: Ha : h p h.

9 6 . F r e of th e r e en t d a v s o c p s , The p resent in ic ti e signiﬁe

‘ 1 . 2 I m d a u u . . 3 . a v Present time . . m e i te f t rity P st time , in li ely

“ n a rra tion ( historica l V lr ocabu a y 1.

Ver bs to b e con j ug a t e d lik e Hg va d

ca r . a a z “I a t a . 7T ( fl (intr ) go , w nder , gr e t p f ll ; fly M éZ I e r fo r m c o m m i t. i a a c . a cc. er s. ci o fi x t p , a ly j s crifice ( p y s /

i v i n st i v r . r e . m j li e . )

’ [ éL o - w M t a a v a a r a h all é w : I C C m y j le e b ndon . s rotect . g / \ , W p

da h u . va d a sa . {g b rn Hg sp e k , y

“ dhav r u n . va s m ﬂ i t dwell .

’ n a m . bo w c a b tr . a a r . W (intr ) , bend one s a ? ( ) c rry, be r ; (int

s tr . v . ﬂ o w . elf ; ( ) honor , re erence , blow , p roceed

t a a ns a . ﬁ t p c cook . gin: p p r ise

Adverbs and

hence

whence ? m ka tha m h o w ? m ku ta s why ? “ 1 ka da when ?

a dhun d n o w ta d a da W 1 m d then y when , if

‘ ' we: a dya to - da y qé a sa rva tr a everywhere m sa da a lw a ys

ava m so u at so t us tu b u t v m , th s {ﬁ r , h a , howe er

“ - eva u e a ca o st o s. ue un a r a a n but V! j st, x ctly a (p p ) q m p g i ; I I Lesson I . .

Exercise 1. wa shm a a lm vg w t a l wa w fin s l ww ‘( fi t fi t ls l n a m v m vnv n u l m ain tai ne r a s a ven ue lga z un f e t t la m fu wa u le lgu z vam zmo u - ’ eefu t aa i ga eiefi n aa t m a m a zt as le éa ai ra fi n n qs u * 1 ” 1 2 1 da the a a d . 16 . a I 5 . e o . 17 1 To y y b n on Now y g . Alw ys a 1 ” 1 2 18 . W e two a a . 19. W u tho u ? p r o te ct . bow g in hither r nnest

‘ 1 he t k e . 2 . T wo . 22. Ye a a 23 . H e 20 . W s a criﬁce y coo b ndon . 1 2 2 o we v 25 . Ye two W h do e u . 24. N w a . 26 . b rns li e . p r ise y y l 1 2 1 2 e ﬂ W do e th . 28 . l ? hend ? 27 . There y y here y dwel

Le sso n II .

’ 7 Ver b . U a en ted a la c on t d . R o f a 9 . s n cc c ss, oots this cl ss

e bd a v a n d a - a v which in owel , conson nt roots not forming he y

syll a bles g u n a te their vowels in forming their p resent - stems ;

’ “ “ i n d a t m e a n d m dr u n d bhu . . ﬁ f a ﬂ a j a ? a l e g , j for g i form

W a - a a a e o f 98 . u ith the cl ss sign a , ﬁn l I! the g n a ted root

u nites to form we: a ya see § I5 9 ; so “HT 0 with W a becomes

i a d r a a va a r s] a a . u i 3r d . n ; WI with yiel s WI Th s, fa j , sing

' ’ ’ a a - ti 3 M a bha va ti sin : sm a r a ti W ﬁ j y ; 1 Ra ﬁ? g g m .

99 . R a : e bu dh 3 r d . bddha ti oots in conson nts g l , sing m ;

' ' - ’ r f ci t a ceta ti vy a fifa va a ti . aa , fi fi j ; 31 s, s

The s u p erior ﬁg u res indica te the p osition in the S a nskrit

o f u va fo r d B d sentence eq i lents the words so design a te . y this in i ca tion is a voided the necessity o f a p plying e u phonic r u les which

n o t d k v h a v e ye t been sta ted . The order of wor s in S a ns rit is ery

a n d a u a . F free , r rely inﬂ ences the me ning of the sentence rom the ﬁgu res the n u mber o f words req u ired in the S a nskrit sentence will W a r a d . re a dily be seen . ords in I t lics a e not to be tr nsl a te I Lesson I . 2 7

I a i n a n d a m m a - 100 . The roots n t g m y ke the p resent stems

’ ' ” 7( K e d W ga c cha a n d W ya ccha .

‘ ’ - 1 sa d si t m a k m si da . 01. The root Hg , , es the p resent ste m

‘ ‘ ’ V i i u h d m a k T?! ha ti . The root 33 g , hi e , es E g

a a m - 102 . Severa l roots in ﬁn l 3 “ for their p resent stem by a

u a o f du i a u stha 3 rd . p ec li r p rocess re pl c tion ; th s , Q T , sing fa g ﬁ i

‘ “ ' ' “ ti stha ti t d zba ti hr a i /i r a te ; n p f qa ﬁ r p ; m g fa a ﬁ rj g .

r i n a . 103 . M a sculi n e s a n d N eu t e s a

‘ ’ a o d . d a . M a sc u li u e s : dev o 23 , g

u u a . u . Sing l a r . D l Pl ra l 3 a“ deva s 23 i deva u 2m devas

' ‘ ’ b . u : t ha la u . Ne ters ﬁa p , fr it

' ha la m ha le a i N . m p m3lp ( ) W p ha lan i A cc . h Vo c . ma p a la

a u the a a a d o n o t a ch a As r le , gr mm ri ns llow to st nd in

a a a v b u t u u th t form fter owel , req ire it to be do bled , becoming

ceh . a a d r ﬁ x i n 3 ; An sp ir te is do u ble by p e g the corresp onding

- 165 an d asp ira te . Cf. § .

” a 5 a d u a E The dent l sibilant E . is ch nge to the ling l L s, if i m’m e dia te g c e de d b V l sa ve a a n d a b n - 3 , g Q W ! £ ﬁ 11 , g -ll y y or_ N “ l 3 y M

k ! u s b f a l o r l r . u T g i n . o d b ‘ { g , ﬂ or “ h ﬂ ' fo l we nless th“ e Th s i W , i n

— - - fi tmfa ti stha ti becomes fi g fi j ti stha ti the cb a nge o f V th to

h b e a d 3 i a p rocess of a ssimil a tion will exp l ine below) . So wﬁ rg a gn i - cu becomes Wm a gn isu ; a n d $1 3 3 1 dh a n u s- d becomes dha u s W n a . a a za o f a a v o r d The n s li tion the lter nt owel , in other wor s , its

b a n usvar a d v a ff u being followed y , oes not p re ent its ltering e ect p on

b a u ku e i h i . a a a k a the si il nt ; th s , ﬁ ﬁ s And the lter tion t es p l ce

a o f a n n d a a 8 o f a in the initi l e ing fter the ﬁn l { stem , whether the l a tter be rega rded a s a lso ch a nged to 1 s o r a s con verted into vi sa r a u ha vi - u o r z ha vi - su a g ; th s , W s s { fa g h inste d of m

- ha vis cu . Lesson II .

104 . F or ce o f a e . 1 . a v ca sus su b ecti c s s The nomin ti e is j vu s.

a u a v c a sus o b ecti vus d a 2. The cc s ti e is j , enoting chieﬂy the ne rer o r

m v m m a direct , so etimes howe er the ore remote , object ; so etimes lso

d o f n mi n u s a d u em a n m a d a . the ter q , extent ti e sp ce

u h o n i om bi n ati on o f vowel . 105 . E p c c s

i = ‘ 1 . a d i . a td a i El or t“ + w or W 3 ﬂ e . g m a ﬁl g p

’ ‘ a t i ara rﬁzg a p .

o r i o r i z ef 2 . W w + { i u

z - 3 . o r u o r n o . . u t 3 1 a zﬁ . e g WET PE R a

’ a “ﬂ ?! ga to t .

“ 4 m a r . . . m a ha i . g an + $ r a g e g W w : rs h

m a ha wgﬁi : r si h.

' “ = ' ——‘ e o r ai at. . . i 5 . at or a n + u ? ﬁ e g lﬂ T j QH

’ ﬂ ﬁa ga tai va .

- - = - 6 o r o o r a u an . e . . fi . W a n lfi fi 3 fi g rm t afmfi x

’ z u d osa dhi h fl fi qfi lt ga td sa hih.

v i n 106 . I t will be the p ra ctice e erywhere this work to

a a d d d a a u t sep r te in ep en ent wor s in tr nsliter tion , b not in the deva n aga r i text ; a n d if a n initi a l v owel o f a following word h a s

a a a l is ill d a co lesced with ﬁn of the p receding , th w be in ic ted a n a i n i tia l v by p ostrop he single if the owel be the shorter,

u b ff a do le if it be the longer, of the two di erent initi ls which in

a e very ca se o f com bin a tion yield the s me res u lt . To a id the b e

a l a d n deva n a a r i ginner , p oint wil sometimes be p l ce , i the g , u d a v two a v u “ n er long owel formed by co lescing owels ; th s , a ﬁ

’ a n i n cz a m ﬂ Tﬁ m g Wh .

Voca bulary ll.

Ver b a la t . n d . e a . u s, c ss f rj (tr intr ) conq er , win

' a m a ccha ti dr u u n I ‘ 40 m g (g ) go . g r . , a

‘ hr a hr a ti m . o n i a u m g (j ig ) s ell ﬁ le d , g ide .

I I Lesson I .

L e sso n III .

- 1 7 r s. Ac c en t d d la . R a m 0 . Ve b e c ss oots of this cl ss for their

' - m d a n a a i s p resent ste by a d ing ccented w to the root , which not

u a k a o f g n ted . The inﬂection of these stems is p recisely li e th t

a , a s to stems belonging to the p receding cl ss , excep t the p osition

- i . o f a u k i m n k d . the ccent ; th s , ﬁ ll sp , p resent ste fa sp , p res ind

' ' ' ‘ ksi a mi ksi a si ksi a ti . ffl mfi q p , f i mfq p , fi qfi p , etc /

108 . v a i n r a Hi d u w r i tte Se er l roots a; of this cl ss (by the n s nfi y fl ’ ‘ C C r kr ki r d ti . i r a . with a ; ) form stems in {T ; e . g ” 3 5 , strew , fqfl ffi

‘ “ The roots in t i a n d 3 u a n d a u ch a nge those v owels into

a n d u v v a - u k i r “ j g W , resp ecti ely , before the cl ss sign ; th s, fﬂ s ,

’ ' -‘ t dh va i . 3 k i dti su sa va ti di m, u M s y ; § , gaﬁ l a m ﬁ

‘ ’ 109 . F o r i d i ch a d a s a the root {E s, esire , {Q is reg r ed

' - u u u i ccha ti 100 . s bstit te in the p resent stem ; th s , ( i f? note)

’ ‘ k a k ccka ti a n d I r a ch Li ewise, a; 7 m es its p resent W fd r t? p ,

' ‘ m v a s ccba ti a k f a r . so etimes gi en Q M , m es ﬁ p

11 A u b o r e 0 . n m er f roots following this cl a ss a strengthened

b a u a a a u si c . in the present y p en ltim te n s l ; th s, m , p resent ind

- siii cdti a a a d a fa g ﬁ t . The n s l is a lw a ys a ssimil te in cl ss to the

” n a u E 72 1 8 u a a a i t e following conso nt ; th s L sed before p l t ls , befor

a m a a a n d A i t b b a a n d k. dent ls, R before l bi ls ; efore si il nts g

’ III . M a culi n e a n d N euter in a n d . s s s 3 1 , co t

a . M a sc u lines

i u u a . u a . S ng l a r . D l Pl r l

‘ I a ?! deven a m devd bhyd m a d evci i s D 3 3 11 ] doc o yo gm devebhya s

u w a a s u b . Ne ters follo ex ctly the declension of m c lines in the

v a u ha len a E h a ld a . a bo e c ses ; th s , W p , W I p y , etc I Lesson I I . 3 1

112 F o r c e o f c ases. 1 . u a a u . The instr ment l nswers the q estions

? a n d ? a n d a m a a wherewith whereby expresses cco p niment, gent,

d n d o r m . 2. a v a . e a ns The d ti e enotes the remoter object , direction

I t is a lso u sed a s da ti vu s comm o di ; v ery frequ ently a lso to denote

o r u a n d u a d end p rp ose . Sometimes ( oftenest with cop l omitte )

‘ ’ a v o f a a . 3 . it is p redic ti e , in the sense m kes for , tends tow rd The a bl a ti ve a nswers the qu estion whence ?a n d v ery freq u e n tly den otes

a u . 4. v ca sus a alec ti vu s a ll o f c se The geniti e is j , denoting kinds -

b n a r i i s . n b i a s o e ti o s t t vu 5 . O . . en . su ect v c belo ging (e g g j , j , p ) The L

a v d a vh e n a n a u . c ti e enotes the p l ce y , ction occ rs

I t u a so u a a a i is often sed b l tely , in greement with p rtic p le expressed

o r u d a s a u a n a n d v nderstoo , the bl a ti ve is sed in L ti the geniti e

in Greek .

Voca bulary m.

' - cla s si c siii c a ti i n -1 9 s fa ? ( ) drip , drop ; n

E i i ccha ti . . { L s ( ) wish , desire moisten

' k k dti u s s dti le t o a . ﬂ rs ( rs ) plo gh . gi t gj ( rj ) g ; cre te

“ k i k i dti u a a s rcdti u ; i n a m sp ( sp ) h rl , c st, ! “ ( p ) to ch ( cert in

a throw . connections) w sh .

- r di di dti o u t . a c la ﬁ m p ( c ) show , p oint ss

W h act i ti a sk a sk a u t ”: ﬁha ti l01 a . W Q P (p r ) , bo 213 m (g . ) hide, conce l

m ido ti 10 1 i a vi vi dti . sa d s s t fa}! e ( c ) enter ﬁ g ( , ) .

ha sta h a nd . Su b stanta sc. W

ka ta W m a t . N ea t :

7 kun ta a k etr a . 31 6 sp e r . s ﬁeld

bd la, dha n a m . m child , boy . W oney, riches

1 1“ m d r a a w a . 5 77 0 u . a n) g ro d , y, street m 9 p lo gh

m e ha u vi a . ﬁ t?“ g clo d . ﬁ n s p oison

a r a a sa hba fo r tu n e lu ck h a i n ess. a t p rrow. W , , pp I I I I V . Lesson .

Exercise Ill. W fit fi g la t w m fi tfl m zts tm fl fi * fi W ls l W m i l8 lm fi% ffl a fi1 ’ ga zltn m fua fa fi a z t é t l s ’ ’ ‘ w zt aa fasa zt t ta a sfim e la fi mz tfizm ao u

4 1 2 k bou t a 1 a m e n a a m . 6. 5 . The boy s s the the ro d ( ) 1 The 1 4 3 2 1 4 on l le clo u ds drop w a ter the ﬁ e ds ( a ) . The two m en go

2 3 4 ?’ r i n to 1 . by two ro a ds (i n st . ) the city . 8 The king gi ves the two

1 z ’ 1 2 4 s 4 i on ‘ m e n m o n e 19 . a s t m a ts . 20 . Th e o ds y . The m n s sons g 3 2 l 3 clo u ds 21 W a u t gi ve the w a ter of the . . e w sh ( se 3 131) bo h 2 l 1 4 2 3 r 22 . B o th m en a thei r du a l h a nds wi th w a te . le d sons ( ) hom e 3 4 2 1 two o u t th e a to the em . 23 . The boys p oint ro d city (g )

L e sso n IV .

‘ ' ‘ ’ 113 . uli n e i n i . a m M a sc s t wﬁ l y , ﬁre

' i u . u i n u l a a . S g a . D l Pl r l

. i “ 72 ? D n ? 9 23 n A ﬁ g a gn es M he G W m a gnyos

n See ote to 102 .

a a a i i t m m a a v The dent l n s l t , when i edi tely followed by owel ,

“ o r F l 71 o r m o r o r v u u a by ; a Q g a , is t rned into the ling l “ln if preceded i n the s a m e word by the lingu a l sibila nt o r semi

‘ “ v w lo r v w s i . c . E r ﬁ o r : a n d is n o t o e o el by L s, g , g r, a f th , V Lesson I .

‘ ’ 5 var 114 . N e ut er i n . i a s W , w ter

u a . u a . u a Sing l r D l Pl r l .

‘ é c d r i var i n i c ar i n i N . rrrt a rft mﬁ m

A . 77 77 n

“ ‘ ' ‘ u d r i d vd r ibh d m i I . m n a lfm rq y aTrTﬁ i q var bhi s

var i e var ibh a D . a i ﬁ n n m y s

var i n a s Ab . m

‘ ' va r i am G . n n Q Tﬁ m n

‘ var i i vci ri u L . ﬁ r m n m s

u u a zu

115 M gsc u li n e a n d n u a . e ter djecti ves in t i a r e declined like

v Bu t the s u bsta nti ves a bo e . ne u ter a djecti ves (ne ver s u bsta nti ves)

m a da t . a b] . e n d i . a n . a n d . a n d 10 0 . y , in the w “ g , loc s ng , the gen d d u a u u o f m a u . l , s bstit te the corresp on ing forms sc lines

116 . u h on i ch n o f n tw o u E p c a g e s q s a d r . These so nds

a a a a a i n exter n a lcombi n a ti on st nd to e ch other in the p r ctic l rel tion , , o f c or r es o n di n surd a n d a : u a 8 p g/ “ son nt in co ntless c ses a becomes r in situa tions r e qulr ln g o r fa voring the occu rrence o f a son a nt ; a n d I r s a u u . n , less often , becomes K where s rd is req ired

a s intern l combin a tion the two a r e fa r less interch a ngea ble . The

a s a n a a r . is extremely common etymologic l ﬁn l , the not common

117 F a s. 1 a a v . A . in l Q . Before son nt, either owel or conso

“ a r se e s a a r n nt (excep t I below) , a is ch nged to the son nt f

u d d a a a u nless , in eed , it be p rece ed by w or n , th s , m

a a a th e a sa l b u t only if the ltering letter st nds immedi tely before m , a t a v d1sta n c e a 1 t m a u d : u ln wh te er before the l tter y be fo n nless , d d v a a l ta l a u a o r a a . ee there inter ene (excep t a y) , ling l , dent l ‘ ’ r u v n a a r e a m a r en a 1 u d m h s , wi n g e mm g 3 m m p ep

See preceding note .

P e r r a n P s ri t r i er . y, S k m 34 Lesson I V .

Era a gn i s a tr a becomes wfiqfi oga i r a tr a ; m {gfi l a gn i s

da ha ti a n i r da ha ti a 95 . becomes W ?! g . See lso

118 . 2 . F a a s a n a a o r e in l W , before y son nt conson nt befor

" a a a d to 0 a n d a a initi l short 3 1 , is ch nge aft the initi l 5 ! is

" d d u t n r a s a a ti m 7 t “ n ' o rop p e ; th s, i “ W E gp j g beco es 1 h m gp

' ‘ a a ti n a s a tr a t n r a j g m rp 3 h $3 zp o t .

I t a i o n to d 119 . is the p r ctice in o u r system o f tr a n sli ter a t ren er

d a n a a a n the sign 8. which enotes this drop p ing of initi l 3 ! , by

v m a k u b r e a thi n ‘f d G k . in erted co m , li e the ro gh g p rinte ree texts

120 . 3 . B a n a l v a a a efore y initi owel other th n short a , ﬁn l

“ a s s a a n d a u u Q R loses its q , becoming simple 3 1 , the hi t s th s

a d a u ft? n a s i ccha ti b 3 11 occ sione rem ins ; th s , 3“ Ta rp ecomes 1 M a n rp a i ccha ti W W ta ta s u da ka m a n W ta ta

121. 4 . F a as a n a v o r in l m before y son nt , whether owel

a s b m a ; a n d a u conson nt , loses its a , ecoming simply the hi t s u a a u t n rm n ‘ as i ccha n ti th s occ sioned rem ins ; th s , E a { ﬁ gp TIT

- ' ‘ {fi f e cl n f p a i ccha n ti ; m a fl fi fl n rp as j a ya n ti i t “ ma fia

n a a a n ti rp j y .

2 ‘ l a 12 a r . . F a r a . B . F in l g 1 in l I in gener shows the s me form w hich E; 8 wo u l d exhibit u nder the s a me con ditions : th u s

W p u n a r sta nding a t the e n d of a sentence becomes 3 1! p un a h; g 3

‘ ‘ ‘ J i r 7 i ut i n d fi n a r a i a o r a fi g , h : b. B , s: i n , g fi -_ m fter m w l g m g m

m a a b v a n d a a u int ins itself efore owels son nt conson nts ; th s , W

u n a r a tr a un a r a a ti p , W W p j g .

12 u u d 3 . 2 d t d . A dou ble r is nowhere a mit e : if s ch wo l

u e b o f a n a r o r b v s occ r , ither y retention origin l I y con ersion of a

r r a n d d v to I , the ﬁrst I is omitted , the p rece ing owel , if short ,

a d b a u : un a r r a m a h is m e long y comp ens tion ; th s , m m p

“ “ ‘ a?” ( Tm p un a r a m a h; i f“ fi afi a gn i s r o ca te Wt fi fl fi

’ ' a gn i r e ca te w fi a fi dheu n e r o ca te fi i fi fi dhen u r e ca te . V Lesson I .

Voca la r IV bu y .

’ r u h r o ha ti Verbs ﬁ g ( ) grow .

’ ‘ ‘‘ h t k n ta ti c u t c u t o ff . li li m dti r ( r ) , m p ( p ) smea r . {i g gf p i i ’ ' m u c m uri c dti d v [u lu m a ti a w w w ( , , k , W ﬂ Hi ) free eli er m p ( p ) bre to p ieces , u m é‘ a . d va a u h rele se e st te , p l nder . m

S u bst . : W 7 5 t a i m . J a n i m . a s wﬁq g , , ﬁre ; ( p rop er nfmp n , , T i g/Z m 21

d a a n . si n . a A . n me) gni , the go of ﬁre W p p , ,

“ - y A J r a ma r a r z m . . m m . n om . r . a m a a f t , , enemy ( , , p , n e of

W a . a si m . . sift; , , sword hero

t si . o r hsa m . M a f : r , m . seer i ﬁ , , tree . W

d o o r m o é s M ) ” ( m . h a c i ? ic a n o m . r . a m imﬁ m p oet W Fae p , , p n e of

‘

i i a . r m . u ta ﬁ rf t g , , mo n in . god

' ' G V O S w w Y S c a n a m . m a n 1. . u u g t lj , , ; (p ) p eop le tr th , righteo sness .

ha r i kh m . n m i d u a n . mis o . r . a o f g g h , , misery , gﬁ , , p , n me

o u a o d . f rt ne . g

Exercise IV.

W 3 ?" “W W W ! “ m fi a m z la l W ’ m i fifi fi fa la lwfi f w w m ga fi la lw Efi m lt m w m la l a a m W a t e r m a w m t t t qm fi rfi fi sfi m e t w : i ga t fi rsa n ao u aft : m m m fi a l

- W <§ l23) v ﬁ1 W I ‘R I M ala wi 51m m i sa l‘sﬁ ‘ m m z n qs n 1 3 g 1 4 15 . i m m o u n t i n u ( a 1 . B oth J dwells in the s . 6 enemies h rl 2 3 1 4 3 a a t h k d . 7 a a u hi s tw wi t s p e rs the ing ( a t ) 1 . R m to ches o sons h z 1 3 2 1 2 i s a e . 1 F u 19. a b nd 8 . ire b rns the trees . Seers sp e k the 3 1 3 4 u . 20 Thr ou tr th . gh righteo u sness h a p p iness a rises (Ii ) for m a n

a Modiﬁers gener lly p recede the word which is m odiﬁed .

3* I V V . 36 Lesson .

2 ’ 1 2 4 3 d en . 21 . two a u a kin g The seer s h nds to ch w ter . 1 3 2 1 3

F u a r e u se on . 2 . 22. r its ( ﬁ t ) the trees 3 Peop le remember

2 ' 1 4 3 2 24 u d m his a d Ha ri . . Ram a h rls the swor fro h n

n L e sso V .

124 er n en a - l thi a m . V bs . U a cc ted g c a ss . Roots of s cl ss for

- b a dd 2 a a their p resent stem y ing 1 g to the root , which be rs the

u 7 n a h a - n dh a a ccent . Th s from 1? is m de the p resent stem W g ;

f m a la bh 1 1 2 lubh a . ro p t , 3 : y

125 o f m a d . The inﬂection ste s of this cl ss follows the mo el of

va d ﬁ g .

“ 126 a d - a u u a a . Cert in i n roots, bec se of their p ec li r exch nges

“I i a n d i - m a a n with { i for s , esp eci lly in the form tio of the p resent

” a r e v b H u a a a a s d e stem , gi en y the ind gr mm ri ns en ing in Q or

(i i o r 0 . a n d a 3 bha i 3 h (cf by them ssigned to the 1 , or

’ - ‘ a a . u t dha u k H du dhe m dhd a ti cl ss Th s an , s c ( in Q ), for s n g ;

’ th e root { hit or 3 T hva (Hin du 3 hve) form s . m hva ga ti ; - ti m gd (H ind u ﬁ gai) m a k es WW ﬁ t gdya .

‘ ’ 127 . F o r a dr se e u u the root g l y, , is s bstit ted in the p resent

’

a a m a a a ti . system nother root W p p, which kes W 3 p cg

‘ ‘ ’ 12 n u n 8 . M a culi es i n B . 3 bhan u su . s 113 ,

u a ua u a Sing l r . D l . Pl r l .

- h n b n b N . W b a us m ha u armarr han a va s

. bhan u m bba n a n A W p “rif t

“ I c bhan n bh n . m gr u u a “13 1 m bhd n u bhyd m d u bhi s

b n a D . m hd c e m m bhan u bbga s

h n Ab . m b d os

— ‘ ‘ “ﬂ ” u w w ﬁ w w t i ' T bha n u m . su n . Su bst ITf! , ,

‘ M ) ‘ ' ’ 3 a n n a n . d d . W m a i m . . ff ﬁi fi féfﬁ 1a , , foo , fo der qrm n , , jewel

“ 7 0 9 J a m a a l . a va m . . r a tn a n . . w e , , horse ( at , , jewel

da dhi i a . u m . a r a . m , , oce n . U fa g , m he p 4 X A t st r W H / , i p ' dla w m . i n ur u a . va u m . w HQ g , , te cher 3 1g y , ,

- a / H ZI /L i a ttr a n . a v u m . n om . . f n r . a m qa p , , le f, letter w s , , p n e of

1 a r a u m . a x e . a . 1W p e , , god

da m a tr u m . d . ua . m p , , foot ; q rter ; £ 3 p , , enemy i kh r a a . a r a m . u y, be m fm t c , , s mmit . i ” fl fl hu i a ba m . a r m m . u fi m , . c s , , s a . f g g , m g p p il , chol r

i n du m sukta b d . n . V d , . , rop $3 , , e ic hymn .

Exercise V.

a ffi r m ufi ffi qfi t ms l m u m m fi a fi a ms l {m fi fi gfi l fi gfi 'fl t au t m m m “i f?! am? i f?m fl zlas lfi zfi m m n fi n a m zn qc u 4 1 2 5 3 2 ’ b u u a a . 20 . A d 19 . Now the s n s r ys clim the mo nt ins rop

1 “ 3 I 2 4 o f a a down r om u d . 2 1 . O m e n w ter f lls f the clo , w e see

3 1 3 2

2 . o th k v en . o r 3 the city . 2 B ings lo e p oets (g 2 . The 1 4 3 ? d r o m u u a 24 win blows (a ?) f the s mmits of the mo nt ins . The

1 “ 3 ? l do t o r king hu rls sp ea rs a t hi s enemies ( . 25 . The schol a r 3 ? 1 3 e 6 Two m e n wi th b ews b f o r e hi s tea cher 2 . come thei r 2 1 d " ’ 2 3 n iz . e i st 27. two da t sons ( ) The kings esire the p o t s jewels ( . 1 2 4 3 2 c r i to u a ce r V . 9 tw o 8 . O sa ﬁ c e 2 . o seer , we i sn ( ) The

Orthodox Hin du s m a inta in th a t the Vedic were

‘ ’ e a u a u u sa w . r v e led to their rep ted thors, who th s them I Lesson V . V . 3 9

3 1 2 1 4 g 3 k wi th ﬁ r e . 30 a Vi sn u wi th m coo food . The seers p r ise hy ns 1 2 4 3 I n a hi s 31 . the city the king c lls enemies

L e sso n VI .

’ - o f a I3 l. Ve r bs . ya cla ss, c on t d . The roots this cl ss which e n d

a m a - u W lengthen their W in forming their p resent stem ; th s ,

’i ta m tfi m a ti bhr o m - bhr c m a ti —bu t HR , W y ; H R , m ﬁ I y this

a d la st m a kes some form s with short 3 ! a . The root Hg m h a s ti the s a me lengthening : m a ﬁ t m ddya .

I3 2 C a d - ﬁ ve b H u a 0 . ert in roots ( y the ind s written with ﬁn l )

' ’ k - d a u dd d a ti m a a n a . e p resent stems with ccente y ; th s , {1 , Q ﬁ t y

a h v vi dh I3S . The root W vy d is a bbre i a ted to f ai l in the

- idh a l present system : fat af a c y i .

k a m a I34 . r b a v The root am; , s id y the n ti es to form its

- a d a a a d present stem ccor ing to this cl ss , re lly forms it only ccor ing

a - a a n d - v a v v to the cl ss , the root owel is lengthened in the cti e oice ,

b u t dd ; u m kr ci ma ti: b u t d not in the mi le th s , , mid le

' kr a m a te .

I35 E ca m u . The root m; , sed only with the prep osition WTd ,

forms W ftﬁ f d céma ti . r

‘ 3 6 . m d/m l N u u . a e ter s i n 3 , honey

u a u a . u a . Sing l r . D l Pl r l

“ ‘ ‘ i . i m hu i m a / N Hg m a dhu W ﬁ a d n Ra f ? d ( mg

“ “ I - n m a d/zu bh d m m a dh h s . 81133 1 m a d/t u a m m y “g r“ u b i

m n h D . Hg ? a dhu e 31W m a d/zu b ya s

‘ “ f b s A . Hm m a dhun a

“ ’ G 21W m a dhun os Hu m m a dhzi n d m VI Lesson .

I37 u bu t n o t u a u m a . Ne ter a djecti ves ( s bst nti ves) in E y t a k e

- I o u da t . a bl. . a c . the forms p rop er to the m sc line in the , gen , sing , a n d - gen . loc . d ua l .

“

ISS . Ch a n e o f ﬁ n a l i t . a E a n d g s 1 Before initi l L j 9,

i t e 3 7i u td n a n d n H i b comes 1 ; th s , 3 11 W j becomes T

' ‘ “ ' ‘ td ii a n d n - tan a tr iln t ii a tr ztn I n a ﬂ li j ; ﬁr t xi i c 3 1W a c .

a a v eh a a a u u d a l st c se , howe er , Q is lmost lw ys s bstit te for the initi l

’ ‘ u td h cha tr z m 1 [ 9; th s , W .

13 9 . F a l i t a n a a l a a d a n d in 3 ; , before initi l t , is ssimil te becomes

a a z d l 551 o r a i s a n s li e , which is written i , (wh t the s me thing)

r u n d l40 . a a a a a a u Before the gg d p l t l , ling l , dent l m tes there is inserted a fter ﬁn a l i n a sibila nt of ea ch o f th e se cl a sses r e s e c tive l F i t m a n usvdm u p y, before which L beco es ; th s for a n a

“ tan c a td h c a am ta thd td hs we ﬁnd m c , for 3 11 am , a m t

* ta thd .

Vocabulary VI.

i ca m d oc m a ti si Ver b s 3 K + m d ( ) p ,

d u r echdti I09 a . C ) go to ; f ll rink , rinse the mo th

’ “ a u ta m lam a tt to one s lot , f ll p on . (TR ( y ) be

kr a m 3 d kr ém a ti I tu td a ti a k m “ d ( ) {LE § ( sy ) rejoice , t e

d u a a k a u . stri e p to , tt c . p le s re in (w

i a ti a J é M < M > m d v (di vy ) p l y . M

h u a v v a n u v va a m a T is r le re lly in ol es historic s r i l , the l rge a j o r ity o f ca ses o f ﬁn a l a n in the l a ngu a ge being fo r origin a l s.

a a u a to i i t c a n d 2 t Pr ctic lly, the r le pp lies only t before i 1 , since a ca ses in vol ving the other in iti a ls a r e excessively r re . Lesson VI .

' ‘ a n bhr a m (bhr ci mya ti § I3I) m cr a m ( cr émya ti ) becom e

u a . w a nder a bo t . we ry

’ i k h h a r a ti a a wa a c- Z a f l 7 7 1 .1 m a d m a d a t u . A r , A w n ( y ) get dr n 5 ( ) t ke y, ste l , X P

- i m r ‘ u lav-w h t h m E v a dh vi dh a ti . M lq y ( y ) hit, p ierce p l nder ,

a m dm a ti u m c (c y ) become q iet ,

u o u t . be exting ished , go a er» ?” M

‘ S b k a tr i a m . a m a n u st fi fi ffl s y , , w rrior ,

‘ a k a m . . o f a Wa s , , die, dice the second c ste .

l at 5a m ee m m - ) dha r m a m . u n i a a t m . k 7 W ﬁ , , inj stice , 3 a rp , , ing . [ W .

A W “ 7 “ . n etr a n . wrong , . , eye [

a li m a m m . . I t d/m n . . , , bee ? , , honey

a r u n mu h . a . g lc a n . u a . w c , , te r ﬁ , , mo th , f ce

- a o x o M k a a r m . . m t u m . d a s, W T z t r , . , s , , be r i g y , e th

ko a . a . m va su n . W a m ﬁ n p , , nger Hg , , e lth , oney .

Exercise VI.

’ m m gfi w fa la l’a fi t w ui fi um m wfi n u i m wfim fi a fa ls lwfa fiw wm f a ls lw fi fimfi fi wfa lu lW W W M Q I W ! ! m : I S lW W i a fi fi f fl ffi lt lfl fi W fi l l c: v i es a m a w m mgfi m a fm qo la m : m fi n qa lai s ‘ ’ ‘( a i m a zma lmi : fn wa mwfl m fi n qs lm fl fl t m mffl lae lm fi m i gwfa w zn aqn » 1 1 3 2 7 ’ 1 . . 6 . The w a rriors pl a y f or money The king s 5 4 l 1 - a 18 . a horses becom e wea ry o n the ro a d to d y . The w rrior 4 3 2 I a hi s Be e s a r e o f S wi th 19. p ierces enemy the sp ea r . fond (E L) z ? 1 “ 3 h o n e . Th hi s . y 20 . e wa ter of hi s tea rs moistens (fa ?) feet 2 1 3 1 2 1 . 2. Two a r e There bees a r e flitting a bo u t (a n ) . 2 men cook

5 ? 4 3 1 ’ 2 3 ‘ a n d u . 2 W a a a ing honey fr its 3 . hen the te cher s nger ce ses , 5 7 s “ ‘ d a a i n a then the schol a rs rejoice . 24. Te rs st nd the w rriors VI I . 4? Lesson VI .

” 1 4 2 3 m v t wi th a eyes . 25 . The ene ies o erwhel m (i ! ) the king rrows 2 1 4 3 u o u 26 . A q a rter f the inj stice fa lls up on (as) the king

L e sso n VII .

l l a “ u a 4 . C u sa ti ve Ver bs (n a ti ve cu r The Hind gr m

m a ri a ns describe a certa in p resent - system which they a ssign to a

“ ” so - a l cu r - a v a - a c led cl ss . This is , howe er , in f ct no p resent cl ss

a t a ll bu t a a u a v o r da u a , c s ti e secon ry conj g tion , which is not con

- u t a a s a v ﬁned to the p resent system . B m ny form tions of thi sort h e

no ca u s a tive va l u e ; a n d i t is chieﬂy these th a t a r e grou p ed by the

H u cu r - a a u d m den omi n a ti ve ind s in their cl ss , which lso incl es so e

i n a a a u a v a . F o r a a u s stems y , with c s ti e ccent pr ctic l p rp o es it is

well eno u gh to consider these v erbs here .

I42 a u a v - m d b a d d e . The c s ti e stem is for e y d ing w y to the

r u u a a n d s oot , which is s lly strengthened ; the strengthening p roces

is in the m a i n a s follows

I43 . 1 . d a a i u a n d a v u t a Me i l or initi l , B , ai r h e the g i

a a ; u a g co r d a ti ; “ a t strengthening , if c p ble of it th s , 31 g , W y

’ ‘ ' vi d vedd a ti b u t t i t f i da a ti . fa g , 3m y ; ag p d, fi g fl fi p y

- I44 . 2 . A a l v h a s v ddhi u ﬁn owel the r strengthening ; th s ,

E dhr dhd r a a ti . B a a d i a n d d a b , m t a fa y efore Q u y , Efi ecome 3; i M ‘ 1 d a n d d o v u l bhi ‘ bhd d a ti 3 11 1 y m a resp ecti ely ; th s , fl , W fi f y y ; 4 ; \ h

' b1 m d a ti bhd v . a , m a qﬁ f y

M S . 3 . Medi a l or initi a l W a in a m etrica lly light syll a ble is

d a n d a u a d u sometimes lengthene , sometimes rem ins nch nge ; th s , /

‘ ’ ‘ ‘ ' ' k a l a u . k d ld a ti bu t c a a u . fi a s , c s fi lfi a fa s y ; a j m, c s fi fl fl fi l \ t

’ a n a a ti j y .

- M S . u u a a The inﬂection is the s l one of stems .

147 Rule o f n i m i n a i on I n . s eup h o c co b t . extern a l combin a tion

a n initi a l son a nt o f wh a te ver cl a ss (e ven a v owel or semi vowel o r

a a u v d n s l) req ires the con ersion o f a p receding ﬁn a l s u r to a son a nt . VI I Lesson . 43

t F a t I48 . F i n a l . 1 . m d a n a a in l a beco es g , before y initi l

a a a a a a a n d a I : u son nt, excep t the p l t ls , the n s ls , t th s , 3“ a ?

' ' m eghat a tr a becom es 3 m m eghci d a tr a ; mm W ﬁ lp ap at

’ ’ r a ksa ti o r M bhr ci mg/a ti o r UWI H gop czya ti becomes UN T

’ ' ' g fi fa p dp d d r a ksa ti or mqrg lmffi p dp d d bhr d mya ti or t ntnfi qt

‘ d a ti a fa p dp ci gop dy .

l49 . 2 . F a i t a a d a n a a a a u a in l t is ssimil te to initi l p l t l , ling l ,

“ o r a l i n the next word ; th u s it becomes i t 0 before -E[ c a n d

‘

ch s a a n d 1 z. . . 3 m e hai ca 5 , j before j , a before a e g , m a g t t t .

“ beco m es fli n g m eghd e c a ; 33“ Elm m eghd t j a la m becomes

m m eghdj i a la m ; mm mm p dp d t lo kd t b eco m es

a d d lIokd t W n d p p .

- I5 O, 3 . B a a t t e a n d efore initi l 11 9, ﬁn l [ becomes ﬁ , the

1 ch u : a at a tr u 11; 9 then becomes § ; th s , m 3 3 rp c h becomes

1 ri ha tr u 3 113 3 : f d c h.

I5 l. 4 a n t m n u . Before initi l a s a ls Ft beco es i : th s , m

‘ ‘ S h n h n a B u t mffi gr d t a ya ti becom es W fi a fi f gr ci n a y ti . the ch a nge

d a m d u a u u into g is lso p er itte , tho gh h rdly sed ; th s , m

hd d n a a ti gr y .

Vocabulary VII .

a r “ . ’ g tu l tola a ti ’ Ver b s HE; ( y ) weigh . g Q w x

‘ ' xm d é w d ) ko i ba a da i n a d . da p ( W e/{ﬂ g/ (denom . stem g q nc g/ ( enom aw é k th i a d a t a . d a ti u . y ) rel te , tell nd y ) p nish

’ ‘ k a l ks ld F “ a t d a n a ti d a ti a a . W s ( y ) w sh . ﬁ 9 T ( y ) bring \

' ’ w 4 m 4 a i a — d i i a a ti ( z a d . a a ti lﬂ d d ve x . 7 m g y ( enom g n y ) g p (p y ) torment ,

’

u u . 5 a zt d a ti . n mber, co nt 1 kp j (p j y ) honor

' 4 ou r c o r d a ti d r a a ti v 3 3 ( y ) stea l . Ep r (p y ) o ercome ; 3 1 ' 161 td a a ti a . 3 3 4 ( d y ) strike , be t 44 VI I I Lesson . VI I .

ka - Sub t r ﬂ a n . . s Q ua] p , , gold p iece

a n a ka m . a . loka m m a: j , , f ther m , . , world , p eop le

da i ti k i h a s c u n s m e n t . . d m zd m ” ; p (sing a n

' u a n . . s dhu m Q p ny , , merit a . m a n a . H W , , holy , s int M ha la n . f u a . 1e ¢ } via p , , r it ; rew rd { suva r a n . . ( j a ﬁ n , , gold {W

“

r d m d a i a n . a d m a m y z , , note ? sitta m . d v a . ( H ! , , ri er , ch rioteer

. sten a m . . p oem , , thief

Ad ver b s i va a s k { a , li e

i Exerc se VII.

’ fi a zg a mi j nw gsfi rt fl fi n qum msa m m m m m m fi sa fi ls lwfi éafl wfi fi m fir w nm m

- a w a a fi a nu lwfi m m w z Iii ! at ri a 1m m ’ “fi lm m fi fi wt t tm w u t lg a filI nfi l

’ m rfiw m le l m ar W a ms u fi t m o u N ew W a l aa l gfi w m fi m fi m l am m a fi shw gm n qe u 4 ’ 2 s 1 14. v a 15 . Thie es ste l the p eop le s money . The two boys 3 2 1 5 2 a d u 16 . a o w sh their mo ths . The f ther tells his sons ( t ) the 4 g 1 3 5 4 a d n d rew r of Si . The schol a rs honor a n re verence their

2 3 1 2 5 4 a te cher . 18 . Ye both bring fr u its in yo u r h a nds a n d co u nt 1 3 2 them . 19 . 20 Merit p rotects fro m m isfortu ne . The ch a r 1 4 2 3 1 i o te er s k I bl k . 21 . n a a stri e the horses with stic s nger ( . ) the 5 n 2 3 “ ki g p ierces the thief with a sp ea r .

L e sso n VIII .

- IS2 Ver bs a c o n n . n M i ddle . , j uga ti o Pr ese t I n di ca ti ve . The p resent in dica ti ve middle of verbs whose stems end in a is inﬂected a s follows :

I I Lesson VI .

I 8 F a e a n d ‘ o m a u a 5 . in l ti zh re in nch nged before a n initi a l

shor t a b u t a a a . u va n e a tr a be W , the w dis p p e rs Th s , a ? a t?

3 ‘ “ comes 3 5?$3 va n e tr a ; Q ? bha n o a tr a becomes “E h S3

‘ ' r a fa r a 0 bhan o t . By the commonest c se of ﬁn a l ﬁ is where it

rep resents ﬁn a l m a s (see

a i it - m o f a d a d I5 9 . The ﬁn l { or B ele ent ip hthong is ch nge

d v E o r i v a n v o r to its corresp on ing semi owel L y t , before y owel I d x w u SS u d a . u e i phthong , e cep t hen the r le of wo l p ply Th s , Q

“ E a a a n d a t a 3 0 3 a v a n d becomes r ; y, i , m y; a becomes 13 ; , a a 5 - (a t (i v. u i a 3 3 n e a wr , M Th s, n intern l combin tion , 1 becomes w

‘ i W n a ya ; ah - wbho- a becomes “a bha va ; so Vi - a re: n ai - a ya yields a - n d - bh u - a - a n a a a a a a a bhav a . a m y y , f rg m y yiel ds W W y

I n ex ter n a l a I60 . u combin tion , the res lting semi vowel is in gen

a a n d u a u a . u er l dropp ed ; the res lting hi t s rem ins Th s, 3 ?{ FR

va n e i ti becomes a ? {ﬁ t va n a i ti (thro u gh the intermedi a te st a ge

’ a fl fi xfi t va n a y i ti ) ; “fi ll{fi f bh a n o i ti becomes m a f f a bhan a

‘ n i e b fa r i ti (thro u gh m ﬁ fd bha a v i t ) . The ca se o f ﬁn a l Q is y

u . a I6 the more freq ent See lso 4.

a a a u a d be I6I . Cert in ﬁn l vowels m inta in themsel ves nch nge

a n v u a r e 1 . t e a n d o a s u a fore y following owel . S ch i , ar , Q d l

d a n d u a u i r l endings , both of eclension of conj g tion ; th s , ﬁ rﬁ {3 g

’ - i “ ha l t 2 a o r i ha a ri sa dhi t a tr a 1 a ? e a r a . . , w ; 53 p The ﬁn l ,

v a n u T he i n dr a 3 3 he a n e . only , owel of interjection ; th s , { i , 1 g

Vocabula ry VIII. " t f d u i n loc S Ver b s ( ep onents) spring p (mother . ) i?ﬁ ﬁ

r bha bh a te S e kJ / a i ka a . h E a lo u M W ) 7 ? wi lt ] y (denom a r t a “T L s ( ds ) p H i ﬁ é )

' ' ‘ m r i di é - c v W a te a sk w . t o 1 m r a te e . y ) for ( w 1 g ( y ) ﬂ p ,

l ' c e i h a /n i g m a a i k k a te se e d . a t dta te v . e /u j ﬁ s ( s ) , behol m y w ) stri e for (w

[ca m kaim a te 1 1 a dh ddh a te . m p ( p ) tremble . 3 4; g (y y ) ﬁght (w

“ r /” 7 i a o f a a . U S a n a te a . lt j (j g/ ) be born , rise , instr ccomp niment) L e sson VI I I . 47

' ’ r ar a bha te a k o a n d va n da te a bh W . ( a Td ( ) t e R ( ) greet , honor ﬁ ) é 6 < ” ( Ol ks id te lea r n W y ( « a / ( h d OI] . r m (Q ) . , begin m r ’ " ’ “ 3 S a /Z 70 “ H a " r u te da t sa h sa ha te du e e e e V ﬁ d r o ca ) ple a se ( . gen . Hg ( ) en re j 4 a m 5a m , ’ '

G i la bh la bha te v a k . E sev seva te v r t ( ) recei e , t e B L ( ) ser e , honor

b 1 1 12 m a n u a m . m a n hom o . Su st . 3 1 sy , , ( )

‘ i i a . a n a r tha m . u . a m a . wa s? , , misfort ne a i y j , , s criﬁce

” a n a n . a , “ B a u d o a m . . ? v . wy ll“ y g , , diligence a , , woods , forest

' ' ' ‘ j ka la a n a va a i vi n a a m ﬁ i e dwn ce d nl m l ( a w e) W y n , . , d nt ge f a ﬁ l y , . ,

a va . a vi ci m . a v . s l tion ﬁﬁ f , , w e

“ - V0 5 4 ( M ta r a m . . (Ti , , tree . 3116 1 book

’

- t m c e ém ) zi dr a m . m a n u dv a m . Ar a n , O h r“ ij , , y ( a? c , , f the fo rt

i a . dv at m . . A a ﬁgm ﬁ l ij , , ry n c ste

d ‘ i M ed e - W a h a ' h ta n v a . a v u . . a a irt e fgﬂ , , d nt ge n

M dhair a n . a d a . a w ﬁ é y , , ste f stness

3 ‘ ' ‘ a u m . a Ad e b v n a L e ea 11 . v : I . n ﬁ 3 p c , , be st r , not ba la n W , . , strength , might .

Exercise VIII.

’ W uwﬁ lm a g a r 8 I WWT§ 1€=I EIW B I VI

fi fi ls lfi mfi : (a ble aai azéi a a fi lc la a fiifii fi w fi le l a re : n o n m a m a m laa lw a f t m w z fi fi l aa t mfi a fi m m a z m h

‘ fi a w fi w las l afi fi a afi t a e fi a lau l vfi m wfrt

“ 5 6 3 17 . tw o m i n str The hou ses yonder tre ble by the p ower ( . )

( ‘ ’ u v m u a s a a e u a i fa , th s , is ery com only sed p rticl of q ot tion ,

u d following the words q ote .

t o w 0L VI I I X . 48 Lesson I .

’ 1 2 3 “ ’ 1 2 gn a . o f o c e s a v . a the w es 18 . The f ther beholds his son s f ce 3 2 4 “ e u 19 . W stri ve a fter the a dva nta ge of the th s

6 s 2 4 1 a k d a k a te a c h e r 20 . s (( ﬁ f) sp e the s . The chil ren their f ther 3 ‘ 2 3 d I n d a a r e for foo 21 . the forest yon er eleph nts

5 “ ?’ 4 1 ﬁ h i n t a 22. ﬁdr s v a g g with be rs . The two Q a ser e the two Ary ns

1 ?’ ? 3 . 23 . F u a v here r its p le se the children 24. W hence do ye recei e

z z “ 3 e N o w th e i m o n y ?25 . two se e r s begin the sa cr ﬁ c e

L e sso n IX .

‘ ’ IS2 . F d i sen d a . eminines in 3 " , declined like flrt , rmy

u l . u u a . Sing a r D a l . Pl r l

' ' sen d sen e d i c sen d s N . 3 ? ( ) fi fl fi

sen am A . 3 “ 7, n n n

’ “ sen a ci sen d bh dm sen d bhzs I . 3 3 111 y W m y m

’ sen a ci i sen d bh a s D . 3 3 13 y ﬁ m q y

wn d d s Ab . m y 77

G sen a os sen d n d m . n n i n fra y ﬁlm

2 sen d d m sen d su L . 213 1 1131: y am

sen e V. a?

“ d I63 . A d v E a a r e n ma . k jecti es in l decli e in the sc li e 23 , in

“ k u k I . Bu t . the fem . li e ﬁrm , in the ne ter li e lia often the fem

“ ' “ 5 n d d k X I m a d . . ste ends in ﬁ , is ecline li e a f t (in Less )

I64 . F a (i i a n d i (i n a d I5 9 3 fi in l ﬂ f? , ccor ing , become 111 g a n d d o v b a n v o r d m resp ecti ely efore y following owel iphthong .

i m a d d a v a a u E . 2 The L or t y then be rop p e , le ing hi t s The 1 is

a a wa d d bu t u in f ct l ys rop p e , the a not often . Th s , w W? \

u d u o f a becomes , thro gh the me i m m ra , W 1 ma ;

fa af t r becomes m a .

I65 . I a a v l a n d niti l Q , fter short owe s , the p rep osition WT, the I Lesson X . 49

v a : u W be c o m e s p rohibiti e p rticle becomes Q th s , 3 W W?

W ; 3 11 m an ta 3 11m m.

“ a o f a a I66 . An initi l Q root gener lly becomes “I a fter a

verb a l p c o n ta i n ip e i th e r origin a l o r rep resenting ; u ‘ refix g fgL R s ch ’ a ‘ s a l . u . w rs between , fi er, a n , etc Th s , W fl fi l, fa mifl fa

I67 a r e u d r . The following p reﬁxes often se befo e v erbs : 3 m

‘ ’ ‘ ” ‘ ’ a a a d d o ﬁ a u u o r o u t fter , long , tow r ; W own , ; i p , p forth ;

’ ‘ ’ ‘ ‘ ’ ‘ 1 to a o u t 3 1 , tow rd ; fa down ; in , into ; ﬁ g , forth ; W to

’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ a. d a a a u d a u a u d a ist nce , w y ; nﬁ ro n bo t , ro n ; 11 forw rd , forth ;

‘ ’ a F R long with , comp letely .

Vocabulary IX.

Acti ve Ve rbs ﬁ ll- W (p a r dj a ya te) be c o n

’ “ “ ’ - a va a ccha ti u u r a r el w a c t sen se ﬁ a vv w W I i la ( g ) nder q ered ( y . .

a d . u st n conq er . ) r ' “ d 1 r a a d a te ﬂ e e fo r r g W descen . 15 I t (p p y ) e

- ﬁ 1 tr u u to a ce . o er son . ﬁ i 3 1 in od ce , f ge ( f p )

d ‘ a M e e a o/re ri te b atw ll 7 44 (a consecr te, ﬁ l w ) beg, get y begging . 7 7

a r i d a ti a a u 1 d m . m a a te u qﬁ w n y ) le d bo t ; 2 11 : ( eno rg y ) h nt g g a m 1 M a g a k m rry . for, see .

‘ “ - m a n ila 3 u t dta tz ﬂ u . i vdr ta te u W ?( p ) y p i t ( ) exist , s bsist, be ,

a va r éba ti . ( g W3 ( ) descend . become

a be brilli nt, shine ;

D e o n n t p e s be eminent .

“ ' m GR (sa rizga ccha te) come [ M WM together, meet .

ﬁ f . m r . S nb st . : a d . a . y m W g g , p , the G nges a

“

m . a ( . m . u a o f g , rrow m , ho seholder , he d

f . da u a W , ghter, m a iden . f mily .

Pe r r a r i t P i n s r e r . y , S k m “ I 0 5 N 5 0 Lesson X . / “ 4“ W s11 i t i ) M M , " f 1 1 f . a . . C J A u 5 1 11 , sh de ﬁ m n p rotection . f

m . n o m . r . Pr a a a a t ! f . . m , p , y g ( a ” , twilight ; f i zw ’ f 3ﬁ f

C1 t a aba . 3 m . a v . y , All h d) Q ? , he en

“ 6 a e n . a . n . a . r : , fe r m , he rt

ﬁ le a } 1 1 f . . M 11 51 , wife , wom n Adj

a u a k . f . . . a “Tm , sp eech , l ng ge m , f bl c

c . i d k . f a . b ﬁ a t . , lms um , f a n; , wic ed

u a a t v ° " u h m. r . a m . 3IT m u a a ; W i t p , Y m n ( i er, , f , ch , b nd nt

l a . the J u mn a ) . p . m ny

m . n . a . m , , b ttle Adv

“ t w f . . os os. . ( WT , street Hg together with (p p

d . f . a fa g ” , knowle ge , le rning

“ k ? m . d . u u . f ag ! , bir Hm s ddenly, q ic ly

’ 3 m . h u n te r ) 1TH , r W W

Exercise IX.

“ ” W W W tqlm fm m m m fl fit m fa ls lw m m w : I Q I fi I ma xi m : a ft ’ ‘ i a z W a l t“ fi mfiéi a m i ai nfi r. m um r nfi fi r

w m nw wfi m a fi M W I mm m <§ l64> wfi W fi n e lan W W W sewn: g if t i t fi afi fin qo n W W W W W H M fa wn w a r m s Hfi f fi W m fi m e fi m lm i m ffl ‘ m fa sfi a ma nn fi ww a m fi m fi t n as " l 6 2 3 ‘5 1 t o r u a v 5 . The w s ch o la s beg m ch lms from the wi es of

“ 1 2 4 u G a u h 1 . Pr a a a the ho seholders . 6 At y g the nges nites wit the 3 1 2 4 5 3 - a u 17 . Ba d o o a a v . 18 . O Y m n a . men d n t re ch (EnL) he en

3 2 7 ’ e ’ 4 s - V u da ( i a a a n a Ha a u . 19. I n is n to y m rries G g , ri s d ghter the 1 3 4 2 6 7 i b b a ttle the kings ﬁ gh t with a rrows a n d conqu er their e n e m es .

“ ” Birds of a fea ther ﬂock together . I . Lesson X . X 5 1

2 3 l 6 4 2 H tw o 0. ere in the street the kings dismo u nt from thei r bl a ck

5 1 ’ 2 3 4 1 horses . 2 . The seer 8 two sons a r e eminent in lea rning 3 1 2 4 2 F th l 5 2 . a e u a b . ﬂ u rom fe r of wicked h nters ( ) two birds y p .

1 2 4 " 23 . lo o . da . I3 3 v d At twilight ( ) the seers , ) re erence the go s .

2 1 3 5 4 6 24. I n o f v a a d the street the ill ge the te cher a n the schol a r meet .

2 1 4 W e o 25 . tw sa c r iﬁ c e to the gods f o r o u r selves ; we do not s a cri 5 3 ﬁ c e fo r H a ri

L e sso n X .

IGS . e r b . a i V s P ss ve I n ﬂ e cti on . A certa in ‘ r A n

d d u a a v stem , inﬂected with mid le en ings , is sed only with p ssi e m a a n d a ll fo r a e ning, is formed from roots which there is occ sion

a a a v u I n a d to m ke p ssi e conj ga tion . ts sign is a ccented Ely/ a dded

u a n a a to the root , witho t y reference to the cl sses ccording to which

n d the a ctive a middle form s a r e m a de . The inﬂection is p recisely

’ “ a o f a - u ? ta m é ta n a se like th t other stems . Th s , a ! /, a n ? y , (F i ﬁ

ta n dte . y , etc

l69 u d - m dd a e g . O tsi e the p resent s stem i le forms m b u s y y _ i d_ _e_ . _

a v bu t e a a th e r a a o a . p ssi e sense ; th re is sp eci l form for . p ss in

r d . the 3 . sing

f d l70 . m o th e a ssi ve si n i s a e The for f root. to which p g p pend

u u a a a u a u a n a a d a n d is s lly we k one . Th s p en ltim te s l is rop p ed ; o cert a in a bbre vi a tions which a r e m a de in the we a k forms o f the

a v a a r e u a p erfect , or in the p a st p ssi e p rticip le fo nd lso in the

a v - m . E . . a . 3 3 m i p ssi e p resent syste g from W , p ss 1 13 ; fro a l l. 9 w 1 l ( mp K» 2 F P 1 “ m . I n a e a n d r m the roots 3 1 , ﬁ g , n , sq, rg, a t, the 1

u 1 3 . u t becomes in the p res ; th s , 3 3 56, “ a, W ? (see no e to IOZ , 3 . m a a k 311 a n d 11 a n d m a k ) “ Si il rly , W m es ( 3 , 3 W e m a n d W 3 ; W m a kes ﬁlm? Lesson X .

l u I72 . F a a n d a r e a t in l 3 of roots gener ly lengthened ; h s , fM u ) ” fa she s r e?! M o g 0,

F a a h a d u I73 . in l 3 3 is in gener l c nge to fl ; th s , $1 fi fifi ;

“ b u t d d tw o a a k u n a u if p rece e by conson nts it t es g ; th s , m, Elﬁ ” ‘ h ‘ r N w ,

“ va a a v i The roots in ri ble which the n ti es write with a s; ,

“ o r l bi le te r to u a a; , a a t d Bi ; , , ch nge to if ah p rece e , g th s 3 Q ( “N 0 ‘ - l z s r e w alt e b u t e m a ; j j , m , 3, ga

“ I

l74 . F a i ls u u a a d to u in l n of roots s lly ch nge t ; th s , Q T,

‘E t l B u t a k a n d so m a ; WT, W ; ﬁ ﬁ W Tm es W W ; some

b a ow ! other roots in WI . f l

a n d u u a v I7S . The roots Hi m s a lly form their p ssi es from

a a u B u t a n d l u . p r llel roots in a n; th s , m . a n ? aw?occ r

V f a u I76 . o a v a n d d a v erbs c s ti e inﬂection , enomin ti es in W ,

‘ form th ei r p a ssi ve by a dding a to the c a u s a ti ve or denomin a ti v e

‘ ‘ ‘ ’ a t h a s d : u a stem fter a ; been drop pe th s , a rﬁﬁ is stolen ; ny?

‘ is co u nted

I77 . a a v u a u b The p erson l p ssi e constr ction , with the logic l s ject

u a a u a a v , p v ; in the instr men“ t l is rtic l rly common with tr nsiti e erbs _ .f " - o M l

a n d so a a v u t not less the imp erson l p ssi e constr ction , bo h with

d ‘ a v a n a v v b . u H a v tr nsiti e intr nsiti e er s Th s , ﬂ ?m m a? e en

’ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ is re a ched by the m a n ; m m ?! one comes hither ; gm? o n e

[ ‘ d ‘ ’ 19 9 9 r 1 8 3 a i . sa . d 1 5 it is he . e they y The p re ica te to the

instr u menta l s u bject of s u ch a constr u ction is o f co u rse a lso i n

’ str u m e n ta l u ‘ R S a a v a s a r . ; th s , U fimffim fi a fi m li es see

a lr Voc bu a y X.

Ve b i th a k r e c ei ve se i ze . r s, w p a ssi ves t e , ,

’ ' ’

. kr i te i a a k d o do a t . da t i . a e . (p y ) m e , , p erform ( p ; p ey ) bite f i di f ?” '

2 d dti . di a to c u t m ( y ; p g ) , di . di ldi e a . g m p . a/ ) p l y

’ I é i ' a tz . dte . dhi la 1 . a u t a . n (g y ; p g y ) sing m (p y ) p , pl ce

Lesson X . XI .

Use a ssi ve con str u cti o n s thr ou ho ( p g u t . ) 2 3 l 1 20 . a a d i r d 2 1 . Gr in is sc ttere for the b s . G a rl a nds a r e twi

3 z ? 1 4 u se m i d 22. a ned ( W ) by the a e n s . Ag in H a ri is p ra ised

3 1 4 3 2 ‘ b Ra a . 523 . V u k a hi s 2 y m isn drin s w ter from h a n d . 4. Plea s

1 3 z’ 4 5 6 a n tl l o n e sh a de so sa e 0 le y (Eﬁn ) sleep s in the ; y the p p .

1 z 1 4 2 ?’ 2 . s r iﬁ c e . 2 a o n 5 Both seers a c 6 . The f ther sets hop es his child 3 4 1 2 2 h e ’ 7. a t a d 8 . The schol r neglects te cher s comm a n . 2 The 1 3 ? 2 tw o a k a u thei r - k 720 m 9 G a schol rs thin bo t text boo ( ) . 2 . r in is 3 l 2 1 i n e lds . a i m s ﬁ 0 . r a s . sown the 3 They pl y with dice ( p e s. p )

k ’ 1 2 5 ?’ 4 3 1 . The ing s com m a nds a r e received by the obedient ser va nts 1 3 2 32 . The m a n digs in the ﬁ e ld .

L e sso n XI .

- l78 e b . I m er f A ti e a on u a ti on . . V r s p ect c v , c j g The imperfect is

d - r e ﬁ x i n th e a u m a n d a form e from the p resent stem by p g g ent 3 L dding

a set of second a ry endings .

f - a u u I79 . I w a the p resent stem begin ith vowel , the gment nites ' a a v ddhi - v u a : u with it to form lw ys the r g g el, not the g u th s W + f

o r i o r u r

8 0 I f a n a u n I . p rep ositio be p reﬁxed, the gment comes betwee

“ - - a n d v a s k u ll a . m p rep osition erb , in Gree : th s , from E i f t, im p f ste

“ - i e a t i a i i m f o E t-11 . a m ; ! t n ; fa l, p Stem x 1

v a : ISI . The inﬂection in the a cti e is s follows

u a . u a . Sing . D l Pl r l

' ' ' ' ' a ua dhm “ m a va dczua m u a va dd m a

' ' do a d a s W F R a va da ta m wa g?! o va du zu

' ' ' ' a va da t va da tci m e a va da n 3 . wa g er m am a wag r

IS2 a a a . The imp erfect is the tense of n rr tion ; it exp resses p st

m u a n u a . time si p ly, witho t y f rther im plic tion

“ ‘ ’ I8 3 . ol lla bi c F em i n i n es i n i k v . P ysy i , declined li e Ha , ri er M au h a 7 g m. Lesson XI .

u u a D a l . Pl r l .

a eﬁ n a dyd u W E: n a dya s W n a di s

’ 1 1m n a di bbzs

’ W n a di bbya s

- n Ab . wan Q a dyas

G 39

’ L W W u a a ya m V i f; ma de

IS4. F i n a l n a al . a a a n d u a s a s s The n s ls q, q, a , occ rring ﬁn ls a ter a shor t a e a r e u a n n i ti a l v : u f , do bled before i owel th s , W g ] y m

fi tfi E H beco m es wffl s ffi l.

V r ocabula y Xl.

Vi n — 1 r a vi dti . Ver b s fa i l 1 (p c ) enter g r ,

3 a va k 'u td i o a 23; 3 13 ( g t ) c u t o ff r W se t oneself.

' - b - t { m . d a r a ti te . N a down a + 2 11 ( , ) fetch , bring h

1 d ha ti a 13 (p t ) recite , re d .

’ ‘ w e r v w f . ub st waﬁ wife , consort . S . ,

m . ur o e n i n e a ll1 fi f . a u . s m ea w t . fl , p p ; g ; g fi , d ghter i e m k a V n r . l1e . u ” m om t I a . W ” p god ndr m , boo (m n scrip t) f

n o m . r m . a p . , the goddess a t , ﬂood , high w ter .

' ti I a i f . a u d ndr n . Uﬁ lﬁ , e rth , gro n .

n . m . a a I I , p oe m m p riest , Br hm n .

» m a d ‘ f g. , I Q M ” m m . h . t u . W . a . ﬁ s , liter ry work , book m , Z ‘ ” Vw -a t t “ W e 1 G f . t ( raf t , mother . m ﬂ l ” Q / u . , W V ' e é ’f f 4 o € f ° m w M “ f f . u . . a a v va . m , fem le sl e , ser nt W T , co ncil , meeting 7 f 7 ,

“ d u n a af t f , go dess , q ee 3 3 1 f , rmy

‘ ' ‘ f. n . o f a fl fl fl , city . Eh? , song p r ise .

f m a ﬂ Tﬁ . , wo n, wife . I I . 5 6 Lesson XI . X

Exercise XI.

’ gufa finfi ew m lm afi a zm a i m mm m wfi i m w w fi afi a wm m ns nm zm fw a g m q fi fi 'W W W I é lm fi r W m t ls lm ér w m m m wm l c lgfm

‘ " W ET W a i le l 11s fl a n: fi fi a fi mo 1W e“ ve rt W 1 as 1 fi re?f a t es “ 111 113 711 3 3 16 sna r - W 3 1 C R 1 fi rm afi vfi' W a ngqua rts a a h : 3 111 1 II Q Q II “ 2 3 W u 4. o r a 1 hen ye beso ght (I raq) the king f p rotection ( ce . 5 7 6 r 2 e u . I n v Gra a then y were (Q T) in misfort ne 15 . the two ri ers ng

4 ‘ 3 ( 5 1 4

a n d m u n ét a . a Y a it isRa ﬁ?) high w ter 16 . The two women s ng

3 2 1 g ?’ f r h e o a a u R e . O se e s do a a a n 17 . w song pr ise bo t m (g ) , y y

6 4 s ’ 1 f d u both s a cri ice to the go desses with melted b u tter ? 18 . The q een s 2 6 3 5 4 - u n . Women ser va nts bro ght jewels a d p recio u s stones . 19 I n 1 2 “ 5 3 a a bl. a u k d nger ( ) the te cher str c the schol a r with his h a n .

l 5 “ 3 o 2 2 va u a ln 0 . The two ser nts bro ght w ter from the cistern p ots .

4 3 2 l 21 . c u t o ff i m . d a . h Ye ( pf ) woo from the trees with the xe 22. T e

1 6 “ ’ 2 3 5 a d I dr a i I d a seer p r ise n n , n r s consort , with hymns

L e sso n XII .

' ‘ e u r e l8 5 . F m i n i n e Subst a n ti ve s i n z a n d 3 a declined a s in

a a d o n a o f i the p r igms the next p ge . The two series forms exh bit

a a : o n e i e a complete p r llelism where the shows , y, , or y, the other

5 0 SI. I n D v u v 0 a v . . Ah . shows resp ecti ely , , , or ; cf , the ,

’

G a n d . . w a u m a l d z L sing , these stems sometimes follo f t; th s y ,

’ ~ - - db - - d s d m en e d z vd s vd m . y , y , , ,

’ “ ‘ ’ IBB. F emi n n e i n z a n d u : n i s 3 Fiﬁ ! opinio , XI Lesson I .

u a u Sm g D l . Pl ra l

' N “fa g : m a ns ti t-ﬂ m a ti t 1m m a ta ga s

A wﬁ m: m a ti m i 1m m a tzs

’ ‘ I W T m a tyci m m a tibhya m Hffl fi i fl: m a tzbbzs

D 11113 m a ta ge ti ff-nag ; m a tzbhya s

' A b Hﬁ q m a tes

“ . 1 1 Q 3 Q 8 3 9 $ 9 S 3 8 Q

V. I f?m a te

“

IS7 . A d e c ti ve s i a n d u a r e fe g j in t a often inﬂected in the

- a n d B u t a v s u d o n e m inine li ke t i ffr $13 . djecti e in 3 p recede by

a va v m a f conson a nt often form deri ti e feminine ste by dding i .

‘ ’ “ - ‘ ’ u ? u . a . e . . a v Th s , a s m ch , N m sc rg q, f a f t, n 3 3 ; gm he y ,

“ a 11 . . d k . m . . if , . i a } m , f t f i i This fem is then eclined li e t

lr II Vocabu a y X .

8 6 1m v u u t o ézc te a ch i n , Ver b s : W W , /

' Ica l u w ( p a te) be in order ; tend str ct . ‘ ’ W m d u w 2 5 vi n ddti vi n ddte a u . or cond ce to ( . 1 1?( , ) cq ire 7 f Lesson XI I .

r o . a m f . ﬂ a t S u bst. : fﬁ , y, g

‘ ‘I W m . u a l f . a va v a . m g , q rre . flfi fi , s l tion , deli er nce

f . k t ﬁ n . s a ana l , p oem . a fg , stic , .

“ f ‘ ' f . m . r a . 0 1 afiffi , glory . ( fi q , y ; rein

‘ W M t f . VA ( ) m . ﬁ : , cowherd , shep herd ; ( I f? , night, M

o ’ a ) u a d a ( m u d . g r i n . j f m . , wo n

E f . a . f . . nfa , birth ; c ste ; kind m , rep ose

f . o f a a f . a . ﬁ ‘ , decision ch r cter ; E ﬁ l , he ring ; holy writ g . j

i u a . f d l w bo o k . ﬁ r . a a co r ge g , tr ition ;

” W W t M ) m . m . a m . W , ( . , p rince 6 3 , sleep ; dre

f . ft? u d . t f . a w . ﬁ h , p r ence, intelligence gi , j

f . d v Wﬁ ﬁ , e otion , honor . mm,

0 v m . a . F . lo w m f , p rt , p iece ha , f m , .

0 M m f . . . a a c ) f? , m , m , . i p rosp erity, blessing y N f , p rincip l ﬁrst 0 X I f . Q W a u a d . m . f . ﬁ! a n . . 5 . X i , e rth , gro nd, l n ? , , , or f a}, light E

Exercise XII.

a m m a fi m m m zu fi m zm fi rfi fi r m fa m fl z u s g y M i s fi t q u g fi a fi g qfag a u fi m ’ me t a ln a ri a s fl m é la la fi zfi fi fi gmrw fiq. f a m g ngi afl gfi r w fi lu lm sfw fiw m z li l fi fl ’flI W w m m t s l Tfi éfi fl fl fi m ti ara

’ ‘ m m m qm a fi qfi m a ma nm an fl f’fl fi fi i’i ma t fi rst m m m w rfvia : t ea 1 w warm as " C18 11 3 4 2 1

. r u 15 Visnu rejoices a t the de votion (i n st . ) of the p io s 6 7 s 3 1 2 5 a n d v i v a 16 o f a a w gi es del er nce . . Men m ny c stes d elt in the

4 1 3 2 5 6 . 17 . d se u a n d u p city The bir s e the h nter , ﬂy from the “ ? 1 4 d d r gro u n . 18 . By the p ower of intelligence we o verca me a ve s I I I I . Lesson X I . X 5 9

s 1 4 3 z u w o o d . a 20 . B ity . 19. The cowherd g rds the cows in the y

1 3 2 6 4 5 a u m u 21 . intelligence a n d diligence ye cq ire ch glory . The

1 4 " 2 3 1 tw d i s 22. o p oem tends to the p oet s glory ( o a t ve ) . F r p rosp erity 3 2 1 4 23 a r e a d we b o w before (Di va . The reins being f stene 2 3 1 3 ’ I n (m g to the ho rse s j a ws 24. the n ight we both rea d 2 (i mpf . ) holy writ

L e sso n XIII .

- IBB. Ver bs a on u I m d , c j ga ti on . p er fe ct M i d le . Th e imp erfect m iddle o f v erbs in a is a s follows

. u u a . Sing D a l . Pl r l

- ’ ’ ' ’ 1 a la bhe a i ° dla bhc wa ki o dla blzczma hi . a te{ii ( ) W 3 f€ wmfg

' ‘ ' ’ 2 a la bha tbci s O a la bbetbd m o a la blza dh a m . w arm; ﬁ m q m v

’ 3 dla bba ta 0 l bh t a la bha n . W m d a e d m ” F a ta W a n d u a of . ? a n d o f ith m W of the d l , I f ! Q ? the i i n d . m d p res . .

I - ‘ i 8 9 . Ro ot wor ds i n i a r e declined a s follows

I n - n d l D n d . . a . . . A b . . a s the , Gen , L sing , G p , these stem

' ' ’

t u dhi d z dhz ds dhz d m dlzi n d m . Cf . some imes follow a f t ; th s , y , y , y ,

- - ISS . v a the a a v a § Obser e th t where c se ending begins with _ ow l

m a 5 i s ”l the ste ﬁn l split into g . I Lesson X I I .

a dd a a r e u d v I90 . The following ition l p refixes se with erbs , a ‘ ’ ‘ ” ‘ ’ ‘ v a v o n u u x u mf a o er , bo e , ; wfi: nto , close p on a ffi ] to nto ,

‘ ’ a a v ‘ d g inst (often with im plied iolence) ; ﬁ t own , into , in nﬁ i

' ‘ “ ‘ ’ a k a a u a a a a o u t . b c to , g inst , in ret rn a p rt, w y,

I9I. v a a n d va v a Both in erb l forms in deri ti es , the ﬁn l or B o f a p reﬁx ordin a rily li n g u a li ze s the initi a l Q o f a root to which

d a n d a fe w a i r a v a a n it is p reﬁxe ; , in c ses , the t em ins e en fter

d 3 ] a u d u a u m ’ r interp ose of gment or re p lic tion ; th s , fro W ﬁ ,

- W r t . a . 3 . a . m ; alt a f s, p res p ss W 13 , imp f p ss W

" I 2 a o f a n d E e 9 . The ﬁn l R p reﬁxes in {i t B E becomes L b

1 u t a 1 r + . fore initi l q, q , q, 5; th s , from g m , ﬁ ma ﬁ

V l ocabu ary XIII.

’ r a tzbhé a t ver b s ; m m nfa (p s e) a nswer F o r é ¢ ’ ’ f v - kr m a z m t o ar a . a ti d t kr a a e w . a ce . m + a fa ( , ) ( f p )

a a . a u . p ss beyond or by, tr nsgress rise ; r le

’ a i u é a te b e r a c a a ti a a l W ( j j y ) born , ( y ) rr nge , comp ose

a rise from (a litera ry work) .

' “ r a ti éc zti o ld a k n a . W I“(p s ﬁ b c ; rise, come into existence W gé

v u . . £11 Wﬁ i co er, keep sh t forbid

vi n d a ti d a a e + 1 n i séva te d d v m fi r ( ey ) is pp e r, fi fi ( ) well ; e ote

a . p erish . oneself to ; ttend

" ﬁ d -f u a a v g GE gir ; Q T a ﬁ x mo nt, st nd bo e

u . v r u v . eq ip or o er ; le , go ern

661 m ' i n i s a d a te + 1 h1 n dex u ff d . W W ( p y ) grow , g l qﬁ t y inj re , o en ( W a r m . a ) a rise from

v a n d ‘H a v a ﬁ t Sometimes, with the erbs Hg TT, bbre i ted to ; ‘ ’ a kt . m m a s a u : a b u t in cl a ssic l S ost co m only u sed conj nction lso ,

‘ ’ to o .

I I . I V 62 Lesson X I X .

” u a i m r . a the l a ngua ge of the Arya ns : th s nswered ( p e s p ss. ) the

B d v a 18 . v w s Brahm a ns . y its cle erness the o e freed from the

. W a d b . 20 net . 19 . The te cher girde oth boys with the girdle hen

’ m d a a d la w wa s ff d a a i n st. the schol a r s o esty dis p p e re , then the o ende g

W did ? 22 . 21. hence ye get (m ) the white cows The whole

23 . F o r da t . ea rth w a s r uled by the grea t king . p rosp erity ( ) we

- T o l - 2 . a k took refu ge with the king (llHg) . 4 w w boo s were com

V u m k a c o w u h p osed by is n . 25 . The il of the bl ck is dr nk by bot children .

L e sso n XIV.

- l r b a c on u a t n . r n t I m er a ti ve ti ve . 93 . Ve s, j g io P ese p Ac The inﬂection o f this m ode is a s follows

u a . Sing . D u a l. Pl r l

' ' ' “ - ’ c a dam v dam a 1 . W erg rat va dava W a

’ ’ ’ ' 2 a ta . HQ c a a W va da ta m m va da

’ ’ — ' o a d 3 . w va da la m o a da tam a g g; v a n tu

I94 . a r e u b u v m s The three ﬁrst p ersons p rop erly s j ncti e for ,

n d a d r u u a ccor ingly often express a wish o f t re a ction .

v I95 . The second a n d third p ersons o f the imp era ti e ex p ress

a o r u oftenest comm a n d ; sometimes a wish f t ure a ction . The

“

a v u i m v . neg ti e sed with the . is RT

I96 . A a i m v . 2n d 3 r d . . r re form , either or p ers sing (or

a d d I ts va u a o u . f is m e with the en ing a m ; th s , m l e is th t a u u i m k to a n d to te p osterior or f t re v . (li e the L a tin forms in ) .

- “ ‘ IS7 . Root w r d i n 3 1 it d k l f a o s , inﬂecte li e i , e rth

d u a d m a d exem pliﬁe in the exercises , no f rther indic tion nee be e ,

a a o f o f excep t in sp eci l inst nces , the p osition the words in the

a k S ns rit . Pl u ra l N V wi g bbas m bbu va s A W b/mva m

Ab ‘JEIK bkuva s n n G bbuvos W W bhu va m ‘ ‘ L O-lﬁ f bbu vz

m c a di mas

Vocab lar XV u y l .

Ver b : s m p a ss dr dte m m ( py see look . ) ,

’ i a blz ds n Wﬁ ‘ ( y a tz a - y ) rep e t , Ha l a l inh bit ; d well . u le M M st dy , a r n l M ’ ' i I r a M t I (p va r ta te) get a going g ,

throw a o r a o u forw rd bre k t, a rise

into . V Lesson XI .

1 m f . o f i 4 a a . Su bst W , song p r se ; pr ise

“ - i n - l W f . a u w . m . u a Wﬁ tﬁ , g est . g m , d ghter

' n w ﬂ . u u . d i , ntr th A j

0 m . u a . . W , st dy ; recit tion . W , f m , lower ; other

“ ' i r o m m a n d t . , . . rﬁﬂ c , p rescrip ion W f highest ; other

0 k d Vi m/£ 44 1 n a a . . . 0 ) m . , se t , ch ir W , f m , croo e , bent

“

i f . e s . a a . a u u . gg , sp oon , p s criﬁci l W , f h be tif l

Sp oon . Ad m :

“ 5 44 “ d u d e . 1 m . u u a m T]? , lect re , lesson . W n er , n erne th (g ) t f . . a u u . W T , cre t re ; s bject ﬁ m long (of ime)

f r a a a . f a u d . WEE i ” e rth , gro n { K , f r

r o h i iti v a . I n b e a r ti cle k W n orn ment p p , li e Greek

3 . ai a n e. f . f, L tin 1 , eyebrow N

‘

a i fe A ost os. o r . , w ffj jﬁ HT (p p ) Wi fe wom n j

f . a a . a . 3 ? , lt r w ne r by

- - i n la w . f . m W , other 0 \

Exercise V XI .

a fi m m u fi a ai m w l fi fi m m fi é fi m m u a n W W W fl W W H I W W ? a a a fi fm m u a l fi a fl gen o fi fi fi qfi fi ls l g a m m aj yfi fw m s lqmfi r fl a w m m " ' m a ria lu é affi rm : g a rfi a wfif ga a mmw rfigfi ’ wfi rfii m m i afi m t fi lm a m fa m rfi rfir W a r I so u am ?an m fi I Q Q I % W W T W I Q Q I § § i Q fi fiW fi I Q Q I

- g en( a m ﬁ f oru m s "

the a si n u la r o f I a i a ss. 15 . The women sing p r ises ( g ) ndr n (p

“ k c ou si n . 16. u a n d a ) St dy ye holy writ the sciences , sp e the X V V I X . Lesson . 65

” 1 3 u u a : u i s o f the tr th , honor yo r te chers th s the p rescrip tion the 2 4 - o r a en 17 . k thei r u text books f schol rs (g ) . Let ings p rotect s b j e c ts a n d p u nish the wick ed : thu s is the la w not offen ded

o r -i n - v u la w . 19. 18 . 0 women , re erence y mothers Let not the

“ a a k o r th e . 2 co chm n stri e torment horses 0 . Bring the jewels

u m a - va a d b u th s the two id ser nts were comm nde y the q een . Let

“ u r o a o n 22 u a s with two spoons d p w ter the a lt a r . . Let s pl y with

” dice for money th u s sp o k e the tw o w a rriors ( p a ss)

“ - ” 23 . da i a i m m : u a To y let me init te ( u . ) y two sons th s s ys the

B a 2 m e a a 4. n . r hm n . Let the dig cistern

L e sso n XV .

a i i ddl . 9 . e o v M I9 V rbs, c nj u g a ti on . Pr esen t I mp er a t e e The present im p era tiv e mi ddle is inﬂected th u s :

i u a u a S ng D l . Pl r l

’ ’ 1 a i r la bhd i m ay?la bbd c a hd i W ?la bhd m a ha i

’ 2 m la bba sc a 6 53m la bhethd m W la bha dkva m

200 r e a u b u v . i n . The ﬁrst p ersons a re lly s j ncti e forms The

fle c ti o n o f a v i m v. m a : u the p ssi e is p recisely si il r th s fi fi , m , a m , etc .

h . 20I. N oun i n . k m a to t e s Q r These stems , li e ny belonging

a - d a d f o f conson nt eclension , exhibit in their inﬂection i ference

- a d : a n d a k . F o r a stem form strong, middle , we ( the c ses c lle strong,

. se e I I n a a . . etc , ntrod . , the we k c ses (excep t loc sing ) the

- ﬁ n a li s a k a a d a u a stem a r , which in the we est c ses is ch nge n t r lly

r . B u t a s a d a m o f to ( reg r s the strong c ses , the ste s this declension

a a : m u a f ll into two cl sses in the o n e which is ch the l rger ,

a ll n omi n a a ou ti s a n d a fe w com p rising the g , others the a is v r iddhie d d r a a , becoming m i ; while in the other cl ss , cont ining

Pe rr a n s r i P y , S k t r i m e r . 5 X Lesson V .

m u a u a m a r . ost no ns of rel tionship , the a is g n ted , beco ing a t

- I n a lo o . . h a s a r a s m ﬁ n a l. a bl both cl sses , the sing a t ste The

‘ u a a a n d r ge m . is of p ec li r form tion ; the ﬁn a l is drop ped - sing g

v u a in the nomin a ti e sing l r.

i m ‘ ’ 202. N om n a a ou ti i n as; k a ? . d g s r , li e t , oer

ka r tr d - t bh d m ka r tr bhi s I . ﬂ ai lin g r y

i ka r tr e ka r t bh a s D . n? W r y

‘ i - 4 61 1“ “Va-v al»: ka r tur a s Ab . aiij g (or ) R A a v lb - ka r tr os ka r t i dm G . “ fQ mim f z e ka r ta r i ka r t u L . aiﬁft mgs rs

“ ” 203 . T w o u o f a t a n d H m . no ns rel tionship , ﬁ s , sister , g , ‘ d ’ " l a bu t m a a ce . . gr n son , follow this declension ; G 3 kes the p

sva s - E EK r s .

204 . u o f a a r e m u a a The no ns gency someti es sed p rticip i lly,

o r w a d v v u - a ith jecti e a l e . The corresp onding feminine stem is m de

“ i a n d d k u ka r tr i in t , eclined li e a ﬁ ; th s , Gif f .

205 a m m a a . The gr ri ns p rescribe a comp lete neu ter declension

“ a a a a u a o r H lso for b ses in g, p recisely n logo s with th t of g ,

b ut u m r s ch for s a e ra re .

V r V ocabula y X .

‘ ' 1 - a r m ; i Fl te c ti o n a r u w a g R to , t ke ef ge with m p erfor , do . Lesson XV .

11 . . Su bst 3 n step

7 , il n “ m . a a n a a . . » i ” a “ U. W , te cher M ? m p en nce exp i tion l" . M } 9 d a k a u a s m su o r te r r e se r ve r lo r d Eli3}m . , ; H , ; , oer, m er thor i ” p p p 6

a d . d a k . u a m a . j , oing , m ing h sb nd ; ster

m . . m . . f a m , time ( ? , p rotector

3 A/ m c a m . - i J J a a , a u . m . a la w su t W W f . , 5 13 , M ( \§ VT gr cio sness , p ity “ , tri l

v a s a d . u . m . u v . V : m . ; j , , , , gi er genero s W p nisher go ernor 2

u m . a . m . a . H , , sc mp , rog e g cre tor

m a u V n . o ten a s . , , ( f am { g , seer, thor (of edic honor glory ll’ b a s a d . i n decl. w . o ooks) ; j , seeing , f y

m . a . m g , cre tor Adj

m . d a t . . . W , ecision ; cert in y {ft } , f p oor

3 m . a d . . 3 , le er a t , f best, most excellent ‘ ‘ i ll’ “ M m . a m a n u n d t . w. o “ﬁ g a , le rned p better ( f y

Exercise XV.

g fi ‘fl fi lfl m a ‘f fi fl g fiifl t l

’ ’i ufii qufa arrfi vt g siw na fi n s ll

'’ ’ w a rfa fi m w arrfi ri fl a m m % fi tfi m §i {fi m fi m fi ls la gfi a fi wm i a lfi r fi m Hfi gfi n m w fi ls lu fim m fl w afifi

’ ' W fi m z m l m a gwt a qfl i w fi fi wfi fl fi r mzn e n

W d a r e a v a n v a u v or s often repe ted , to gi e intensi e, distrib ti e , “ ” a a m a a ve . o or repetition l e ning . So here t e ry step The p

‘ ’ u o f i s v l sitio ﬂ ery u n u s u a l ; it wo u ld n a t u ra lly follow E ia .

“ ” L o c . a bso l. u s pp ly being . XV. X V 68 Lesson I .

h r a r w 0 . v e u a . 1 1 Let the wife lo e h sb nd 1 . Let the w r iors follo thei r n d r i ve r th e bo lea ders a ﬁght with the enemy 12 . At the y

w a s a b is to m eet his t wo sisters 13 . The world cre ted y

14 I n u u v a m v the crea tor . . the ho ses of p io s gi ers l s is gi en to

15 . a w a s u a d a u a scetics . King Bhoj (WG genero s tow r the thor

l c o f u . 16 . va a a u u ( o . ) the e logies Let ser nts lw ys be sef l to (ﬁx) ‘ 5 1 F o r area a k u v thei r m a sters 7 . p rotection ( ) bet e yo rsel es 3 2 l o f i o u s . 18 . v b to the gods , the p rotectors the p Men li e y the

a u a . 19 . O u o n e d gr cio sness of the cre tor genero s , the p oor ben be or e thee m a n a d a ss f ! 20 . The le s his sisters to the city (p .

L e sso n XVI .

- 206 . er b a n r n a i i e . V s, co j u g a ti on . P ese t Op t t ve Act v The p resen t op ta ti ve is form ed fro m the genera l p resent - stem by th e a d o f a d - a a r e u d da dition mo e sign , fter which se secon ry end

- i d . 3 r d l. a c t. a s lst . m id . a 3 r d l. m ings (in p 3 11: , in sing w , in p

“ “ - - i r a n . a n a m d a ll v i ( t ) After stem , this o e sign , in oices , is i ,

u a d d a a e a d o r n ccente , which blen s with the ﬁn l to 11 ( ccente

. ‘ a d a a : a n d a a i d not , ccor ing to the ccent of the ) the Q is m int ne u a d a v - b nch nge before owel ending (Q R, W , m , a ren a ) y

a o f n i n a v me ns a interp osed e uphonic Elly. The inﬂection the cti e voice is a s follows

u a . Sing . D u a l . Pl r l

1 a ?“ c a deya m Hawc a deva c a dem a 2 3 2R va des 3 27m; c a deta m 3 23 va deta

’ 3 W c a det va detam Haw c a deyus

" ’ a vi é a m G n a h e a m Simil rly , m p y , ram y y , W

’ cor a e a m . y y , etc

X V Lesson I .

Sn bst mea l a n d gifts to the Brah

' '

J m . f u f a . ﬁ , . , b ll, steer, cow ; . , m ns N

sp eech . Adj

- u d . m a n . o x a u . ﬁ a , n t re ; st pi ity m , f ore, gre ter,

m . f dd h a . a . EN G , o er, y gre test

- - 0 r o n i h l . a W I ? m . s a w . , 3 m ; T! , m f g nting wishes

a s f . 8 0 . a f . da u . , Q , u u W o n m g , ghter 3 the f b lo s

" de - r c o w . I n m u d b o . T . , , g S,

O h . a m . a e d u . a a d a l. ﬁ ra , f t r ; , p rents ; p M , f W , b dly rr nge

o r u sed .

0 i . 3 a a d u . Hgﬁ , f 11, rr nge , sed

m i . . “ . m a n a . 319 , i n , 3 , W se , s ge f best

a re m . . ! , brother Pr o m :

f . sh e . F T , , it

m m . Adv. a n d n , month Co j . : i t“ ! n p a i r

m n p rotection . if " .

n . a n la m a n es m g , ob tion to the ,

a c c o m pla n i e d by a sa criﬁcia l

Exercise XVI.

fi w fi fl gfi m fi m m fi la la w m w fi a nw fi fi fi fs fim ls lm m m u m a fi g n s l ’ ’ a i W fi rrfitfi r m a t?w rm I n fir. ni t m filt

a . a Predic te Pl y up on words thro ughou t th e verse . I . Lesson XVI . XVI 7 1

m i m a ﬁi a lem s fﬂ m : fngwtw a tgm fa m II ‘R II

- - 13 . B B sa bh a da tta so n i n la w o f N a h a an a a a a n d y , p , m ny c ttle

v a a n d u v a a 14. u ill ges m ch money were gi en to the Br hm ns . Tho

’ v m o t a n d . sh a lt gi e the other s jewels to the sisters ( p . 15 Let the co a chm a n bring (Err-g ) fodder for the horses ; let him not tor

’ 1 . ment the horses . 6 Of the fa ther s p rop erty a gre a ter p a rt is to

i m d “ d v e . o f . 17 C be gi en ( ) to the el est the brothers . hil ren , bring

” ’ wood a n d w a ter into the ho u se da ily ; thu s wa s the fa ther s com

a . . 9 v o n m nd 18 Let th e cows gra ze in the forest . 1 . Let both li e

m k i n str . o f a c o w . 20 a a the il ( ) the bl ck . The w gon is dr wn by

1 . v a i n str . o f two steers . 2 The seer rejoices o er the p ir ( ) white

R a 22 Ha n d a u a . . . a a a steers ri i m rry two sisters , the d ghters of m

L e n sso XVII . f 2I0 . e b a o a i o n r esen t O ta ti ve M i ddle . V r s , c n j u g t . P p The

a v dd a o f a - d a s i n o pt ti e mi le ( w e) stems , forme shown the

d a s : p rece ing lesson , is inflected follows

' ’ l bh ta l bh atam la bher a n 3 . 3 5 rd a e W m d ey ﬁ < ﬂ

’ y e 3 5 sa riz a cche a a c or a 1 . Simil rl y y . 3 16 1 g y , etc

‘ ‘ ’ D i f a len i on . . ec s The stem ﬁ , shi p , bo t , is entirely reg

u a a k u u m a d a v 90 . l r , t ing thro gho t the nor l en ings , s gi en in §

u : c ° “ e tc ° Th s m : W : W : et i Ta : M a 3 m 1 fi fi fl t 72 VI I Lesson X .

“ 2I2 . v a The stems ending in long owels (an , t , Hi ) f ll into

- a k a : r o o - t m b two well m r ed cl sses A . t s e s mostly monosyll a ic

a n d th i r c om o u o e p u n ds, with a com p a ra ti vely sm a ll n mber f others

k . d e i va ti ve f m i n i n e t m a n d inﬂected li e them ; B r e s e s in a n i ,

a f e w c d k a n d a m. with in inﬂe te li e m m . Hg} The stems

a a k n a l d u u a of cl ss A t e the orm en ings thro gho t , with op tion l ex

“ c e ti o n l- i s da t. a b . . a n d . . a n d d p in , gen , loc sing fem . , with t inserte f l. u before m o the gen . p The simp le words a r e a s no ns with

a d d a d v . a s v a a n few excep tions fem ; jecti es (r re) , in jecti e com

u d i n a n d . d o f d a . . p o n s , they coinci e m sc fem forms The eclension

“ d a n d h a s v l8 9 l97 the simp le wor s in E: 3 7 been gi en (in , ) ;

those in WT a r e ra re th a t it is n o t p ossible to m a k e u p a whole

a u a u se scheme of forms in ct l .

“ n o r u a s a 2l3 . W hen a y root in WTor i a is fo nd ﬁn l member

a u - ﬁ n a ls a r e a a s of comp o nd word , these root tre ted follows

1 R a v v - d . oots in an lose th t owel before owel en ings, excep t in

a a n d a c e . l. k a v . the strong c ses in the p , which is li e the nomin ti e

’ ‘ ° - - u t m . f . a ll Th s , f a g u , , p rotecting

D u a . u a . Sing. l Pl r l

vi va - d ‘ ' vi va - os I . fa w n c p fa a ﬁ a e p rm

“ " 2I4 2 . R i n a n d a t a v . oots i Bi ch nge heir ﬁn l owel , before

“ v - d i a n d b ut o n e a d a owel en ings , into t q, if conson nt p rece e the ﬁn l

t wo o a e d a vowel ; bu t if r more conson nts p rec e , the ch nge is into

‘ ’ - - - a n d u E m. f . u : . vo c . 21 3 3 Th s , ta a?! , , corn b ying nom a a { \ C ’ ‘ ‘ - a J m f . : n o m . . cc . a f “ , aﬁﬁ , q m ; i ” street sweep er sing

a c c . . w , Elm V I Lesson X I .

V Vocabulary X II.

’ r a m a te a u Ve r bs I n: ( ) m se oneself.

r a tik a te vi r dm a t ta; u rn (p s ) exp ect . fa ( i ) ce a se from

’ ‘ ‘ - - hi n a n da ti a b . a . W Q i Wﬁ I ( , p oet ce se

“ J ‘ ’ - te o T r a a n u tz ha ti o u t ) rejoice in , greet with j y Q ﬂ ( st ) follow ,

a ccom p lish .

43 h “ m . : d . Su bst . ﬁ ra n frien (

d r n n a a m . a W . , g r en a , b ttle . t ; m ) g ‘ ‘ f . a u u n . d ﬁf . a rf a z a . i q , gric lt re m , tr e

' ‘ ‘ '

n . m . u Safa d . f qﬁ : fa te . , life , r le ; ( W

1 - - m . a d m . i . a n la w . ﬂ ea , comm n 3 “ , f ther

- n . a a . W TQ , c ttle r ising Adj

0 3 ) d a . 3 a a a W 3 3 " omestic priest, ch p Hg , f 11 , good , p le s nt, de r ;

a . a s n su bst u l in . . , fort ne .

V n . a . . d u u n u Ha m , e ting f i n , o btf l ;

m . d va . a . , ser nt ste y

1 n . d a 1W , e th .

E ercise VII x X .

" m a fi a w as fa i n gm ?m u u e} u ’ w a ft film : um ga n la na t?a t : 313 23 3 13 fa sfi wzrfa s ’ ’ W W : 1 16m m? 32 11 : 3mm m fmsfin nmmé m a t ' fi fi ls léfi wi mé nrfi sm s lwfz n swm mfi fis fi a

‘ i n ai rm sfii a m I u I s um a c W 3 ‘g’fi fsfl t ‘s ' ‘ ” ‘ a t fi i ci i a e i y w fi mfi ifi t n . I a m n fi is i i n i im m mm gufi i m a qfi m t l j wfi wfi fi téfi m m i e nfi g m nqo nw fi “Gi m m e "

Ru a n a u t a d a ll a le for scetic, who is to p si e e rthly desires a n d a p ssions . V I . I 74 Lesson X I XV I I .

- 12 . dd u o t. i mu . Let fo er be bro ght (WTE) ( p , ) by the brother

l- l 13 . M a se e for the horses o f the a p rotecting king . y ye good

m a u 14. fortu ne a y ye cq ire (Elli ) glory . The king with d W a se a a 15 . o t. i m u . his rriors crosse the in ship . Tell ( p , ) where

o ur d m a h 6 . Y o u m a a u frien s y meet with their brot ers . 1 y m se

u v a d b u t a a a l u b . o yo rsel es in the g r en , ce se e ting ( f m ) the fr its

- en . 1 a u a v t m th (g ) 7. M yest tho be s ed by the a llprotec or fro y

’ - u 1 . da k a d misfort ne . 8 To y let the ing s two sons b e consecr te

i - o t . m u . b u . 19. a l o t ( p , ) y the ho se p riest { Ye both sh l greet ( p

r i m u . u a . 20 I t u d a u u ) yo r p ents . we two sho l sp e k ntr th , then we

u u d k . 2 M a I u sho ld be p nishe by the ing 1. y conq er the enemies

’ with m y bra v e w a rri ors : th u s is the king s wish (u se { EL

22. M a d o u y we recei ve the rewa r f virt e .

L e sso n XVIII .

2 l5 a u a ti ve . d . C s The chief p oints to be notice in the form

o - VI I a tion f ca u s a ti ve stems h a ve been gi ven a lrea dy (in Less . ) ; some a ddition a l ones follow . 4 n d u 2 IS . Most roots in WI a a a dd q before the conj ga tion

u 1 m sign ; th s , stun ts from 3 1 ; W e ; nma ﬁ t ; m in ts fro

“ ‘

k 1 a n d m . . a 31 3 “m es 8 1 11 1151 ; W 13 1 , so etimes fi mfl fi l, etc , some

- ‘ ’ . 11 d a k a s u times ﬁ W fil, etc 11 , rink , m es W ( tho gh from

t . a n d a k a h va u il) A few roots in i t e the s me 1 , wit rio s

u a : u ﬁ - irreg l rities th s , m m from a f xK . q 2 I7 d a lo . Me i r initi a l 3 ?in a light syll a ble is commonly length

- b u t a u a d . u t ened , sometimes rem ins nch nge Th s , itt, W ;

“ a 3 i B u t a n d m . 51m m; nt . W u. most roots in w t . a n ,

I ‘l E ‘E a a i t F ri , t l, H L, with other r rer ones , gener lly keep the short

u th s , mt , W ra V Lesson X I I I . 75

“ F v a u ddhi u 3 2 I8 . a in l owels t ke r before th s , 5, mm ;

“ 3 , m i s ﬁ t.

2l v o f a u a v a a r e b a 9 . Some erbs c s ti e me ning y form tion de

‘ ’ a v u 1: a d a u a v 2 nomin ti es th s 11m , p rotect , c lle c s ti e to m ; fﬁ

w t o 7 . u n ﬁt . to I ii ; W e , to it ; m a n ta . 3 1

F o r a v o f a u a v se e . . 220 . the p ssi e c s ti es, Less X

22I a u a v o f a v v a r e a v . . The c s ti es intr nsiti e erbs tr nsiti e The c a u sa ti ves o f tra nsiti ve verbs a r e constru ed sometimes (a ) with two

a u a v m 6 a n a c e . o f a n d a n i n cc s ti es , so etimes ( ) with the object

“ r u m n t l f u a u d e a t st e a o the a gent . Th s , he c ses the bir s to the

” a k m a a : I H n c es y be rendered either ( ) W R fi g m g m , o r (b) fa sfi : fuo a m i 222 r i i l a a a d r . Pa t c p es . The gener l p rticipi l en ings a e fl fi \

a k e a v a n d dd . B u t (we form m t) for the cti e , WT? for the mi le a a - i a v u i s v u a 1« o n e fter tense stem in t, the cti e s fﬁx irt lly 1 ,

“ ’ o f th e two i t s being lost ; a n d the middle s u fﬁx is FIT-1 (ex

’ a u a v m . u bha ua n t cep t W sometimes in c s ti e for s) Th s , m ,

— ’ ta dan t i div a n t t cl c o r a a n t bhava gm , ﬂ a r y , ﬁ a ; y ; Ha m

m an a . F o r d o f a se e , etc the eclension the p rticip les in W below , .

Less . XXI I I .

1 223 . r on o u n o f F r on P th e i r st Pe s . The p ronomin a l declension

m u a a r e n o t a a d exhibits so e striking p ec li rities which e sily ex pl ine .

The p rono u n of the ﬁrst p erso n i s declined th u s

. u u a . Sing D a l . Pl r l m m

w a n t . i t sum

. m a m : a mm , W VI I I Lesson X .

t w, 0 ltti a n d a r e v 224 . t a r e e n c c The forms n , 3 , m , ne er

“ o f a u sed a t the beginning a sentence , or before the p rticles a ,

t 225 I n u a n d u a . p rono ns of the ﬁrst second p ersons the p l r l is

u a n d d a s o ften u sed f o r the sing u l a r . Prono ns ( other wor s well) show in S a nskrit a c u rio u s ten dency to a gree in form with the p redica te ra ther th a n with the s u bject to which they refer .

V Vocabulary X III.

b wi th a u a ti ve di e ; a u m ar d a ti k Ve r s, c s s : ﬂ c s ( y ) ill

' “ ’ ‘ ‘ a a a li k a a ﬁ a u . a i Q i e a t ; ca u s . ( c y ) m a e ﬂ t s cri ce ; c s (y j a ya t )

to t a k a off e a t ; gi ve e a . m e to s criﬁce ; er s a criﬁce

u d a a u . a W st y, re d ; c s ( for

a ti a . a u a bhi vada a ti dhyap a y ) te ch a § + wﬁ i in c s . ( y )

- k l . i “ a u . a d a ti te m a 333 c s ( p y , ) ke ; greet k da a . f w a u . vedd a ti i h or in , p p oint a g no ; c s ( y )

a n a n a a ti . in c s . (j y ) beget form

‘ i “ d a i c a a fia t n s. fi t 511 in ca u s . ( j p y ) + fi l in inform

' - a d . u a r dha te w a u . va r comm n ( ) gro ; c s ( (ﬂ yo m

' dha dti - t w 1 v a u . da a a ti a k e a k r o b r i n u 31 gi e ; c s ( p y ) m e y , ) m e g ; g p .

v o r a GI c a u s . c a thd a ti . gi e p y . RLin ( y y ) torment

da r d a ti . a c a n s. r a c a a ti k gﬂ se e ; i n c a n s . ( p y ) show g he r ; in (c y ) m a e

' - 13 t a u dha d a ti a . . a a c c . .I T lﬁ , in c s . p y ) he r, i e recite, p rocl im (

a k u t two m e p on , clothe in (

‘ ' v c a n d a ti a a a d s. stha ﬂ + ﬂ q lea d a w a y (ca u s . p E rr st n ; in ( p y )

n a a a ti . u t a a ste . y y ) p , p l ce ; pp oint ; p

i h te a u . r a thd a ti a r a t a a o ff I N T in c s (p y ) sp re d , I t (p st ) st rt ; in

a u . r a stha a a ti d a . p rocl im c s (p p y ) sen .

a a The p riest , who p erforms s criﬁce for the beneﬁt of nother

“ ” on a d a k a a a s u p ers is s i to m e th t p erson s criﬁce , tho gh the l a tter (who is ca lled W ) were celebra ting the s a criﬁce fo r himself.

XI X . 78 Lesson XVI I I .

u u . W e o u r p oet recite ( se W ) a eu logy of Visn . 24 torment

2 . a a . hea rts with wishes . 5 Both schol rs greet the te cher l L e s n so XIX .

2 on o un of th e on d r o n . u 2 6 . Pr e S c Pe s This p rono n (for which the n a ti ves a ss u me ﬁ g a n d agi n g a s b a ses) is declined th u s

l. u u D ua a . Sing l a r . Pl r l

N . a n em a“

A ' 1 1 , W , m 3W , 3 K w W L W {ra m-rm D 3 E W W , UR W R, W

Ab . W T .

n . a n , s a G a “ , W g w . W

L . a ﬁ x w i g

227 . a r e u The forms 3 , W , W enclitics , s bject to the

”

a m u a s . s e r les RT, ﬂ , etc

h n 228 . T e Pr o oun o f th e Th i r d Pe r son (for which the n a ti ves a ssu m e Hg a s b a se the b a se is rea lly a ) is declined a s follows

n o m . . a n d (note sing , m

M a sc uli n e

. u a u a . Sing D l . Pl r l

“ N . a s vii

A . HR ” 1 cm W ﬂu D Ha su re a t?!

Ah ' m 77 i)

L . m ﬁ g mg

a d a t v a b a va v is m e lmos entirely by the geniti e c se , not y deri ti e

v a d p ossessi e jecti ve . Bu t often the u nemph a tic p ossessi ve p rono u n f o the E nglish is o m itted in S a nskrit . X I Lesson X .

N euter

a D ua l . Pl u r l . 3

n 37

t . i n th m a culi n e . m ﬁg: e c , a s e s

229 . n o m . . a . a n d u The sing m sc m , its comp o nd m , lose

a a n a v w a n d a t e n d their ﬁn l a before y conson nt ; before o els , the

o f a u u a u u . u 1 sentence , they follow the s l e p honic r les Th s , G 1

fi fa , 11 fi rs fa ; n ( W ; tit m fa ; fi re e :.

23 0 a u u a s a a . The third p erson l p rono n is sed oftenest we k

m a v a a s a a a v or indeﬁnite de onstr ti e , esp eci lly ntecedent to rel ti e ;

“ ” a n d often lik e the E nglish deﬁnite a rticle .

‘ ’ 23l. k a r e : a r e ﬁ xi n Li e a declined ( ) Q R, this , formed by p g

‘ o f u u t u . . m . . qto the forms 3 , thro gho ; th s , nom sing “ a , f m ,

‘ ’ ‘ ’ 11 . 6 r a v u a n d a d . m g ; ( ) the el ti e p rono n ( j ) ﬂ , which who ;

0 m a a v a n d u a v r a u ( ) co p r ti es s p erl ti es from p onomin l roots , s ch

‘ a s o f a n d w ﬂ at , which ( the m hich (of the

’ “ ‘ ’ a n d ‘ o f m a i ts So W W ; m a n one ny ; a w other , with

‘ ’ m a a n d d ff Y e t a r e co p r ti ve W 5 a W i erent . other words

- - so b ut a o f n o m . a cc . vo c . . inﬂected , with m inste d mg in sing

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ° u . : a s a ll a o u e l. 3 2 . 1 ne t , Ha, ﬁ g , ; c n , in p some ; 3 1 1, f ﬁ

‘ ’ n (only sing . a d both .

“ 2 2 u E u 3 . The interroga ti ve p rono n li (for which the H ind s gi ve

a a s o f the b se W ) follows p recisely the declension 3 , excep t

- n o m . a c c . n u n o m . . m . sing . e t . fi g ; sing m , f. an .

2 u 33 . A n m ber of words follow the p ronomin a l declension in

m o f si n iﬁ c a ti o n s o r a bu t o r so e their g , op tion lly ; in other senses ,

u d v a r e u a a . u witho t known r le , l p se into the jecti e inﬂection S ch .0

m a a v a n d u a v a m a s co p r ti es s p erl ti es from p reposition l ste s , W

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ e 1 I o west t a u e low r , “ 1 ; it chief , e rlier , W pp r , 8 0 Lesson XI X .

’ ‘ ’ ‘ u O a a o f r o northern , {f a n so thern , etc . cc sion l forms the p

a r e. u a a d v a n d nomin a l declension met with from n mer l jecti es , from

a v a o f a u a a a a s other words h ing somewh t n mer l ch r cter , W

‘ ’ ‘ ’ fe w h a lf . , m i , etc

2 i a i ti h of l 34. ul e i n t u s r e a ti o n o un Pec r s e e ve p r s, etc . The

a k u a v a u t h e a d a u S ns rit often p ts the rel ti e cl se before ntece ent cl se ,

“ a n d inserts the s u bsta nti v e to which the rel a ti ve refers into the

a a u h a v a d o f a v a s me cl se wit the rel ti e , inste le ing it in the ntecedent

a u . I n a n a a a a v a u be cl se tr sl ting into S nskrit , rel ti e cl se is to p l a ced either before o r a fter the whole a ntecedent cl a u se ; bu t a a u a s d i n not inserted into the ntecedent cl se , is one

“ E n li sh . u m u a sa w a v g Th s, the o nt in which we yesterd y is ery

” high wo u ld b e in S a nskrit either : at qéei a zj a} m ( a

“ vita as o r : a with sui t: “a n 61 m m ; bu t me t a

I z . a E n li sh d . ﬁ i ﬁ f a i a?m , etc , ccording to the g i iom

2 a v w m a a a a u 35 . The rel ti e ord y st nd nywhere in its cl se ;

“ ” u d a . th s , ﬁll? m 3 the go s whose chief is i

Sometimes rel a ti ve o r demonstra ti ve a dverbs a r e u sed a s equ i va lents

o a - a v o r a v u u f cert in ca se forms of rel ti e demonstr ti e prono ns ; th s ,

“ e a s a ? w re .

o f v n a 23 6 . The rep etition the rela ti e gi ves a indeﬁnite me ning

‘ ’ v a v a u m u m whosoe er , wh te er . The s me res lt is ch ore commonly

a a d b a dd a v a v u w tt ine y ing to the rel ti e the interrog ti e p rono n , ith

' u u a u o n e o f a a fl , a ffix (or , less s lly , witho t) the p rticles , fl , fi g , Sometimes the interroga ti ve a lone is u sed w ith these p a rticles

“ a a u a v a in simil r sense . Th s ; m m ufa wh te er this wom n

” “ “ ’ rel a tes ; eh I re: 311m m wh a te ver a n y one s disp osition m a y

“ ” ﬂ 3 7a fem he gi ves to some o n e o r other ; m

“ ” a k m n o v W 3 ? a n d he t es fro one wh a te er . XI X Lesson .

Voca la r IX bu y X .

E sa a a a u Ve r bs li y, sp e k ; n me ; in c s .

a . vd ca a ti a a m sit ; in ca u s . p l ce ( y ) m ke ( written le a f)

I ! k a u . d a a ti a k . . a . “ drin ; in c s (p y y ) sp e , i e re d

v a . sa lza te du . gi e to drink , w ter 8 3 ( ) en re

’

a u . d ld a tz u i n a p rotect ; in c s ( p y ) m s cceed ; c u s .

’ sd dbd a tz a u p rotect . ( y ) p erform , cq ire .

’ ’ ” k u r i d a tz a u . hd td a tz a v ﬂ rejoice ; in ca s . (p n y ) a ill ; c s (g y ) h e

m a k a . k d . e rejoice, p le se ille

fe a r a u . bki d a te bbd d a i n c a n s. a v ﬁ ; in c s ( s y , y 5 1 c ll ; h e

a te . a . g ) terrify , frighten c lled

m . a . Sub st , comp nion , help er

n . u n . W , b siness , co cern

n r a f m . . . . i “ , p , god

f . n r . Haw , . p

- f . a u . Wﬁ I , g it ; ref ge

m . n . . m , , foot , leg

n u a . 5 ? . , mbrell

n . m . gm , ilk

‘ ‘ ’ é f . n . r . K s a s m Q a ﬂ , p , r n other

‘ ‘ é f ? u w. i nstr r a Z . a . fa ” . o m E ﬁ , e rth witho t ( ;

‘ a s a m o ten Eﬁ , p reﬁx to p rop er n es, f

‘ ’ ‘ h a s m a a u h o the e ning f mo s ,

n o r a ble

Exercise XIX.

‘ W m t i a m fi fe fl fiz fi wfi nfi u fi t filfl fi lufi z m m fi u e n

‘ u fa a f a a f crafi f e a fl t n fwfl um a fi e m fi a w fi m a fi i fi m r fi m e lm wu e rr a n skr i t ri er P y , S P m . XIX . 8 2 Lesson XX .

m u m W a m fi n fii éfi awm u lgw g ze vr fl a let gfi t w a fi w fi a fa fi a m n m i nfi n i ’ " W fi m m é mé fi rzta m t 'c lm w an na ‘ m z ufl fi le lm i a fi a fi a a W HW W W wa lqo u Re fu si n g W T WW F I Q Q I n e w W fi a fim qa lfi fi m t m fi mgm wfi m

6 i’ 2 1 u a d o f a en K a u sa l a loc m 15 . The h sb n th t (g ) y ( ) , of who 3 “ 8 7 " D a a r a th lo em Ra a w a s a d a . 16. a o. ( f ) m born , is c lle c The te cher 3 1 2 a bl . 1 W h rejoices a t thy diligence ( ) 7 . y (aim ) sp e a kest th o u

w e u du . a u ff . so ? 18 Others th n co ld not en re this s ering 19 . The

” 8 - - a u s a n d la w b k . 20 M a a l tea cher te ches holy writ the oo s . y l 7 2 1 6 4 k t thei r u a 3 ost those ings who p rotec s bjects ccording to ( 13 , p 3 g la a cc . be vi c to r i o u s . 21 . u ll p os. ) the w ( ) The fr its of a these

a r e . 22 . M a a ll t trees sweet y the glory of women , who honor heir

’ u a d a 23 . I n t m u h sb n s , incre se his kingdo the king s p nishment

k 24. W u r iﬁ e w . do e te r s the ic ed hich of the two fr its y wish ? 25 . My

a h a d v m e th e f ther gold gi en to , cows to thee , to other brother

nothing .

L e sso n XX .

- 2 l n i on of t m i n Con on a n ts. u m 37 . D e c e s S e s s All no n ste s in

a m a be a u a conson nts y well cl ssed together , since the p ec li rities

b v a n d shown y some concern only the stems themsel es, not the

d a n o f a a a r e en ings . M scu lines a d fem inines the s me ﬁn l inﬂected p recisely a li ke ; a n d ne u ters a r e p ecu lia r (a s u s ua lly in the other

” a u W a s m a a v Other th n tho . ith W , with co p r ti es , the

a v u a bl ti e is sed .

“ ‘ M a kes u s rea d (wﬁq-g ca us Lesson XX . 8 3

- - n o m . a c . v o . o l n Bu t declensions) only in the c c f a l u mbers . the m ajority o f conson a nta l stem s form a Sp eci a l feminine stem by

a a u a dding i (ne v er WT) to the we k form of the m sc line .

Va a a s a n d a a r 23 8 . e ri tions , between stronger we ker forms , v a a a : a n d a ery gener l in conson nt l stems either of strong we k stems ,

o r o f dd a n d a k . a r e u u strong, mi le , we est The endings thro gho t the d n m a I . or l ones ( ntro ,

239 a la w a a s . The gener l concerning ﬁn l conson a nts is follows

“ “ 1 . m u u a a l a a r e The ore s l etymologic ﬁn ls q , g, q , T , a ,

H r , a d a e E “ a s a . E, R z; sp or ic q, L, L ﬁn ls

2 . I n a a o f a v a w gener l , only one conson nt, wh te er kind , is llo ed to sta n d a t the end of a word ; i f two or more w o u l d e tym o

a u a i s a n d a a a logic lly occ r there , the l st dropp ed , g in the l st, u u ntil b t one rem a ins .

- 3 . a a m u l a Of the non n s l tes , on y the ﬁrst in e ch series , the

- a a u a a a u a s . a n d non sp ir te s rd, is llowed s ﬁn l ; the others s rd p ,

a a r e u a v v both son nts reg l rly con erted into this , where er they

u a u wo ld etymologic lly occ r .

° 4. A a a a a o r m a o r le ss ; ﬁn l p l t l , g , beco es either b ( often ) g b ut g in a very few ca ses (where it rep resents origin a l $1) b e co m es FL

240 . . a n d 239 2 mo m . m . According to . , the q of the sing ,

- f . a a a n d i u a o f a o f m ﬁ n a l , is lw ys lost ; rreg l rities tre tment the ste ,

a a r e n o t u . i n this c se , infreq ent

- 24I. a da a n d ( a Before the p endings , m , m , m j , stem

a a a s a b a ﬁn l is tre ted in extern l com in tion . 242 . An a spira te m u te is ch a nged to its corresp onding non a sp ira te before a nother non - n a s a l m u te o r a sibil a nt ; it sta nds u a H e u n ltered only before a vowel or semi vowel o r n a s a l . enc s ch a m u u - a a te is do bled by p r e ﬁ x i n g its own corresp onding non spir te .

- 243 . Con son an t tem s of on e fo r m i n 2 a n d " Be s a , g , 1 6 * 6 84: Lesson XX . fore su fﬁ x a llil both a n d ‘a a s stem - ﬁ n a ls become ; I a s o a \ g i

‘ ’ - f . ﬁ n a l m . E a : m . d 3 I stem beco es 1 x mp les m , win ; R ,

‘ ’ ‘ ’ u E n . d . misfort ne ; 1W , the worl

u a . Sing . Pl r l

m | m m | m ﬁ a u

A . a a m lm nm u

I . m | m la m n

D .

A b . 3 11 m lm u 1) A ' - G o Elm H a, n W lm m R u

- L . W i smm " m um mnm n

‘ ’ - F o r . a c c . l. u . ha lam ma the 1 inserted in nom p ne ter, cf p ,

dham . , etc

“ 244 . I n a fe w a a a a a “ a roots , when ﬁn l son nt sp ir te (H , \ a t

a a a a a d 23 9 . 3 lso g, rep resenting ) loses its sp ir tion ccor ing to ,

“ 242 a a a 1 o r a a , the initi l son nt conson nt ( L, g, 3 ) becomes sp ir te ;

- - u . vo c . . i i . th s , H , nom sing i ; , 2 § \ i t W E lg

245 . d Ag r e em en t o f a jecti ve s . I f the s a me a djecti ve qu a lify

m u a v u d d u two or ore s bst nti es , it will be se in their combine n mber ;

u a v a r e m a u a n d a d . l if the s bst nti es sc line feminine , the j wil be

a . bu t i n a a a fem . u u m sc ; combin tion of m sc . or s bjects with ne ter,

a v u the djecti e will be ne ter .

XXI 8 6 Lesson XX . .

W W | 8 I W ﬂ § H I H I H€ﬁ 3 mm

‘ 3 i e n 13 I fi l d fi fl m o W i e t w a z (g ) fa m a a i n fi rm? W ‘EH I C I m fi srs ft a : s la m m e m fi i z s fi 'fis : awfi lc lv fi a fs ew t qm w - W ea vers m fa t qa lw fi fimfi a rm a i r( m W a lqa lm w m m fi zwfi m s l

14. I r a a u a s hi s a d V tr a . nd , with the M r ts comp nions , kille r W 1 u a n o o n e a n u u . 5 . itho t a comp nion c p erform a difﬁc lt b siness

16 . ex r ess in l. u a o n a ll a d One ( p p ) sho ld pl nt trees the ro s , for the

o d 17 . d u s ak e f the sh a e . Those frien s who a r e tru e in m isfort ne

a r e a d thr ee d . 8 d a n d a d h r to ﬁnd in the worl s 1 . The gir le the s cre

f r e a d l . u o a a d n ea t d u a . 19 P t cord Ary ns to be m e threefol ( . )

“ d a u s . 20 . a n a ( Q T c . ) this stone behind the ﬁre The oce is c lle by

u o f v 1 u b d the p oets the h sb a nd ri ers . 2 . All s jects m u st be protecte

i m v. thei r 22 . o f a r e a d i n ( ) by kings . Some these Br hm a ns a le rne

l - U a a d a w . the p nis s , others in the books

L e sso n XXI .

’ 2 - o n t d . Stem i n ala 46 . De clen si on of Con so n a n t ste m s , c s p

ta l e tc . 1 . F a E o f v a u u a s, in l l; a stem re erts to the origin l g tt r l

a d a s - ﬁ n a l a n d the a da - d when it comes to st n word , before p en ings ,

a a n d f a n d i . 2 . F a becoming Q when ﬁn l , before i , before i in l SL is oftenest tre a ted exa ctly like i for ca ses of other tre a t * n d se e . 3 . I n a T ment, below the roots fm , w w , the L is

d “ E a a a e w a 4 . tre te in the s m y . The Q of g becomes L fter Hi

I n cl a ssica l S a nskri t not m a ny root- stems a r e u sed a s inde

n d ub a v bu t a r e u p e ent s st nti es ; they freq ently employed , with a d v va u a s a m o f a c o m jecti e or (present) p a rticip i a l l e, ﬁn l ele ent

u p o nd word . ' XX Lesson I . 8 7

‘ ’ ‘ f . u E . . 1 f . f . th s , g 3 ? , sp eech , word ; q , illness ,

’ ‘ m a direction , p oint of the co p ss

u a Sing . Pl r l .

ma m m a g urm u W i m lm n

A . n 1 . a m lw r lfi m u a rfi ua lt fi u m fm

' L . fi a lfi a lfzfi r u W lfi iillfi fl ll

I ) ua L

fi lfi fi lfzfl u m lm lm a u W i m lm u

247 1 . F a o f a u a m u . in l TL stem reg l rly beco es the ling a l m u te

“ - o r 2 a a n d , a n d ﬁ n a l. F o r (g ) before t g when word excep tions ,

“ “ ‘ ’ - 246 . a o f se e 3 . 2 0 Ta u , The ﬁn l 1 the root stems ( b r le , Hi ,

‘ ’ a a n d W a n d 3 . a a u m s criﬁce , , with others ; the ﬁn l g of n ber

‘ ‘ ’ f a r e a a v . u i o m . m roots , tre ted like lT bo e Th s , fa r ene y ;

‘ ’ ‘ ’ m . l. th e Vai a a m f a d . f “ p , p eople , cy c ste , fa g . , . , ( j )

‘ ’ licking .

u a Sing . Pl r l .

m um " fm ufw a n fa m u

I .

L fif fin fi ifs n W i m g lm u

D u a l .

fi f t lfarf t " fm lfs m u

2 ‘ ’ 48 . Bu t m . t u a 11 . w , p riest , ho gh cont ining the root 1 XX 8 8 Lesson I .

“ ‘ ’ m a 6 . a n d E f . a a u a kes “ 5 etc ; G L , g rl nd , tho gh cont ining

a . a ’ m kes W etc Vﬂ x ‘ ‘ ’ d ‘ k ’ 249 . 1 . u a v u a n No ns h ing the roots gg , b rn , 3 g, mil ,

‘ ’ a s a a n d a E ﬁ . a be hostile , with others , ﬁn l element, lso mg f

a a a a a a n d i . (n me of cert in metre) , ch nge the ﬁn l 3 into Hi t

‘ ‘ ’ d - u - u ai m a k . vo c . si n Th s , wgg , woo b rning , es nom

’ ‘ ’ - 0 f a n o m . 3 a nq . , vo c . . 3 5111 a cc . , gg gr nting wishes , sing 3 5 , m

‘ ’ l O - a - - . . . vo c . s . ri loc p gg ; W 3 friend betr ying, nom ing ﬁ 7 ‘ ’ a e tc . 2. I n w d 1 a s a g i or s with g, bind , ﬁn l element , where g

a i l a n d P u f . rep resents origin l l, the 3 becomes 3 t ; th s , “ Ta g ,

‘ ’ - 0 o . du a da . v c . a c c . . . shoe , s n l , nom sing m , m , instr

0 “ lo o . l. I . 3 3 m , p Q

Vocabulary XXI.

' t a ti Ver bs 3 g (u srj ) let loose o r

a u da m a a ti a o u t a v . ( a: in c s . ( y ) t me ; ; r ise (the oice) * I a r t vd a te a comp el . ﬁ g + TF( (p s j ) embr ce .

d ‘ ‘ g g (dr zihya ti) be hostile ; offen . g n strike o u t ;

a u a . . 3 in c s . be r smite

- 3 bhdr a ti te a u li t. 1 ( , ) be r , s p p ort

f . a Su bst m , look , gl nce ; eye .

. l. 92 r . a m . W m p , . p , p eop le in m , enemy .

I d a . m . a . n i m m , te rs

f v o f v . . R a i n m . 3 31 , erse the ig ed ; W , bee

R v d l. a . n . . p , the ig e m , sweetness

‘

n . d . k d f. a . zﬁ qq , me icine , sic ness , ise se

‘

m . 72 . a ﬁ 0 m . r m . a k . ﬁ q , p m , gre t ing, emp eror

as a n d a fe w o asa a 3 3 ther roots , whose n l is not const nt u u - thro gho t their inﬂection , lose it in the p resent system .

I I . 90 Lesson XXI . XX

a o t. or i mv hi s v . 15 . a o n e a r ise ( p . ) oice Th t mong the p riests is

n k a d hot R v a . 16 A s ata a m u a c lle r , who recites the ig ed . st we r

“ a n d a a a a n d c a r r a n u a . 17 . m shoes g rl nd , y mbrell Among y

” va a . a n friends Ram a is the strongest : th u s Spoke Ra n 18 . Let emp eror k eep his va ss a ls in check (an a n d p rotect (tn

l a . 1 . I n R v a u c a u s . ) the p eople in a lthe e rth 9 the ig ed occ rs (w

’ ih a e s . 20 a u m p a s ) the U sn . . The f ther s gl nce fell p on

- - A a o f d a a ss. 21 . mong the betr yers frien s is n med (m a p )

Vi h a a 22. a I a i v o the B i b i s n . The seer p r ises ndr n with erses f g

lo c veda 23 . m hi s a cc . da t. o r . . The emp eror s ote enemies ( , , )

d 24. I n a a w a s k d b e n with the swor . the b ttle Krsn ille y his

“ 2 . M a o u r m a u e m ies . 5 y enemies be tor ented by dise ses th s sp oke the Brahm a n i n a nger

L e sso n XXII .

' 25 0 . a n D e clen si o n of Stem s i n I ’ The stems in {I d 3 s

- - v a d a n d n o m . lengthen the owel before conson nt en ings , in sing . ,

“ d - a n o . I n rm . a the a f the nom . is lost the no sing the ﬁn l S then becomes a (o r visa r ga ) u n der conditions requ iring a s urd

‘ ’ ' ‘ ’ a s a se e 95 MG . u f . v ; f . , . ﬁn l ( , ) Th s , ﬁ rs , oice 3s city

u a u a u a Sing l r . D l . Pl r l .

V ‘ N . . h i s I 35 u ﬁ rfi gfi II

A . ﬁ rm W n a a 77

’

Stem i n a n d a n d a . e s H [ in ﬁ ﬁ t f wu These a r m a sc . d a n d ne u t . only ; the corresp onding feminine is m a e by a dding t ;

' u f a a - d th s , Hfi fi fi They lose their fin l a before conson nt en ings ;

0 Q Q Q 0 Alm ost a n y no u n i n 3 ! m a y form a p o ssesrve deri va ti ve wi th I I L esson XX .

n o m a . a n d a lso i n the . sing , where the m sc lengthens the

‘ ’ u m . n . . co m p ens a tion . Th s , fl fi rfl , , rich

N eute r . M a scu lin e .

ua l u a . u a . u a . u a . Sing u l a r . D . Pl r l Sing l r D l Pl r l

- A . Elf W K

' ‘ ‘ - n I . a fi fi n m m Q fi fi IQ as i n th e m a sculi e

V . m

25 2 . D er i va ti ve st em s i n o f W 2 ( a , W . The stems this di vision a r e mostly neu ter ; b u t there a r e a few m a sc u lines a n d

n T ” . i s a u a fo r a ET b e femi ines heir inﬂection ne rly reg l r ( h , K , 24 I se e l 10 0 . l. . 27 a . a . fore t § ; for the p , p , bottom of p ge) M sc

a n d fe m . m i . a n d [ ] ste s n W lengthen the w in n o w . sing ; the

- l n o m a c c . . u . a . p ne t lso lengthen a t or or 3 before the inserted

‘ ’ ‘ ' ‘ ’ n a a u n . d n . a s l Th s , m , min ; gfa q , obl tion ;

n . bo w m ,

Singu l a r . D ua l . sfi m l m u r m ?“ sfmfi t was) " 1 . m nefi m lu am u mfi wm l

L . m ﬁsn sfa f ﬂ lW u w ere“

Pl u ra l .

N . A . Ha i ti ” fi ffi l wi f e " 1 . M lm l wfi e u

L .

o r n a zg or gra zg o r £11713 II

25 3 . a o f n m a c a a : . m m . (n me certa i ythic l h r cters) nom

. a c c . . vo c sing WW , W , instr m , . m ;

- . a c c . l. nom p “ W .

‘ ’ ‘ u i u m a v the s ffix ( t ; th s , fro m n strength , W , h ing ’ ’ ' s r . t m i n a n d a r e v a . trength , st ong S e s fi F L fqfi ery r re o I 92 Less n XXI .

25 4 v m u u f . Adjecti e co p o nds h a ving no ns o this cl a ss a s ﬁn a l

’ ‘ - m a r e v m n. u a v a d . ember ery co mo Th s , m f or bly minde

u a u a . u a Sing l r . D l Pl r l .

n . m . f. n .

“ “ N . m m 5 m m) w e) gw a li fe “ A . m TR

‘ ’ m long - li ved

u u a . Sing l a r . D u a l . Pl r l

ne w ﬂ i es) “slit em ° 2fﬂ

Voca bulary XXII.

’ sa a te a a Ve r b : for j y ) h ng on , be f stened

’

d i : sa dt o n a s u w. Ga xs j a t b u t often p a ss . j y e ( tho ghts

“ I L bo wo Subst ﬁll ,

f . ui f . a v . m , he enly nymp h m , p ip e , cond t

I k . f. n . r . a n a a U r n . ﬁ g? , p , Aps r s, ! “ , mil

f . . va i . c R , city

m . n r Pu r ura va s . m . k . . . ﬁaﬁ q , ing 36 “ , p ,

‘ a u . f . v . W l m . v fi lg , oice ; song fi fi t , (li ing) cre t re

I a . n . . N m . n . r . W , eye I N E , , p , ndi

m . m . I ! n . . W , oon “ , mind

. o f a . m . s . m m W , p y F ﬁﬁ i , inister ( st te)

f . n . a a u a . W 1 , bowstring . m , s criﬁci l form l , text

n . a a v I n . a . m , light ; st r ; he enly ! “ , glory , f me

‘

d . S m . a . bo y a ﬁ u L , merch nt

m a e m p ond . a “ n g

4 I I I I I . 9 Lesson XX . XX

a a m his loc 2 . i is the eldest ong brothers ( . , 0 The gods li ve b a 2 . A m a y the obl tion . 1 erch nt wishes wea lth a wa rrior

’

a m a n a d v a . 22. f e , scetic eli er nce The wo m a n s eyes a r e s uff used

a with te rs .

L e sso n XXIII .

l n i on m a m 25 5 . D e c e s . Co p r a ti ve Adj e cti ves. Co p a ra ti ve a d j e cti ve s of p rim a ry form a tion h a v e a do u ble form o f stem fo r m a s

u a n d u : a u u a c line ne ter stronger in m ( s lly W ) , in the strong

a a n d a a 1 u u a c ses , we ker in 1K ( s lly m ) , there being no

dd n k vo c . . m a . distinction of mi le a d wea est ca ses . The sing sc

‘ - ends in i n . The feminine stem is m a de with i from the wea k

‘ ’ - u ° stem form . Th s , m , better

M uln er . asc i e . N eut

. u . u . u a . u a . Sing D a l Pl ra l . Sing D l Pl r l

A . W i n “ n n

d k F e m . . . stem ﬂ a g}, eclined li e W

- 25 6 . Stem s i n o r E a two v : Eta t ( m) f ll into di isions A . those

“ m a u ﬁ s fe w a v de with the s f x i t (3 m) , being, with excep tions, cti e

a a n d u u a n d . m a o s p rticip les , p resent f t re ; B those de with the p

“ e i ve u i - a a r e a . s ss s fﬁxes t l o r 11 ) n d W or H ) . They m sc q ( a \ ( Q

“ ' a n d u m i . ne ter only, the fem . being for ed w th E

25 7 7 . . ar ti ci les i n 3 6 o r E . m ' n . A P p 1 ; ( W g m : ,

‘ li ving . Lesson XXI I I .

li n . M a scu e N eu te r .

ua u a . . u a . u a . Sing . D l . Pl r l Sing D l Pl r l

- N N W aha ? ) vfifi u di m vita v-ii sfia f ert

A . M R 3: n

ln a s i n m a scu i e .

- L . vﬁ a ﬁ r di a m vii 4a ;

o f a a d 25 8 . The St rong form these p rticip les is obt ine me

c h a n i ca ll u o ff a 3r d l. . o r y , by c tting the ﬁn l from the p p res (

i n d a c t u v o f . a ct . a . f u t . . ) . ; th s , W ﬁ ﬂ gi es strong form pres p rt

' a ‘ fi a n d r ; W i st a m . we k “ a ; fa s fa , fi lB L fa m a , m a n d m ; — m u ffi n gre w a n d m a n ; W W r n a “f a mq a d “f u na .

‘ ‘

l . c 25 u v r d . . a c t o f 9 . B t those erbs which in the 3 p lose the (

u u a T u a the s l f ﬂ (a s e . g . the verbs following the red p lica ting cl ss

- m a a a n d in the p resent syste ) , lose it lso in the p resent p rticip le ,

a v n o d n a n d a . u h e istinctio of strong we k stem Th s , from V3 ,

- - 3 r d l. i d a . . n . ct a . m . p ﬁ , t i pres gg p rt (only stem for ) Ecg t nom

m - - v o m m o . c . s . a a c c . n o v c a c c . d u . g sc . m , w w ,

0 l - - d m . u u . . n o m . vo c . a c c . s . . l. t p m , g ne t m , W , p ﬁ g ﬁ

- 260 . a v o f a a Only the present p rticip les of erbs the cl ss , the

' ' a - a a d a u v va a c - - n d u . a . vo c . a c c . y cl ss , c s ti es , in ri bly insert ( in nom

- - u . a d a o f a ne t Present p rtici ples of the cl ss , the root cl ss when the

d a n d l! u u a m a a o r root en s in m , E f t re p rticiples , y either t ke

- ’ d u . u u . 0 1 reject it ; th s , ne t . sing ﬁ n“ , m PM ; W

' “ ‘ du . a . a fi wifi or m fi ; m (pres p rt . from m , go

‘ - d a . o r a o f a ll v a n d a ll aTTﬁ W WII P rticip les other erbs , other

“ “ Wi a v o u t i n d u . n u . u i i stems in t , le e the 1 the e t ; th s , t“ ( t? ‘ ’ e a t - a d u , root cl ss) , . W .

‘ ’ 2 6l. a d . a a i n a The j m , gre t t kes strong c ses the stem

a m m a a v a v h e The gr ri ns , howe er , llow these erbs to insert t

- - n o m . vo c . a cc . l. n e u o f s a t in the p ter the p re ent p r icip le . 96 Lesson XXI I I .

- 23 9 a c . " “ . . a . 1 c form ET : nom sing m sc 13 11 (see , m ,

v o c . da u l. . m ; . ne t . p n e Otherwise the inflection

a o f a is like th t p rticiples .

262 m a a n d a d v 1 o r . The fe inine of p rticip les jecti es in 3 1 1 (

i a a a a n d m a wa a i i ) is lw ys m de with i , the for is l ys identic l

n u a u . with the o m . d l ne ter

Vocabulary XXIII.

Ve rb s 3 + go a wa y ; in

’ a m a d ti a u . v a . ﬁ g ( a ) bl a me . c s dri e w y

7 “ ( 1 3i shine ; ru le .

m m a N ou n s ( sub st . a n d c lf

‘ ‘ ' n b m . su . a s n ea t. su st q lfam , “ better, best ; . ,

1 . v a va . 1m (comp ) ery honora ble . s l tion

r . a . o f v . i u . m (p p rt 31 ) gi ing H t (ne t HQ ) being , existing ;

‘

f . ﬁ a s m a sc . su bst . d m a n a s W , ﬁ , bright , glistening; , goo ;

* - a c t . u a . em . a u l . ( ) ill min ting f (HTﬂ) , f ithf wife

- . a a . i I . ii , f become (p st p ss Adv

3 - a . a s n ea t. su bst . . p rt of , 5 1i to morrow

a u . u d . being, cre t re fg s rely , indee

Exercise XXIII.

' ’ n vu r rfi l n fs m fi qft afi fi gmrz l w fm fi m zfifimm m fi rfi n as n fa s fi i {gi t finc h 19 1 Wa ve : (a m: p l W a 1 m m a n m

E speci a lly a widow who immol a tes herself o n the fu nera l

o f u a d -I d a u ttee p ile her h sb n ; whence Anglo n i n s . M “ ” v E en tho u gh they exist .

m v a ?! in co position often con eys the idea of i m ita tion .

X V 98 Lesson X I .

a u li n M sc e. N euter .

u a u a . u a . u a u a . u a . Sing l r . D l Pl r l Sing l r . D l Pl r l

' ' ‘ ’ ' t N VA E N . Safl fi t afi fi fi 8 6m fi m t wi wai fi a fi a

A . sum 7:

' ' ' I . E fl fl l i ma fi m a s i n th e m a scu li n e . L . W W W W M — " 264. m F wr a u u d f A ste la t (to be c ref lly disting ishe rom m ,

a . a ct . o f 1 u p res . p rt 3) is freq ently u sed in resp ectfu l a ddress a s a u u u o f s bstit te for the p rono n the second p erson . I t is con

d v str u e d . I ts . . a with the erb in the thir p erson nom sing m sc . is

. a n d a d d “a m (fem W ) ; m , the contr cte form of its ol er

“ ” “ vo c . E a a a o f a : o u si r l H EL is common excl m tion ddress y , , ho ,

” “ a n d th er e l ; is often do u bled .

i 265 . D er i va ti ve i n r a u st em s W . These a e m de by the s fﬁxes

1 1 a n d a n d a r e o n e two a . 3 M , 1 1 , 3 1 , , with or excep tions , m sc

u . . m h n a a n d ne t only The ste a s a tri ple form . I the strong c ses

a v th o f the m sc . the owel of the su fﬁx is lengthened to in e we a k est ca ses it is in genera l dro pp ed ; in the middle c a ses the f a d a n d a mo m . . o a ll ﬁn l 1 is drop p e , it is lso lost in the sing

- l a . I n n u . a c c . a s genders the e ter, the nom p . , being strong c ses , lengthen the vowelof the s u fﬁx ; the s a m e ca ses in the d ua l ( a s

a we a k est c ses) lose i t b u t this only op tion a lly . After the a o r o f 11 a n d E a r e b a a q 1 R , when these p receded y conson nt,

“ a a ll a k a a v d a a n the at is ret ined in the we est c ses , to oi too gre t

‘ ’ f E a m : . k a u u a o a . m cc m l tion conson nts x ples W , ing ; W

‘ ’ ‘ ’ m u n . v . W . , so l , self ; W , de otion

‘ ’ Proba bly contra cted from W blessed m loses its ﬁn a l a before a llv owels a n d a llson a nt c o n u 3 E son a nts ; th s , ﬂ h 133 . Lesson XXI V

N u e te r .

u a u a . u a . u a . u a Sing l r. Pl r l Sing l r D l Pl r l .

TI “ t rauma “ ﬁ rst

v. n e w

N “a rm

A . L M T V . m am m o r a s!

266 . Eu h on i r ule . F a E a n d a u a be p c s in l li , q rem in n ltered

a b a s v o n fore initi l s u rd conson a nts ; efore son nt , whether owel or c

a v 1 E . n a a son nt, they become resp ecti ely L, g , L Before s ls they

m a u a a a a I . y be still f rther ssimil ted , becoming the n s ls ( I , R

‘ ‘ u i c f ; 71 Th s , aft ng becomes either m or m m

a m u m u u a . becomes m or m . The l tter ethod is m ch ore s l I 2 a a n d 67 . Before initi a l g a ﬁn a l m u te is m a de son nt ; then

" m a m a n u a o r v d so the 3 y either re i nch nged , be con erte into the

a a a u n nt sp ir te corresp onding to the p receding letter ; th s , either

“ o r I n w as . W t; either Ran g m or m .

a p r ctice the l a tter m ethod is a l m ost in va ri a bly followed .

W hen a denta l m u te co m es in conta ct with a ling ua l o r p a

a a m u o r a a u u a a a l t l te sibil nt, the dent l is s lly ssimil ted , becoming

’ ’ - - u a o r a a a v . u ti ka tz m ti stha tz r d ﬁ d ling l p l t l resp ecti ely Th s , st fro ; j

a o f r a n a inste d j . I 100 Lesson XX V.

Vocabulary XXIV.

’ d a " Ver b s m a ( eno m . v r ﬂ a ya ﬂ) de

u t o ff a . c . scribe , p ortr y

’ at c a n s m a r a a tz r ub r ub ﬁ s -la a u u dveya a tz E in ( y y ) , t g in c s ( y )

o ff . . , polish terrify

f . u a o u t Subst m , border, bo nd ry ;

m u a s si m k a lmi . , so l , self ; often s irts

n 7 l v u i n e i 1 m . a . p e reﬂexi e p rono n ; g 3 1 , sl yer, killer

’ ti ve . o wn . Ad , his , etc ; one s j

- - a . v d 5 2 n . ; WI E n u d 5 51 , deed ; ceremony f te F L long li e (ofte se

‘

o a . u a . a ﬁ t n hide , skin ; le ther in resp ectf l ddress)

n b . so a so u m . , irth m gre t, m ch

’ - i n . a k . w h o w a ?h o w m u ? at , b n , shore ﬂ a t gre t ch

soci a ble .

’

br a hma n d v a m . W ( ) n e otion , a ma i strong , ighty

a d o f a s cre word ( God) ; s cred blessed .

- a knowledge ; the world spirit . W shining, brilli nt .

' - d br a hm a n a e r so n iﬁ T u . m ( p Hf WF Q shrew , p r dent

a m u a s a m . i . c tion of the p receding) , the W t how ch , m ny

- 0 u m u a . a u . s p re e All So l , the cre tor . m , f m , h rsh, ro gh

va d fa r fag , f. p er ing ,

re a ching ; omnip resent ; mighty .

0 a . a . 7 EH, f. 3 11 (p ss p rt of 3 0 k illed .

Adv. :

m . m u m m . W , eeting, enco nter . m co only

V 1 02 Lesson XX .

Le sso n XXV .

“

26 D l n i o n . r f t A ti e a r t i i le i n a . 8 . e c e s Pe ec c v P c p s rm The

a cti ve p a rticip les o f the p erfect tense - system a r e q u ite p ecu li a r a s

d a o f I n th e a rega r s the modiﬁc tions the stem . strong c ses the

b a n d u n o m . . a . s fﬁx is T IE , which ecomes m in the sing m sc ,

“

d v o . I n a a u is shortene to 3 1 in the c . sing the we kest c ses the s fﬁx is contra cted into B EL; a n d in the middle ca ses it is ch a nged to

u -v a n d dd a Hit . A nion owel if p resent in the strong mi le c ses ,

d a a E S a k . Ra d a a n d d d is p p e rs before Lin the we est ic l i , if p rece e b o n e a 2 E S bu t d d b y conson nt, become 1 before L, if p rece e y more

“ a o n e a m a a d a l 3 a a be th n conson nt , beco e a ; where s r ic lw ys

‘ E u E B , a n d a a . ffi fi , fi l comes i before L r dic l 3 3 , I Th s, m m W 5 “ m , w ; W W , W . The feminine ste is

“ ‘ - d m a u fi fi . forme with 2: fro the we kest stem form ; th s , fi g fi

Ex a mp les :

‘ ’ 1 . fﬁ i q knowing

N e u te r . M a sculi n e .

u a . u u a . u a . u a . u a . Sing l r D a l . Pl r l Sing l r D l Pl r l

h e m a a s i n t scu li ne .

ti mer

‘ ‘ * 2 i v ’ . Elﬁ ﬂ nal h a ing gone

A o f a . o f v a k nother form p erf. p rt this erb (m ) m es the strong a n d mi ddle stems W ig a n d W ; the wea kest form a s a v is bo e , m . n XXV Lesso .

N eu ter . M a sculi n e .

ua u a . u a . u a . u a . Singu lar . D l . Pl r l Sing l r D l Pl r l

N .

A .

15 fi 1 . 5 11 13 11 rm a fa r a s i n th e m a sculi n e ’ L a . m gfiq m fifim tri u m V .

“3 7 1 m ‘ ’ 269 . St e m 2 3 . 3 . , a n d s 5 1 , 3 1 The stems 1 dog ,

’ ‘ u a v a s a a n d m . n . 5 w , , yo ng , h e we kest stems {F t { 1 in h E “1 7 a n d a TF ; . the strong middle c ses t ey follow ( L 5 1 , m

O a n d o r . F e m . {Ti } gaﬁ ﬂ m ‘ ’ 270 . Th e te m 1 . u a u a s 1m , genero s (in the l a ter l ng ge

a m t u v a a o f I d a h a s a s l os excl si ely n me n r ) , strong stem m m ,

O N o m 0 m id . a a k . . . vo c . . F e m . r, we est m sing N W T, 3 1

‘ ’ 27 I . Th e tem n . da u a n d s W , y , is sed only in the strong

w a a dd n o m . m m e kest c ses, the mi le, with the sing . , co ing fro m

o r L . a rsﬁ t mfg v i ta m or 3 13 13

272 . o m o un i h o a d v m C p ds w t Vi i r H i . The jecti es for ed

a n d r e u u a from this root with p rep ositions other words a q ite irreg l r .

Some o f them h a ve only two stem - forms : a strong in mi a n d a wea k in while others distingu ish from the middle in Wi t a

a k r a a r e we est ste n in q, before which the W is contr cted with p

‘ d I o r 3 . i m a ce ing ( L) 3 ( 0 into or Hi The fem . s de with t

m a a k m u a fro the we kest (or we ) ste ; th s , fﬂ i ﬁ The p rincip l ste m s of this sort a r e a s follows : 104 Lesson XXV

W a k . . a Strong Middle . e k (we est)

‘ ’ ‘ ’ a a a mi forw rd , e stw rd W

’ W“ ‘ downw a rd w i t ’ " “ 3 ; ‘ northwa rd W

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ba ck w a r d a m W , westw rd g m Eli ‘ lo w ’ ﬂ i t

’ m i ‘ following m WE I?

’ fafii ‘ go i n g hori z onta lly fa fia ffié q m

ca r V Vo bula y XX .

’

u d cha ti . Ve r bs 3 ?( ga c ) rise

’ ’ " 1 m W (a sta mga ccha tz) g o Gig (sprba ya tz) desn e

’ “ d se t li t l o own , ( y g home

a v u sed of the he enly bodies) .

m . a u . W , p ins , tro ble

m . . ﬁ g , lion

n a a . W . , b thing, b th

m . a z . g ﬁ m , g elle Adj

O d f . a ud d . M , , m] ; le rne , st ie

m n T a st r d n e . . r . a v a . 11 a v a s . rg , p , god , l a h ing stoo ;

' t f a m su bst i m m va . rﬁ qg . , sse bly , the o ble

' ‘ - n . a a a fi s fi a d . W , B roch ( holy p l ce fl i three he ed

O I d a . . a . o f in n i ) 3 3 , f w] ; (p rt m ) bitten .

- m . I a . ‘ . m , ndr W ﬁ lt forest dwelling

2 3 m . n . u . . fa , a e . 1 1 , , yo ng ; f g a ﬁ i m knowing, wise le rn d

m . fa mai , rip ening ; recomp ense .

d u a a m inserte , irreg l rly, in we kest for s only .

u a irreg l r w ) .

1 0 6 Les son XXVI .

l. n o m a c e . . ure mi a . Ge na ; p m . a ah , instr M :

k 2 m u a ﬁ the rest li e . ufa . , is declined reg l rly (like a f x)

’ m a n d a ‘ d a a in co p osition , when me ning lor , m ster ; when me ning

‘ ’ u a : i . h sb nd , it follows Gfﬁ in the following forms nst sing . W T,

' ‘ - da t . Il a bl. . . z . la ; gen W , loc Uc ﬁ

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ 275 . u u The ne ter stems W eye , W W bone , m c rds ,

‘ ’ a k a u a s “ thigh , form only the we est c ses ; th s , W . m ,

. a d a w fi r or fl ag , etc ; the rest of the inflection is m e from cor

i n i d u . resp on ing stems f ; th s , nom . sing Wfﬁ etc.

‘ ’ f . d o f . 276. 1 . u m a n o m . . Ra ﬁ , god ess fort ne , kes sing m

‘ ’ 2 . a a e n u . wom n , follows mixed d cle sion ; th s , nom sing ,

- a c c . l o r a da t a bl. u . w , fa u t W , inst m , ﬁ ﬁ , ge m ,

da l. . loc . fm ; . W , W : m m ; p nom fm ,

a c c . . . . . m or m , instr m , etc ; gen m

‘ ’ 277 . 1 . a f . a l. a a be ll , w ter , only p ; its ﬁn l is ch nged to g

- i u n o m . a cc . . da t. a bl. fore t ; th s , m , m , instr Wm ,

' ’ 1 . E . . 3 . 2 . f sk a k lma , gen W , loc 1 g ai y , m es nom

‘ d a a l a r e sing . aﬁq , . m ﬁ , p . (sometimes) W K ; the endings the

a l b u t a - norm ones , the root becomes 31 before conson nt endings “

- u a cc . . . a c c . l. . . th s , sing fa“ , nom p ﬂ a g , instr m Not

‘ ’ a a r e u u se . . m a a a llthe c ses fo nd in 3 Stem ? . (r rely we lth

‘ ' “ l . . d a . i . sing ( TH , W , ( m r etc ; ( Tff , W WI , U m ; p

‘ a n d - ( 121K (nom . ( Tﬁ TQ etc .

‘ ’ m - a 278 . 1 . o r . a a , m g m g , (from m g c rt dr wing

‘ ’ i . . : m i d . wa a ; e ) ox strong stem W ?’ g , we kest W

‘ ’ n o m . . vo c . . 2. 1 1 2 m . a sing W m , W The stem 1 11 , ro d , l a k a l . m a t u a . es the strong c ses , wi h irreg l r nom sing m ; the

‘ d d a a r e a d a n d a k corresp on ing mi dle c ses m e from qfw, the we est

‘ 1 e m u a c c . . ﬂ da t . a c . l. fro W ; th s , sing qwl q, 23 , p m ,

I n u the older l a ngu a ge oftener m a sc line . VI Lesson XX . 1 0 7

- da t . . m m . k a n d Wm [The ste s m , stirring stic “ a n:

F m . a n o f I a a r e a d , epithet ndr , s i to follow N L]

‘ ’ 279 . m . m a n v u a . The stem sq , , is ery irreg l r The strong

m m id . a . u . ste is m , HR, we kest 32K Th s , sing W , W ,

d a . l. m . v o c . ; 11 7 ; wi g , etc , gm 3 133 , 3 mm , gm p s m ,

1 e tc . l . 33K , Hﬁ ﬂq , ag

’ 28 0 . F o r f . a e m a u u the stem W , g , y be s bstit ted in the

- a v m f . u o r c ses with owel endings for s from m ; th s , W

‘ ’ - - f n 28 l n . a m a n o m . vo c . a cc . o a . Q , he rt , does not ke y

u m m u d m . n ber (excep t in co p osition) , these being s pp lie fro g gﬂ n

‘ ’ a 28 2 . m . ; The stem Hg , foot , becomes mg in strong c ses

a n d u d d a a u . . , in comp o n s , in the mid le c ses lso ; th s, nom sing mg ,

‘ ’ a c c . . . F a c c . m , instr Haj , etc rom ﬂ ag bip ed , sing .

' ‘ m . t l. . l. t . m a n gq, p rm , instr p fa nfg q [The ste rq , foot h a s d o f a - the comp lete eclension stems . ]

‘ ’ 28 3 . a a s a m m o f a u The root 3 1 sl y , ﬁn l e ber , comp o nd ,

m . . a n d i ts th e m i d a beco es 31 in nom sing , loses in d le c ses

d ” a n a k a bu t a i n I c e . its at in the we est c ses ( only Op tion lly sing ) .

F u 3 a F v i ts a rther, when 1 is lost , 3 in cont ct with Lre erts to origin l

‘ ’ S u v m . a a m a a k . . t ; th s, ﬂ a g t , killing Br h n , m es nom sing W EI :

" ‘ o o ° ‘ a cc . . . . o r vo c . gm , instr m , etc , loc a a fg m , 3

0 ” d l. n w a . a . . o . c c W , 3 “ etc ; p ER .

284 . m m . n . r . a n d e m . n . r . The ste s m , p , W i“ , p (both

e r so n iﬁ c a ti o n s o f su n m a k n o m . . bu t p the ) , e , the sing in m ,

u c . 3 1 n o m . IT, a c q , . otherwise do not lengthen the ; th s , T a u a instr

I n u d r a n a a u o n e m m compo n wo ds , ltering c se in me ber so e

li u li z “ B u t a times n g a e s a Q of the next following member . g utt u ra l o r l a bi a l in direct combin a tion with som etimes p revents

m a a s . the co bin tion , in the instr . ﬂ a w VI 1 0 8 Lesson XX .

r V Vocabula y XX I.

‘ E a ti a o r a Ve rbs TL (tgp y ) be p le sed s tis

ﬁ ed a o r a a . n . a mo ve ; in c a s send ; , s tisfy s ti te oneself

. u t a d v v . a p ; h n o er, gi e m fa comp l in

in ca u s .

a a a . hide w y , conce l

h W EI m m a n ( o mo) .

n . vo a u . a n , w, oblig tion , d ty Adj

- f . . m , one eyed

f - n . u u . d , m . &] u d u a ﬁ , notice tho ght, ind 3 1n fo r foote , q dr p ed

f d v m . , i inity , deity . k a m . n . r . (we est , p , m \

a V d a . da d d a . e ic s int or ine , ﬁxe , p erm nent

” m . . . b en e fi c en t a u fi g , foot fi rs , f HT. , gr cio s ,

W n p rotection . blessed .

r Exe cise XXVI.

fi n fi fia m a m m l

' Hm fi i mfitfl fi a fi mfi q qg n m a m a w fi m asm la lfumfit m um R t

W W I H I Q fl W W W I a' lm m uw m lgfim a ‘a w m t t t s m ‘ fi zfi a n e n wfs z urfi w ém ufm l am w nfi M a fi laa uufi a fi m fi a w a m w ’ fi a t aa lfi i z fi a i gfi fi a m é t w m t qs t fi m W mfi flsfl fi laa la fl m a é fi fi a a a m w afi m m u I a im M a r i am : wa s n ew m fi t’a fi réfl fi i : W m m lai lw gfi fi n a r zf é :

I I 1 10 Lesson XXV .

’ - N eut : N o m . a c c . . da . l. er sing m , fi , p Tfl lfi i ; the rest is li ke the m a scu line . 2 7 8 . a re?(watt)

F mi M a sculi n e . e ni n e .

u a . u a . u a u a Sing . D l Pl r l D l . Pl r l .

“ N . suit a nti

A i t ? n ' I a g ar W a mi ﬁ ra 3 :11 am D wgﬁ W e li b -W WW W G was W W t L wa f “ w as 3: C\\l

- te : . c . . N u a c i d a . 3 l. e r Nom sing t“ , m ; p W ; the rest 0 \ 6\ a o f k a . u a I6I . li e m sc The ﬁn l is nch a nge ble (cf. )

8 8 a v a h i 2 . There is defecti e p ronomin l ste m whic s

a n d u u a m a a ccentless , hence sed only in sit tions where no e p h si s

u . a r e c e . . fa lls p on it The only forms the following : Sing . a m

. m n . . a , . ; . , n . 1 . D u . a ce . m , n n g f m m instr , ﬁ , f mm

h ‘ 10 m . 1 3 . f . n . . 0 . f . n . a . . a . . m 1137 , , , qﬁ ; gen , , , , t m Pl ce m 11 11 1 ,

m a u d n . W ﬁ l, f. W E These forms y be se only when the p erson or object to which they refer h a s a lrea dy been indica ted by

. a 5 . u a form of ?“ or II ; Th s , ﬁ ﬂ W WW ? w

“ ” m an this o n e h a s rea d the a r t of p oetry ; tea ch him gra mm a r

‘

28 9 . a t a i ve a r ti i le i n or . B u o r P s P ss P c p a a y the s fﬁx a ,

“ a m a a v a u m o f v i m di in co p r ti ely sm ll n ber erbs , t is for ed , r e c tl f v a n d u a n y rom the root of the erb , nconnected with y tense

a v b a a d v a a a v a . stem , er l jecti e c lled the p st p ssi e p rticip le The

a a 0 W a m m fem . ends lw ys in 3 11 . hen this p rticip le is a de fro

a v v u a m a s a v u d a n tr nsiti e erbs , it q liﬁes so ething h ing end re the ctio

’ ‘ ’ ' ‘ ’ v u da tta v u kta k . expressed by the erb ; th s , a , gi en ; W , sp o en

' W m a m a n ve n u v th e a m e a r hen de fro intra nsiti or e ter erb , s p Lesson XXVI I . 1 1 1

ti c i le h a s a v b u t a n a u e p no p ssi e, only indeﬁnite p st , sense ; th s , ra ,

’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ - ‘ a gone , been ; aftIa , f llen

2 a u a s a n a v . V 90 . This p rticip le is often sed djecti e ery c o m m o n l a u a o f a v y , lso , it s pp lies the p l ce ﬁnite erb, when some form

‘ ’ “ o f e u ; u H 1 13 : ” be , or lis to be s pplied th s , he is gone ; ; “ ” I m e a w a s u W T ra m by letter written . The ne ter is

‘ ’ u u a s a su bsta n tive u a ? freq ently sed ; th s , m gift ; g “ milk

‘ m a c t on zs m h a i n a n d a lso a s n o en i . So etimes it s a p resent s g i ﬁ c a

a u a a m u v u tion , p rtic l rly when m de fro ne ter erbs ; th s , fa n (from

‘ ’ m1) often sta nding

‘ '

2 . i th u fﬁ " . c a 9l. A W s x T [lg] The s u fﬁx f is t ken by a n u mber

u o f roots . Th s

- 1 . C a a n d i a n d u v u ert in roots in WT, in owels ; th s , WT or

’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ’ i fa t a a d ‘ v i} swell , be , ﬁ n ; gr b n on , gh ; E T Wither , ana ; ’ ’ ‘ ’ 3 ” ‘ ‘ f ; 3 1 ﬁ , c u t n a destroy , m or g swell i , i

2 va a - a d T- w . The roots in ri ble a; (so c lle roots) , hich before

” u a s . a s u the s fﬁx becomes {1 or W » in the p res p s ; th s ,

’ l 1 ‘ (fi r , Elfi ; , 5 s) n g, M g ( 115 ) fill 33

3 fe w d m 1 . A roots en ing in EL (which beco es L before the

‘ ’ ‘ ’ “ “ ‘ ’ u a k I “ F a I th s , “a bre , “ t; bend , n ; r t sink , F: ; ( ﬁ t a

“ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ n eo r o i a a . o tw be sick , ( t : fi a fe r , f act Also others ( t \

’ 7 ‘ a u u a T: GI a a , a t ] ; W which exhibit g tt r l before the L tt ch \

‘ ’ c u t u p , an .

4. A u m o f m o f m v m n ber roots , so e the ery co mon , in g

‘ “ — m a : a H ﬁ r (which beco es Q before ) Hg , Ha ; (f g , m 0 q

‘ ’ c u t ,

‘ ‘ ’ 292 . f w v m a u m u a Some e erbs ke do ble for s ; th s , H s h sten

’ ‘ r ‘ o a u o r m . itd w ; f ag cq ire , faa

‘ ’ “ C m m e a t li - m o monest excep tions . m fro G TE: ; t fl fro ’ " ’ “ ‘ Hg ; W fro m $13 ‘ rejoice ; W fro m ( g weep ; W ’ m ‘ ’ ‘ ’ fro W sp ea k ; fi fgfl fro m fi g know . 1 12 Lesson XXVI I .

Vocabulary XXVII.

bba k a a ti e a t . Ve rb s W ( s y )

a . a m up éksa te neglect . W bre k ( ) \

‘ i r d z a 1 . 2? fa (o ik t ) sc tter . 3 1 enjoy ' “ — - E a va a zd a ti i a r i bba va ti . W W I (den . g z y ) i luff (p ) desp ise

md a tz k . despise . W ( j j ) sin

“ a i a u . a u . O a t + V , in c s a in c s (y J y ) yoke , “ Q g \

u sa . a . p rono nce, y h rness

' Z a a tz a a a EH 3 13 descend . EF L ( g ) tt ch ; h ng, cling ,

3 u ttdm tz a d . g ( ) emerge , come here

sida tz i t l h e o u t . s ; Hg ( ) , sett e down

‘ f é a te m u v m a u d . ﬂ or WT (Py y ) beco e sto t o erco e , exh ste

o r fa t .

m m a a . Su bst m . , wedding, rri ge

’ ‘ v m . da n om . r . m . . wfig fi p , the m fi t , illness

é x oﬁ oz A cvi n s (the I ndi a n A t g p ) .

“ m a k a n d c o n W . w l ” - a u o f o h i m . n . l u . vers tion ; cond ct life , g tI , , p o gh

va m . a a a . ser nce . { ft , ch in , g rl nd Adj

’ a o f 2 ‘ u m (p rt . fi l) red ced , de

c a e d u i f . u . ; . ﬂ t , h nger y r ined

e n . f o f . . a v . w re} , li e holiness , i e m f gre t, strong, iolent

‘ i u d t a . o f l fa t. relig o u s st entship . ﬁ d (p rt ﬁ )

- n . m a l m m a . u a W , e ti e, e l m st dying s cred know

d a s m . su bst. a a m n r . a V di . , . p , e c p erson a ge . le ge ; , Br hm n

stu dent .

a n (p a rt ) a b a ndoned ; w a nting

n d o m m . . in ; a s so eti es w instr ,

’ m . a u a u W , cq isition , g in . witho t

V 1 1 4 Lesson XX I I I .

ci le i s m a a u a r u p de by dding the s fﬁx a to the b e root ; th s , a m

' from 311 ; ffi fT-l fro m fi t; ffi fl from fi lm; from E?(o r ‘i ‘-d fro m t 294. I f e n d a a a 3 P the root in conson nt other th n 5 , t , [ , q,

a u u a a a s th e ordin ry r les of e phonic combin tion pp ly, follows

‘

1 . F a i a n d a u in l t t become Q ; th s , fqai from f“ ; gm m S fro W from E L. i o 2 . F a 3 a a s a a a a in l 1 becomes t , fter which , ls fter r dic l

“ “ E u m a ; , g ; f g f . Eg ﬁn l L, Q becomes 3 th s g fro m i from ag g a n d t g a r e a d { S a n d a n d g ﬂ a a i m e from AL { from t , contr ry

a n d t o 1 . I t a k g Ha Hg . ? m es 2 ; l,

“ “ a n n 3 . F a , d I E a d i be in l q becomes g L, L; the following t

“ - u 3 2 , W m FIE . comes th s, 3 from 3 1 fro t

u a a d 4. F a a va in l g is tre ted in rio s w ys , ccor ing to its his b to r i ca lva u . a . F l e Sometimes {I com ines with t to form 5 , before w r v a r e u m hich sho t owels (excep t Q ) lengthened ; th s , m e fro

m 1 u m , ﬂag fa 3 ; ; b t E g m g from g, Q fro £ 5 from 53 g fro

“ “ ‘ E . . W r a E o m b. T c H forms m here epresents origin l , the gg g g \

a TE u ; f t“: bin tion is ] ; th s , m from Kg a from ﬁ g ; gm from ‘ “6 . a 7 n gg The root Hg forms lso 3 , where g rep rese ts k 7 a i a . origin l t , m es 13

295 . b u u a h a s i ts a k The root efore a s lly we est form , if there is a n y where in the verba l system a distinction o f strong a n d we a k

. u : 1. u a n a a d d . . m forms Th s A pen ltim te s l is rop pe ; e g , a re?fro

“ m 3 13 ; a s fro a ﬂ ; a m from E R (or H R) ; m from m .

a r e a 2 . Roots which bbrevi a ted in the wea k forms o f the p erfect

u ff r a a v a “ s e the s me bbre i tion here ; e . g . , Gi g i from W , 3 3 from a q,

fr o m fr o m fr o m a g m , g ig a ; g W the s me form from ) , g g { \ ( ( R

‘ ‘ 6 1 . a fa g from 1 1 ; ﬁg from W . 3 F in l WT is wea k ened to E

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ' ‘ ’ ’ i n l I t m 112 i n fia from “ sing , fifl fro " drink ; to f g ra fro m

’ f ?! m ‘ ut h t a l a m m . a fro m p (wit i so ch nged to g) , ﬁ za fro VI I I Lesson XX . 1 1 5

‘ ’ n a fe w m a u a d . 4. a a WT e s re , others A ﬁn l a is lost fter a t in

“ 1 2 a n d k a 7 m , m, a n , ( a (from W li ewise ﬁn l R in 5 3 ,

‘ ' 1 a 5 . I a a a r e a a , 13 , m, g a (from v sol ted c ses 131g

‘ ’ a from m ; from }a pl y . a t g \

u a a r e 296. More irreg l r the following

' i n u 1 . m a k a Some roots W e p rticiples in wﬁ i ; th s , Q M

7 “ 11 E E . W , W , 3 1 , {T L m , a m, from EK etc

“

2 . a a n d m a k R m, ﬂ , ( E L e i na etc .

' ‘ ‘ ’ 3 . l v d va v The root g l, gi e , forms a? (from the eri ti e form

a d u Q ) . The contr cted form a is wi ely fo nd in com p osition ,

“- a t u o r . esp eci lly with p rep ositions ; h s, m or W , Fag rt ﬁ g , etc

- 297 . 11 Wi th un i on v w l u o r . o e The s fﬁx with Q , in the

m u a l u d w va v v - se for Ta , is reg l r y se ith the deri ti e erb stems in c o n da r u a a o f va v a a y conj g tion , lso often with roots deri ti e ch r cter

a n d n o t u l a . (like ﬁ a , fg ) , infreq ent y with origin l roots \ g

2 W v 98 . hen { a is a dded to ca u s a ti ve a n d denomin a ti ve erb

' ' a 3 12 a r e d d u a . a . fi stems the syll bles ; rop p e ; th s , fi g , p ss p rt fi ft ;

- a u . a . a . mi e ; a , F i ﬁ fa 1 c a n s. m ﬁ l W , t s ; 1, W , c s p ss p rt

7 c a u s ” m ; 3 1 , m a ﬁ a , a rra n

29 m a a th e 9 . A ong the origin a l roots t king {a m y be noticed following

‘ ’ ‘ ’ “ - Te a r r s f em t f ll , a t ia ; a t , gﬁm ; a s dwell , ; m t ,

‘ ’ - - tart; r . rs fa te ct ; , i fs ct ; H , s m thirst gfim ; fi t , i s g ‘ ’ W E . Hg m a k es i f} lie m a k es a fi m.

3 00 o r w u . A few roots form this p a rtici ple either with itho t

a u a u a n d f r o m 3 . the xili ry I ; th s , I T?! a 1 W ‘ g

3 0l a o f n a - a . The gra mm a ri a ns reckon a s p rticiples the form tion a d va v a d v m m do n o t a k few eri ti e jecti es , co ing fro roots which m e

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ a u a a u a r e u h a reg l r p rticiple ; s ch a m b rnt (m ) ; thin , g

’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ga rd 11g rip e (W ) ; W dry (33150 ; gig exp a nded 1 1 6 Lesson XXVI I I .

3 02 - . Pa st Acti ve Pa r ti ci ple i n m (or ﬂ awU. F rom the

a a . a . a a d v u p st p ss p rt is m de , by ding the p ossessi e s fﬁx W (f.

a a va v a v m a a n d u a ﬁ ) , second ry deri ti e h ing the e ning constr ction

T- o f a e r te c t a v a u 5 n m a z . p cti e p rticiple ; th s , i m , ﬁ a t

3 03 . a a a a u d a v a n d This p rtici ple is lmost lw ys sed p re ic ti ely ,

a u e d u a . e . w va u o f a er gener lly witho t xp resse cop l , i , ith the l e p

" ‘ ' “ - c a . u Fri f aif no o n e h a s son l p erfect form Th s , w seen

” “ m e ; C u a u fe m a or, with op l , W m m tho ( ) h st come ” a a m m i nto gre t misery . This p rticip le co es to be m a de e ven fro

“ i a v u I - sh e h a ” ntr nsiti es ; th s , HT maTﬁ s gone .

Voca lar VI bu y XX II.

3 mzik a ti u z Ver bs 3g( y ) be conf sed or d a ed

‘ r r aitci r a a ti o r u ﬁ ” ! in ca u s . (p y ) de st p id . ” E c ei ve . ( L W besiege .

u o n e r a r dka ti u eq ip I I (p ) grow p .

’

. I r a m d ti a self m I (p g ) p enetr te ,

h - dd a ti t é i n a u . v d d ig t f lm c s ( y p y ) enter .

d a ti i n a u . r a va r t kill . c s (p y )

" ' l a ld a te . u zw (p y ) ﬂee contin e .

‘

e a t . a v u v v . 2 3 enjoy, f wq rem in o er , s r i e 3 K m \

“ t w . 111 + UR honor . Et a : bestre a

' L m . z . S ub st ﬁ t , citi en

i n l a a . m . oc . a t a . m . W , end ; , l st m , p l ce

n . n . r . . 2 3 m . k a a a . W , p , Delhi 13 , Gree , b rb ri n

m . a ss. m . a a . a t , W , j ck l

fi m . . f . a v . f fi 33 1 , c e fifi , soldier

n . a v a n . a m . a m , beh ior, life . ﬁ t , r y

m . 2 3 13 1 m . n om . r . a t . 2 11 , p m , eleph n

‘ ’ ‘ ’ - a A qu a si root from go m a w y .

1 I 1 8 Lesson XX X .

3 05 . . : u u a u A a ] To ncomp o nded roots is dded the s fﬁx E T.

I t u u a a d b u t is s lly ded directly to the root, sometimes with the v W a u o f n d owel interp osed . ith reg rd to the se a to the form

a a a o f of root before it, this form tion closely grees with th t the

“ a - p a rticiple in a or a . A ﬁn l root conson a nt is trea ted a s before

. R m a e a a . a oots which k the p st p ss p a rt . in a genera lly reject 1: before E T.

“ E a m le . 1 . Wi th ou t i n e ted a x p s s r m m , r m , ﬁ a t , g m ,

“ ' ‘ ‘ ’ 1 a . a n d f g m from Q T, fga lfrom m pl ce (cf from

. B m i 3 7, W T from {T (cf a ) ’ ﬂ a t from a rt fro ﬂ t,

“ 1 5 ; 1 1 m a i T- o m fla n from 3 1 m from m , n from m , f r rr fro — e ‘ ’ ‘ ‘ fi n d i s . l m of . l m ; fik lT from 5 (cf fi l ), fro E ( i m) ; g g r fro

a 295 “ 3 1 m r m , r wa ( . , v g b 3 fro {g from r cf § W from ﬁ e l m W from E i , gm 1 fro - ‘ m l ‘ ’ 2. Wi th i t ed ﬁ V m nser fa {a rfro fag know , FW fro

‘ ’ ' ' ‘ ‘ dwe ll m . m a a , ﬂ fqa lfro fﬁ (cf m a ) , W T fro Hg (cf. 2223 )

m a u 3 06 . v l Some erbs ke both forms ; th s , from gi either ta

' ' fi rm o r m en ; from a n either H fi i cfl or W W

3 07 . Ca u a v a n d a v a k e u s ti es denomin ti es in W m 3 1m ; th s ,

e 7 3 15 1611 m , W 3 1 . M n ; a s. 11 ; E l

8 . . R o r 3 0 . B a oots in comp osition with p rep ositions ( some

o f k d a s a v o r u a k th times with elements other in s , d erbs no ns) t e e

‘ ‘ u w v d . d s fﬁx ﬂ , before hich is ne er inserte A root which en s in

- i n n d a . a . 3 09 . Roots m a Eli whose p ss p rt ends in a rtr

“ c - 0 - e r n n d i n u a . B u t u a m form this g i ta l; th s , na , 3 6 1 s ch roots

- 0 a n m a v a a u 1 1 . F a l a (not roots) y p reser e the n s l ; th s , 1 3 in ch nge

‘ a o fl a a r HT u fi l , . F l3 ble a becomes i t S ; th s , fi i fi in 11 rem ins f u a u . m e w a a m n ltered ; th s , m So roots sho we k for be ore Lesson XXI X . 1 1 9

su fﬁX u R t t a I I- m t r i this ; th s , i a . W ; h t ( W ) fro a t ; W

“ ‘ - - 331 from arty3 g ; g m from Fa qg.

I a u a a n d m a v a S O. C s ls deno in ti es in W reject those syll bles ;

u s th s , a hr a m m ud ; water ; m um; m m ; stra tu m

- s B u t a a a n d (m ﬁ) , W if the root ends in single conson nt

a us a v encloses short 3 ! which is not lengthened in the c ti e , then

u o f a u . d u the ger nd the c s ends in W , to isting ish it from the

- u d o f v u . c a u sx ger n the sim ple erb ; th s , Era m , ger W ; wa

' - - n 1 W a ﬁ r, ge s 4 mm

ll u 3 . The ger nd o r a bsol u ti ve i s u sed genera lly a s logica l a d

u n c t u a n a a a j to the s bject of a cl a u se . I t denotes ction ccomp nying o r ( u s u a lly) p receding th a t which is signiﬁed by the v erb o f the

I n d cl a u se . ( the l a ter l a ngu a ge it is n o t a lwa ys conﬁne to the

a mm a ti ca l u t h a s u vi r gr s bject o f the cla u se a s a n a dj u nct . ) I th s t u a ll va u o f a n i d a a o r a u a y the l e n eclin ble p rticiple, p resent p st , q l i f i n a y g the ctor whose a ction it describes .

“ u H w s 11 s 7 2 h a vi n a Th s, g a?3 i ta r a re" ta gs 13 g he rd

a v a a a a v a this , h ing b ndoned the go t, h ing b thed , he went to his o wn ho u se

I2 u m a 3 . The ger u nds o f som e v erbs h a ve not m ch ore th n

‘ ’ a va u u a v a . . k p rep osition l l e ; th s , m h ing t ken , i e with li e ' ’ ’ " ’ ’ ta wv w . k l é v; a v a . . u Gree ﬁ , x Ha n h ing rele sed , i e witho t , except

3 IS a ll u d m a u va v . Before ger n s y be sed the p ri ti e W or w;

” “ u u a v v 1 u a v th s , W witho t h ing recei ed ; W 3 1 witho t h ing

” u m m s oned .

Voca bulary XXIX .

a u a a a . Ver bs Wm cq ire , tt in , re ch ’ di W ﬁ t (n ya sga ti) entru st (to u go forth ; e .

’ one s ca re) .

Of co u rse the a bso lu ti ve s a r e often best rendered by rel a ti ve

a u v n a u a a a u . cl ses , or e e by cl ses coordin te with the p rincip l cl se 1 20 Lesson XXI X .

+ Wﬁ 1 u t a t a a W m . v . § p the he d , p , ictory

a u f . f u . p oint s r ler o ver , mis ort ne

r a ca la ti v o n . id a . W I ] (p ) mo e W m , wing ; s e , p rty

m a E m . . rch . “ li , frog

‘ ‘ ' c r ci n tai a ti . El f . n . . C . fi ﬂ ( g ) consider gﬂ , p , eylon

’

c a o a te a . m . . q ( y ) totter, f ll “I t , hero

“ d v . a k . Cf . 3 I2 . n . m a {T l t e W , e ns, e ice

5 + 1 la la c e . m . . 11 3 p m y or p on ﬁ g , bridge, dike

‘ ‘ ' i - - o m n r . a k k a T n i r a a ti t a n . . . f Q ( n y ) bring {W , p , mon ey ing

0 d . a n o m . 3 m . . end, etermine , settle m ; ( 3 5) , ﬁre

- 5 1 + vibhd a ti te u . “ 1 fa ( j , ) distrib te

r a r d a ti d a a 3 11 + I l(p v j ) w a nder forth ; 3 ]n is gree ble .

’ a v a b u . le e one s home to become resp onsi le, tr stworthy d a d a . u . . w n ering scetic w , both

f . a Subst ﬁ g , little , sm ll .

“ m . a d . . da u a . a m , pl n , esign fi a t, f ily , reg l r

n . o n a . m . , bringing the he d

k . m . m aiﬁz , on ey Pr ep o s. :

‘ ‘ ‘ a c m . a . ost o s . wi th a ce . a a . ﬁft t , eleph nt nfa (p p , ) g inst

E rcis I xe e XX X.

112? fi mfi mfi fiu ifi m a fi r wi th : "at " u m fi ren 3 3m m! Ef f m 1 : 3‘s a n ti wa r fi rm fi r m i m m uu rfi rgt gt mfi r a m W W ? wa s m a m m a t gm fita t 3 mm Hm : R um m a ’ ’ fw a fi fa éa gmt fi m m z t s lm r m

’ fi s mfwfii zufi fi r m wfift fia a g t a gi nfw u v fi r v

’ a m sfl a fi ls lgrei a fi m m gm m z lu lm a fl m m ww m fi fia z r é t w m W W W wi fe W m mu ls lsfifiigfié

1 22 Lesson XXX . a

“ a n d a u a u a ﬁ a H , c , ; th s , ﬂ , n ls, i f q a rem in nch nged before W g

w ri ﬁ ; , ; W 3 “ as ; m a an s a s , rst as W m

‘ ’ 3 ‘ dw ’ a a r e a d u ; a l . c rse , w “ ell , ga Other ﬁn ls ch nge a ccording to the r u les gi ven in Lesson XXVI I I fo r the con

o f a a a a l u . u v ersion ﬁn l conson nts before the p rtici pi s fﬁx 3 Th s ,

“ wa wa n , n ; w I , s ; s ew em Ref s a n ( ew a e ‘ “ i y n e si ; a a t s gn ? a , m ; t , gn g r . a ga fi fi q . gm “ 7 m Ga ; ; 3 , a ; . l ; t . a . t , ga fi g, fi ga 3 m as a ga e g q

F a i a n d a u ﬁ in l g becomes t , ﬁn l R , a ; th s , g , W ; fa g

‘ ’ k a . now , W ( lso W ) ; W , W

16 Th n di n wi th i n th e f o r m i s a 3 . e e g 331 ( ( 33 ) t ken by

a a n d a fe w v roots in ﬁn l long 3 ? the root I f}, with other owel roots ; by the m ajority o f roots in conson a nts ; a n d by verbs of the

' da u a u 3 . , “f a ; t ; secon ry conj g tions Th s , g y a, m y h e r i E f r r c f . H ram; a e. f ae, ﬁ m (

3 I7 . Ca u a v a n d a v e a v s ti es denomin ti es in w : h e m , the

' a a s u t iv root being tre ted in the p resent ; th s , i s, W ; H e

a . W ; a s, W rm

l a o r 3 8 . Some roots in conson nts insert reject a t p lea su re ;

” u 1 3 o r a k mﬁ I n . i t 3 1 . th s , 1 1 , m ga The root ?m es 3W

‘ I u fo r 3 9 . The r les the u se o f 1 in the inﬁniti ve a gree closely with those go verning its u se in the form a tion o f the s- fu t u re a n d

n ti o f the n omen a ge s in 3 ’

20 . of th e n ﬁ n ti u e o f 3 Uses i i ve . The chief s the inﬁniti ve is a s u va a n a u a v a s o f a v b a eq i lent to cc s ti e, the object er , esp eci lly

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ o f v a a a n d a v the erbs {rg be ble , W?be worthy , h e the right

The incremen ts o f EB a r e sometimes a n d inste a d o f a t a n d m ; esp eci a lly where a difﬁcu lt com bin a tion of conson a nts u v is th s a oided.

I n a ll - a n d va the tense systems , in deri tion , the root H § \ ' vf ddln i a - exhibits often the nstea d of the g p e strengthening . Lesson XXX .

’ “ ” u ‘ a or p ower ; th s , m fi rfi I fiffif a he is ble to tell ,

- “ ” ‘ ‘ a u u d h w n( z the prince o u ght to he a r it . W é is often th s se wit V

v a u r u o r a a s the inﬁniti e to express resp ectf l eq est entre ty, in the

a u v o f l a s t e xa mple . The inﬁniti ve is lso often fo nd with erbs

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ‘ ’ m a n d a d k w otion , with those me ning esire , hop e , notice no ,

n h k a d t e li e .

- 2I B u h v h a a u a u a v . S . t often t e inﬁniti e a s ca se v l e not cc s ti e

” - “ u a a v va u : f1 e a t . . Th s , d ti e l e Raf WW there is food to i e ” “ ” 1 “ for e a ting ; a geniti ve va l u e : “ i f W 3 1: ca p a ble o f going .

E v n o u k en a constr u ction a s n o m in a ti ve is t n nown .

322 n v h a s a u a si - a v . I certa in connections the inﬁniti e q p ssi e

O “ ” 7 - “ f . u ai a : u a 1 T orce Th s , j m t q beg n to be m de ; ﬁ g W T it is

” a u a not ﬁt to be he a rd . This is esp eci lly freq ent long with the

“ ” a v o f 6 5 u 3 3 7 7 7 a a a p ssi e forms 3 1; th s , 13 m he c nnot b ndon ,

“ ” ‘ ' b u t will; a a n ? he ca nnot be a b a n doned ; c lﬁ m t?“

“ ” the two men c a n be brou ght hither .

' 2 t i i le or Ger un di a v 3 3 . F ut u r e Pa ssi ve Pa r c p , ve . Cert in d eri

a ve a v s da a v a u a va u u ti djecti es, mostly econ ry , h e cq ired l e q ite

‘ ’ k a o f a u d v ; u n to li e th t the L tin ger n i e th s , (from i ) be done ,

a ci en dus. m a b e m a d v Th e a f They y e fro m e very erb . ordin ry

u a r e : 2 a n d s fﬁxes three 1, ﬂ a t, w ill.

}

324 . . uf a A S fi x a a . Before this s u ffix fin a l r dica l 3 ” be

‘ u m 5 b a v m comes Q ; th s , fro m , 121. . Other ﬁn l owels so e

r a u a m m a v u za o r e v times em in nch nged , so eti es h e the g z en the

v ddhi - a n d a n d a a a r e a r strengthening ; Q often , i ii lw ys , tre ted before

1 a s a v w hu m a n d E i m l t ] before o el ; t s , fro fa , 3 a lsa ; fro ﬂ , ﬁ :

a n d m a n d 3 m E W ; fro , W mm; fro , a re}; from v , 1 ; from g. ﬁ i 53

3 m a r. c . I n a a a v a 1, few inst nces , short owel dds a before

u u 7 i . d . a l3 1 a the s fﬁx ; th s , W 3 5 (i ) Medi rem ins

a va u u a v n The origin l l e o f this s fﬁx is i . Hence the con ersio

“ o f l a n d t Q to ﬁ l of i f} to i ti before i . 1 24: Lesson XXX .

a o n e a o f a n d i s n a u nch nged in cl ss words, le gthened in nother

a u 1 r s but a vi cl ss ; th s , 3 8 . ﬁ t. w . m t ( g) , W (W )

a o r m a i u a n d - v a r e m u a e . I niti l edi l , , r owels someti es nch nged ,

u a - a v p ; u , s 1 i t; 3 31 sometimes h e the g strengthening th s i ] , 13 , g ,

. . t m a k . m m aw , m f The roo ma es ﬁ rm A for W (fro

“ “ ” a d i - m the defecti ve root w ) is ssigne to g t . arr Gri t a kes 3 11W

a n d . Ca u a v a n d m a v a r e a d a s M g . s ti es deno in ti es in W tre te

i n b ut m a u the p resent , o it the syll bles W ; th s , a t ,

“

3 25 . ufﬁ . a a a d v B . S x ﬂ at This is second ry jecti ve deri va ti e

i n ﬁ n i ti va l u 1. H a s a o f from the no n in 3 ence , both reg rds the form

a n d u e m o f u r e root the s or o ission t , the r les a the s a me a s fo r

“ v u a W EI, El a the form tion of the inﬁniti e th s , m , a fa a t {Efﬂ

f ' 3 26 u ﬁ . a a d a . O. S f x w ﬁq [Q M ] Gener lly r ic l vowels

will be fo u nd gu n a ted before this s u fﬁx ; ca u s a ti ves a n d de n o m i n

" a v a r e a a s i n - u ti es in are: tre ted the p resent system , witho t the

' a 3 u w g s syll bles m ; th s , W rﬁ ﬁa ra m : a i

27 a r 3 . The geru ndi ves in a s : e common in the imp erson a l p a s

s v u a n d a v a i e constr ction described in Lesson X , not seldom h e

u u u u 3 m f e t- B a p rely f t re sense ; th s , 3 1 a m m “ l{ ER with th t

” tho u sh a lt be h a ppy

Vocabulary XXX .

‘ 2 é dlza Ve r b s ln Ell(a va g te) di ve u n der

“

i a v . a ce . t? h e the right, etc ( )

' - . td a tz te u n (cf an: ( p , ) b rn (tr . a d

“ S - a a IT k . a i n a ss. uff E m ﬁnish , tt in p in ; p s er ,

~ a § + wv m p y . do p en a nce .

‘ 7 - ‘ ' m v E a a a . : wﬁ t isit, ﬂ fa rr nge, ord in, order

‘ a . n t a ti a ttend TL( g g ) d nce .

xxx 1 26 Lesson . xxxr.

14. a v a s a r t a The m a idens se ted them sel es (p s. p . ) in the g rden to

u r 1 ~ 1 . a e a v u . bind wrea ths . 5 Tr e friends b e to s a e from m isfort ne

6. a u a s a r t . b w a . 1 The d ghters ca me (p s. p ) to o before thei r p rents

H o w d a d o f a on e a a du 17 . is the elic te bo y this f ir c p ble of en ring

a ? 18 . Y o u m u m a a u se a n d c . p en nce st beco e schol r ( W u f W l77 . . o u u a v 2 h o § ) 19 Y m st bring boa t to cross the ri er . 0 .

a m ? 2 1 e use is ble to stop the ighty wind . The gentlem n ( m )

a r e a . 22. Ha v V a to re d this letter ing ﬁnished the ed , he went on to stu dy the other sciences .

L e sso n XXXI .

“ l i n 3 i 1 3 28 . N u m er a . Ca r d als : 1 5 1 2 f t 3 i r r 4, 1 5 s 1 , g , , i g 3 , 6 7 7 1 9 1 1 0 1 1 1 2 “ l , a }: , 3 , 3 11 m , 3 3 31 , 1 4 1 5 1 m 1 7 “ “ ii i ?! , “3 3 31 , 51m ?« a n : , m u ,

1 9 2 0 . 2 1 22 m , rm m am , m a , etc .

r 3 0 40 5 0 E 0 0 7 0 fi m , a m fi fl q , W i t , f , “ fi t , a ma

’

so 9 0 1 0 0 . o r 2 0 0 . 1 0 0 0 fa , a sfa , a ?! rm 3 n a m ,

‘ o r f 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 . fan gs; 3 “ i ; , EHHEH or W

v 3 29 . The n u mbers between the e en tens a r e m a de by p r e

’ ﬁ x i n u t - u b u u 25 . B t g the ni n m er to the ten ; th s , qa fa a fa note

1 3 n o t 1 11 . 42 5 2 62 72 a n d 92 s 1 513 3 , 1m , , , , , either fa te n ‘ — 0 — o 0 o r . 43 7 3 a n d 93 o r 2 2 fi mt 3 13 , etc ; , , either fa 1 13 5 11 etc . ;

“ “ ’ — a d o r o 48 7 8 n 9 8 o . 9 6 i s . , , either a g a m m , etc a f a

r 3 3 0 . There a e other w a ys o f expressing the n u mbers between

d ‘ d ’ . u : 1 . B u se o f a . the tens Th s y the the j W eﬁcient , in com

‘ . 0 . u a p osition ; e . g M FR 2 less i e . This s ge is

‘ n o ff a n d not common excep t for the ni es . Sometimes Qﬂi is left ,

. a v a va u . 2 . B a d . W W , etc h e the s me l e y the j m or

‘ ’ m a m . alo W ore , lso in co p osition ; e g . , w a fa ( s

a ste m H ifa) 98 . Lesson XXXI . l27

r u d fo 3 3l a m d a e r m . th e o dd u . The s me etho s se to n m bers

' - w 1 0 8 a v 100 . u n w é bo e Th s , Ham da n W M , s t ﬁ m u a a , 1 a m t mm 0 7 .

”

332 . I n ﬂ e cti o n o f c a r di n al . 1 . i d k a t s ( ii is decline li e qé ,

‘ ’ ‘ 23 | l: a d u a u . § (p . some , cert in The l does not occ r

‘ ’ ‘ ’ m m m a a a n o r v a n a a s a n n m so eti es e ns cert i ; e en , , i deﬁnite a rticle .

- - 2 . u a u u a u n o m . a c c . vo c . m . g (d l only}is q ite reg l r ; th s , , a ,

n 3 ; W , W K

. d l m a a n u . a u a n . h a s 3 . f a is in sc ne t ne rly reg r ; the fer the

- u a c . . fa . , . m . , c . ﬁ . a c c . stem g Th s nom m m x , nom n

- e n f . da t. a bl. , . . . ﬁ m; instr fa ﬁ qa , m g m m , loc fa g

- - da t . a l m : a c . . b F e . . c {HE , . fa . nom EL instr m g“ , gen ta . a m . loc t g

4 . h a s r o a e t n c s . i f}? W K in s g s ; the fem stem is wa g. - - m. m . c u n o a c a c c . u Th s , ﬂ an ( q , . m . W ; nom . . a m ﬁ ; c Q - i . . F e m . n o m . a c c . i . . nstr W K etc m , nstr , etc , w , 3 1 “ EM M W W , 3 23

u a v o (5 These n mbers h e no distinction f gender . They

r u a a s u a u a e inﬂected with some irreg l rity p l r ls . Th s

7 9 1 . w . 5 . 0 a , n ﬁ n a , 1 , ﬂ H , a s . , . s a t , s 3 3 m a g a

a n d u a r e a d d . a , comp o nds of 3 31, simil rly ecline

a s : qw E follows 3 3 , W W , a W g g

8 m a I u : ﬂ ? y follow ra , or be declined th s wi t “ I f“ ,

” 4 e 1K , M , W

e u a a 2 0 3 0 . . a r e s , , etc m , ﬁ m , etc , declined r g l rly

fe m . m a ll u . ste s , in n mbers

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 . a n d a re u a a s u . , 3171 m declined reg l rly ne t

m a ll u . ste s , in n mbers

3 . on tr i m 1 33 C s u ct on o f n um er als . 1 . The words fro to a r e u a s a v a a a n d sed djecti es , greeing in c se ( in gender, if p ossible) I 1 28 Lesson XXX .

. 2 u m a a v 1 9 a r e u ua a d a s with the nou ns . The n er ls bo e s lly tre te

u a n um u a s a d v no ns , either t king the bered no n ep endent geniti e,

o r a d s . a u st n ing in the ing in pp osition with it ; th s , m m

“ ” “ i n o r “Ff m : a h u ndred fem a le sl a ves ; W m sixty

” a u t u mns .

“ ‘ ’ ' din l r 334. Or a s. mam fi st z ai e} fl w, , fi fi q, g n , a g , a

1 9th a a s T3 , W , m , m , m , m (to , the s me the “ a d a bu t d o r 2 oth c r in ls , decline like 33 , Fan raw ;

o r 3 0th . a o r ﬁ g fa x“ , etc Note lso m m i l,

- w s 1 9th . o m e m aﬁ ufm a i t taff emu , The shorter f r s (m et )

r a e by fa r the commoner .

5 a n d 3 3 . i a k . W , W T m m e their fem in the

“ r . a al m o f m a a r e est , in 31 Occ sion for s the p rono in l declension m e t with from the ﬁrst three ; bu t the u su a l declension o f no u ns

a o n e fo r i s the norm l ordin a ls a lso .

‘ ’ ‘ ’ 3 3 6 . N um er a l a dver bs. 1 . Ham: once ; ﬁ g twice ; m

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ thrice ; W fo u r times ; am o r 113 3 1“ ﬁ ve times ;

n d O 0 ‘ ’ a so o n o r . 2 . o n e wa , with M m W in y ; 2 o r ‘ ’ 3 ‘ t “ two a i 3W élt T 3 “ ET W i in w ys ; fa n or , a ﬁ 5 3 1 B o r — ’ ‘ d ’ w . o n e o n b u d 3 b e . “ a n e m y ; y h n re s , etc

V r I ocabula y XXX .

' a bko a a ti Ve rb s w in c u s . ( j y ) feed .

' ' 355 1+ a n; (sa rhka la ya ti) p u t to fa i t + Wﬁ ] (a bhisiii ca ti) a noint

k . a dd . a s gether , ing

~ = a o f m . + a m . an“ wﬁ r p ss ( ti e) a g m cite , ention

’

a l a fi a k a . W U p ) spe , ch t

n . n . r . a . Sub st W m , p city S i - m . u V a . a r EQ , the fo rth ed

m d a l N for s no or in .

‘

I I I . 1 30 Lesson XXX . XXX

i - i x R k v . 3 . 1 a d o f 4. erses 1 . Krsn is the el est s brothers Arj u n a

a da va 15 . k h is the third mong the ﬁ ve Pan s . Some thin t ere a r e sor ts o a a si x m o del a ter 2 n d eight f m rri ge others , ( f

- - sen ten ce i n a n skr i t bo ve . 6 v o r u a S a ) 1 . Twenty se en twenty eight l n r

a a r e d a 7 . u m nsions m entione in stronomy . 1 One sho ld consecra te a a a hi s a a K sa tr i a hi s lv a Vai a Br hm n in eighth ye r, y in e e enth , cy

' k 18 . Tw o a s . 19. in hi s twelfth . gre t lights shine in the y The

a a a u Rik - v d te cher , h ving t ght the ﬁfth erse , recite the sixth . d i 20 . ak a m u n i u dd a a h s a e l e C y B h die in the eightieth ye r of g ( if ) .

21 33 a r e k d V da m 3 . Sometimes gods rec one in the e , someti es 3 33 .

L e sso n XXXII .

3 37 . m a v v a t v Co p ri son o f Adj e cti ve s. Deri a ti e djec i es h a ving

a a v a n d u v a o r a n d m comp r ti e s p erl a ti e me ning often , ore origin

a a va u a r e a A . d lly , merely intensi ve l e m de either ( ) irectly from b a d va o r B . m va v o r c o m roots ( y p rim ry eri tion) , ( ) fro other deri ti e

u d b p o n stems ( y secon da ry deri va tion) . 3 3 8 . A . The s u fﬁxes o f p rim a ry deri va tio n a r e N fo r the

a a v a n d fo r u a v . comp r ti e , the s p erl ti e The root before them is a d a n d u u a d b u a a a o f o r ccente , s lly strengthene y g n (if c p ble it) ,

b a a za o r a I n a a a k sometimes y n s li tion prolong tion . cl ssic l S ns rit fe w s u ch form a tions a r e in u se ; a n d these a tta ch themsel ves in m a a d v a m e ning mostly to other jecti es from the s me root, which see

to d v . I n a v a r e be their corresp on ing p ositi es p rt , howe er, they connected w ith words u nrel a ted to them in deri va tion .

‘ 33 9 . Th u s fi lfi qq a n d fi fqg ( j/ffi t t) a tta ch themsel ves to

‘ ’ fa n q u ick ; 3 13“ a n d ﬁ ft y (V3 to W

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ a d t a n d a n d ub bro ; um W W , worse worst , to the s st .

' ‘ ’ mu q a n d 1 u t a n d ; ﬁ qq q g , to 1g skilf l ; ra m m to I I Lesson XXX . 1 3 1

“ i t vr a n d t- o r a n d s t; m a f rs , to a re a m ; m um

W e to ( mg.

340 a r e a o f a a . The following ex mp les rtiﬁci l connections

‘ ’ ‘ ’ “ a a a e c f wﬁ a ﬁ ne r , 3 m . 3 m ; re : little . w h n . a e s

“ ‘ ’ bu t a a ﬂ i rts a v . a f e r TE? ( lso m , ) ; 1m he y , mm t R

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ a {f long m , mfw ; W EI p r iseworthy , good , ra g

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ' ‘ ’ bc st d a m u s , i t? ; ﬁ m a 3 m a g , a , better e r , m , ; ch l g

‘ ’ ‘ ’ “ u ld a U ﬁ m ; i nﬂa t s o e stat . t i W yo ng . te ire ; as . e

‘ - . e a n d $2 fﬁg mu Q 18 corresp ond sometimes to m g or m g , sometimes to 33 .

l 1 34 . The stem s in { 3 a r e inﬂected like ordin a ry a djecti ves

= “ i n . i n a v a u a de i t , with the fem in ; ﬂ ; those 2“ h e p ec li r

c le n si o n a m a n d . , with strong ste in m , fem h a} , for

“ w se e 25 5 . a a n hich So lso m d i i“ .

“

42 . r n 3 . B The s u fﬁxes o f second a ry deri va tion a e a t a d 6m

a r e a u d u se a u u a They of lmost nrestricte . Th t form of stem is s lly

a k a o f a - t en which pp e a rs before a n initi a l conson a nt ca se ending .

Stem s in ﬁ g a r e a l wa ys u nch a nged ; ﬁn a l {a a n d m becom e

n a d a r i u . {Q W , fte which the t of the s fﬁx becomes g - u e ° a a Th s , rm . ﬁ r m enc, a w£a t“ , W , w s; f r

” 31K » fe as t , sm

3 43 . Som e stems which a r e s u bsta nti ves ra ther th a n a djecti ves

‘ a r e u to va v o f a u W fo nd form deri ti es comp rison ; th s , W most m ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ a a n k a n a . otherly , W most m nly , w most li e eleph nt

344 . a r e a d b a d Comp ar i son o f Ad ve rb s . Ad verbs com p re y d ing

‘ ’ “ ‘ u a n d u l ( I the s fﬁxes in the forms m g m ; th s , g wel , d w , saw t

3 45 a a a n d . Con st r u cti on . W ith a co m p r ti ve ( sometimes with

other words u sed in a simil a r wa y) the a bla ti ve is the reg u la r

‘ “ u u e a da u d a constr ction ; th s , W T HQ : ﬁ n ﬁ ghter is e rer

” ’ “ to him th a n a so n ; n fa f a 3 m m intellect a lone is

V 9 I I 1 32 Lesson XXX .

” n a u a v v o r a v stro ger th n force . After the s p erl ti e either geniti e loc ti e

u d a a v h a s th e o f a m a y be se . The comp r ti e often force strength

‘ ’ d u a v u a ene s p erl ti e ; th s , m m most honor ble

Voca lar II bu y XXX .

- I du m . n . r . . fi ﬁ , p , the n s Su bst g

d . m . d u k a m . o n e o f a a W 5 , b nd of celes W , r n r

r m . . a a G a d a va . na , inter ti l singers , n h r E w

m . n . r . d {a , p A j

a n su bst . n . u u . a s . W , r nning, co rse W little , sm ll ; ,

” - ( m . a . 1m . , the world sp irit tom

m . d v a a va . m , eli er nce , s l tion . m swift

‘ ‘

f . n r . T u . fi fi qfi , . p . m , f { i n}, s ch

‘ ‘ 0 n d E n . m a . , . 3 ”a . ﬁg , et l ; iron m f old

d . m . a W , crow . a fﬁﬂ: bi ing, being

g m a o f h ilo so h . a m a system p p y I n decl

“

f . n r som eti m es i n sen se o . “m m , . p . a f if

Exercise XXXII.

‘ sits?m m tum a uto was fa m l

’ “ " w as fi mfi § m a fi a ufi xElfi n : n at : n m m a % : m h sfi gv fifi a a m l w a s t ra um a 1 a n ame?m zii oft nfixit 8 I “a t?fi s mi m

' ?iren Earn s : fi m fi a m e va fi s w a m vi a fi fi lu l Uf m mmfim m rfi sfit 1133 1115 213 3 with Q ! t ra fifi m fi fi rfi fi t z a s fa fi fisvm a fi t W emfi ne

‘ “ m we rfi ia fi lé na gfi sm m m m c a n : “ ’ ' win sm a rt 313 W : w i rui e : m i fi o n ur

‘ ' “ t ufu t ufizsrej si sim nso I mas. “ fla g m afi a sr m u as u

a a a s u Tr nsl te tho gh geniti ve .

I I I Lesson XXX .

a n u ncomp ou nded sta te wo uld be connected by E . g . 33

’ ‘ ‘ ‘ a n d G a n “TM done a n d u n done ; aa ﬂ mém ﬁm : gods ’ h r v o f u a u m a o b vi d a a s a n d men . The members s ch comp o nd y

o u sl o f a n u o r m . y be y n mber , two ore

D m i n a ti ve c u o f m m i s I I . et er omp o nds , which the former e ber

i a ll d o n a a s r o r u a sv n ta c t c y dep en ent the l tter , its dete mining q li

a - a fyin g a dj u nct : being either a n o u n limiting it in a c se rel tion ,

d n u m a d or a n a djecti v e o r a n a dverb escribi g it . Th s y be istin

- l : D e en d en t a n d B. D e r i ti v gu i sh e d t w o sub c a sses A . p , sc p e, com

o t u p o u nds ; their difference is n a bsol te .

’ ‘ ’ r e : o f d d a o f E x a mp les a ep en ents , wfm ﬁm rmy enemies ;

” ‘ ’ ‘ ’ 0m w a ter for th e feet ; m a m a de with h a nds ; of

‘ ‘ ’ d v a k 35 3 2 d a d escrip ti es, 313 1“ gre t ing ﬁ lﬂ m , ) e r frien ;

‘ ’ a d d g ai n b ly one .

a r a t o f o f a I . a n d I I a s 348 . The ch c er com po u nds cl sses

a b a m b a n d a r e p rts of sp eech , is determined y their ﬁn l me er, they

ca p a ble o f being resol ved into equ i va lent p hra ses by gi ving the

p rop er in dep en dent form a n d form a l mea ns o f connection to e a ch

b B u t u d a a d mem er. this is not tr e of the thir cl ss , which ccor ingly

is more fu n da menta lly distinct from them th a n they from e a ch

other .

3 49 . I II . Se n d a Ad e ti u d va u o f co ry j c ve comp o n s , the l e which

n o t v b a u t a b u t is gi en y simp le resol tion into heir comp onent p rts ,

u a v a s a a u a r e v a d which , tho gh h ing ﬁn l member no n , themsel es

- a a a r o t o u : A . o i e j e cti ve s . These g in e f w s b cl a sses P ssess v com

“ d r - u f u a e u d o d a I I . p o n s , which no n com p o n s the prece ing cl ss ( . A

‘ ’ o r d a o f a v a dd d u u with the i e h ing e , t rning them from no ns

a d v n u d into jecti es ; a d B . com po n s in which the seco n d member is

This cl a ss o f com p o u nds is o f com p a ra tively recent de vel o p m e n t ; only the other two a r e co mmon in others o f the rel a ted

u tong es. I I Lesson XXX I . 1 3 5

d a u a a o n : a 1 . a ti i i a l no n synt ctic lly dep en ent the ﬁrst n mely , P r c p

u d V d o f a a com p o n s (only e ic) , p resent p rtici ple with its following

d Pr o o si ti o n a l u o f a a n d fo l object ; a n 2. p com p o nds, p rep osition

- u w su b a a a v a . lowing no n . This hole cl ss B is comp r ti ely sm ll

‘ ’ ‘ E x a mp les : Erf ﬁ ﬂ p ossessing a hero - a rmy ; 115 1t h a ving

‘ ’ desire o f p rogeny W excessi ve .

3 5 0 a d v u a r e k a d v . The jecti e compo nds , li e sim ple jecti es , some

u d a u a s a a a n d v times se , esp eci lly in the ne ter, bstr ct collecti e n u v a s v ut u a v o u ns ; a n d in the a cc s a ti e a d erbs . O of these ses h e

a a a u d k d a n d a m d a s u grown pp rent cl sses of com po n s , rec one n e s ch h by t e Hind u gra mm a ria ns .

3 5 l. u d m a lik a d a A comp o n y, e sim ple wor , become member i n a u d a n d so o n d a a o f a nother comp o n , in eﬁnitely. The n lysis

u d u a v a v u a d comp o n (excep t co p l ti es) , of wh te er length , m st be m e

a o f u s d d u d by series bisections . Th the ep en ent comp o n

’ 3 d a v u i s v b 3 a n d 3 , one in p re io s existence , ﬁrst di isi le into $

- d v T i ts tw o . the escri p ti e asa mt , then this into elements

35 2 En h o n i c o m i ti on i m o un d . a o f a m . p c b na n co p s The ﬁn l ste i s com bined with the initi a l of a nother stem in com p osition a ccording

u Bu t : to the genera l r les for exter n a lcombin a tion .

1 a a n d o f m i . F in l {q W a p rior ember become { t a n d E SL

u u u a a a n d a a u before s rd g tt r ls , dent ls , l bi ls ; th s , m .

F a f m a u 2. in l W o a prior m ember often re ins nch a n ged un der

a u a simil r circ mst nces .

“ “

3 . a n a l a m ua . After ﬁn l 3 , ﬁg, initi Q often beco es ling l

- 4. Pronou ns genera lly t a ke the stem form o f the ne u ter ; fo r

a u a r e u H a n d E “ the p erson l p rono ns oftenest sed g ?in the sing ,

" a n d o i l 3 1mg g ng n the p .

5 . F o r m o f v a n d s W e in the p rior ember descrip ti e p osse s

i ve u d u 3 . comp o n s , is sed 13 1

- 6 . a the n o A c se form in p rior member is t very ra re . 1 36 Lesson XXXI II .

3 5 3 I n a ll a o f u a a o f a a r e . cl sses comp o nds , cert in ch nges ﬁn l

li a ble to a p p ea r in the concl uding member ; genera lly they h a ve the

eff ect o f tra nsferring the comp o u nd a s a whole to the a- declension :

O W u : 1 . A a 3 a s Th s stem in m often dro p s the ﬁn l 1 , in W , a g ,

0 o r 0 N ki . 2. A o i a d W a s 2 1, i , m is ch nge to , in 33

” O dd v 3 . a a a a a N . An 3 is ed fter ﬁn l conson nt , sometimes e en

- 0 a a n u v a d a s 3 1 1 . fter owel or iphthong, in 13 (W ) , 13 ( h)

a k u The sep a ra te cl a sses of comp o u nds will n o w be t en p .

(Pa rt I I . )

3 5 4 I n r u u . . COp u la ti ve com p ou ds . Two o m ore no ns m ch

a d v a n d o r a d v a v a c o less often jecti es , once twice erbs h ing

’ d a u a s u a n d a r e m c o m or in te constr ction , tho gh joined by , so etimes

’ bi n e d into a c o mp o u n df

- 35 5 . u m u a a a i n ﬂ ec ti ve The no n co p o nds f ll , s reg rds their form ,

into two cl a sses :

f i t ﬁ a l A . The comp o u nd h a s the gen der a n d declension o s n

m a n d u a d u a o r u a a d i ts me ber, is in n mber l p l r l , ccor ing to

a va u a s o r a two d v du a logic l l e denoting either two, more th n , in i i l

‘ ’ ‘ ’ things . E x a mples a r e Eﬁfg ﬂ é f rice a n d ba rley ; ( m ai

' ‘ ’ ‘ ’ Wi Ram a a n d Krs na ; w : go a ts a n d sheep ; a tw fa

o ’ fi a a K a tr i a s Va i a s a n d fi dr a s ; fi lfl l i l W Br hm ns , s y , ey Q fl ‘ ’ 3 5 2 6 a a n d so n , ) f ther .

. u d u a u d o B The comp o n , witho t reg rd to the n mber enoted r

d u b a u u a v to the gen er of its constit ents, ecomes ne ter sing l r collecti e

‘ ’ so - a sa m ahar a - dva n dva u a d a n d ( c lled ) . Th s , W an h n foot ;

‘ ’ ‘ Gﬁ a k a n d u n 3 5 3 3 u m w sn e ichne mo ; m , )

’ ‘ ’ a a n d e da a n d 3 5 3 2 . brell sho ; i mam , ) y night 5 6 3 . The l a ter l a ngu a ge p reser ves se vera l d u a l com bin a tions

‘ ’ a i s a d H du dva n dva u u t a This cl ss c lle by the in s , co p le ; b

dva n dva o f a v z djecti es they do not recogni e .

I I I 1 38 Lesson XXX .

- n a a . u p rior member sta nds in a y p ossible c se rel tion Th s , m m

‘ ’ ‘ ’ gone to the vill a ge ; ag fé g Veda - knowing ; fa qxﬁ a

‘ ’ ‘ ‘ ’ p rotected by Oi va ; 21??n “a DER! ) good fOl the CO W S

‘ ’ ‘ Q fiQ fi -rfl fa llen from the sky ; HW HQ W more mobile th a n

’ ’ ’ ‘ wa ves ; ﬁqm E TWII) best o f Brahm a ns ;

‘ ’ k d o W a g? coo e in a p t .

3 6l C u d o f a v a s ﬁ a ba . om p o n s this sort h ing n l member the re

d a n d i t a l root sometimes mo iﬁed in form , , if end origin l y

a v a l a n a dd d a r e v u u : in short owel , gener l y with e it ery n mero s

“ ‘ ’ u a v E a d a o r th s , w ag bo e ( lm st n ing in the w gon (

‘ ‘ ’ “ si mply i n the Ha ll on the hea d ; m only - born

‘ ’ ‘ ’ 35 2 G - d ﬁ a t ; I ra W , ) forest welling g qI ﬁrm in b tle ‘ ’ G . fH l born in the hea rt (i 0 .

3 62 . B D i u n d . I n d v n o f . escr p ti ve co m p o s this i isio the deter

m i n a ti ve s a d d a , the p rior member st n s to the other in no istinct c se

a b u t ua a d v a d v b a a d a s the rel tion , q liﬁes it jecti ely or er i lly , ccor ing

a b u o r a d v . u 35 3 ﬁn l mem er is no n jecti e Th s , ﬁ rqa q , Fla m

‘ ’ ‘ ’ well - done ; W evil - doing The co m p o u nds o f no u n - va l u e ca nnot well be sep a ra ted in

v - a u t rea tment fro m those o f a djecti e v l e .

3 6 a a a u a s a 3 . The simplest c se is th t in which no n ﬁn l member

d b a u a a v a s . u 3 is p recede y q lifying djecti e p rior member Th s , 5

S ‘ ’ ‘ ’ m EQ ?! W t) bl a ck horse ; W m gre a t m a n . I nstea d

o f a n a d v i n a fe w a a u u jecti e, the p rior member is c ses no n sed

‘ a a a u a si - a d v va u u ﬁ pp osition lly or with q jecti e l e ; th s , m f i p riest

’ ‘ ‘ ’ a - s ge ; ( Ta ﬁ king s a ge .

u 3 64. Sometimes comp o nds o f this sort express a com p a rison ;

‘ ’ ‘ ’ - - u a a s a u u d . a b a k . th s, m m bl ck th nder clo (cf co l l c , etc )

‘ ’ o ‘ ’ R v d - m a n t1 e r 1 . e . a m a n a s a e erse , Ha n na g , , ﬁerce tiger ;

a a a a a ll bu t a m a n . Liter lly, tiger which is not tiger fter ,

‘ ’ a o f a W . Or, p erh ps better , tiger (or mong) men (so hitney) I I I Lesson XXX . 1 39

‘ - ’ ‘ u . a v a s a “ fa g foot lot s , i e . foot lo ely

’ lot u s .

3 65 h a m m u . T e a d verbi l words ost com only sed a s p rior m o f v u d u a embers descrip ti e comp o n s , q lifying the other member, a r e the verb a l p reﬁxes a n d the words of direction rel a ted to them ; likewise the insep a ra ble p reﬁxes W o r i t p ri va

‘ ’ ‘ ’ v a re m d u ti e, 3 well , ill , etc . These co bine with no ns (in ‘ - s u a si a d va va u a s la s a d v . Th u s n o t q jecti l l e) wel with jecti es , W ’ ’ ‘ ‘ ’ ' done ; wufi lg a not a schol a r ; wa s} misfortu ne ; wffi fl

‘ ’ ’ “ ‘ m ore th a n a god ; WW I exceedingly fa r ; ﬁ f e-[31a excessi ve

’ ‘ ‘ ’ a fe r ; qﬁ mﬁ Op p osing side .

Vocabulary XXXIII.

’ “ Ver b s: E i t a n a r d a tz - te be ( L ? ( j y , )

. d v W HR com plete e oted to , inclined to

- a a a . E lI a a o n a u . g q+ ﬁ t st tion , pl ce, pp oint FL t go w y ( jo rney)

a W n , step . pl ce Sub st. ?

a i r sk t m . n r m ans; m , y i , p or

a u W m hermit ge m 1 f , q een

n r f . a Ell m . . . . , p W , ch se

“

m . . f . a u u W , boy, prince a m , m rch , jo rney ; s pp ort .

f . a m . i m . a a . m , g e, sp ort f“ , r ce , f mily

' ' ' r n a m e n t o ten m . a o f f f a ai m . o f a m , a a . a , ( 3 st te f irs ; news

- a o f f . m a d n . a a . , b thing p l ce ; pl ce W T , fe le frien

a m . a p ilgrim ge . W , hosp it lity .

' ’ O i n f . fa fifi fi ai} , the threefold Adj

c . . a u a . world m , f n, s it ble

“ n 9 “ m . . r . 1 5 11 . m a . w , p 5 , f , dop ted

m . a . W , p nther 140 Lesson XXXI I I .

bst f . a a s n eu t. su . . a o m , m é , f in the m nner , i ne r ;

o r u a fo r G a d a va . v a . s it ble , the n h r s icinity, ne rness , p resence

0 ~ f . a v v . w 3 11 , , fg , he enly di ine Ad v. :

u a a m . W , f. h m n . EU e rlier, for erly

Exercise XXXIII .

" “ - g u m ?a m cmfii : W W W Fag ct: W 3 ’ ’ " fi ai vvm va a a $3 3 1 n fa ga fif a au fa rfi M a ir? ’ um um : a I m a ? W fl m fi sfi e tfifi r

‘ ‘ ’ é ” sa fe qfia v m fiua z a fi fim m s ncan a sfm verm ’ m m fi m a fi a fi fi w g m ls l w e:

- ’‘ ' W W “ {Fa Ha gen 37 m fif vlflna a fi a m f Bi a vri ( 1 a r fi vfi e zlu la m m rfiém mfi fl ffi e fi a m gfw i fsm 7 m: m fie fi a r a m m fm ftmga ra g

F o r m m n n b h n s ( co p o u ds of wor ds j oi ed y hyp e ) .

7 . W h a d a r es. a r t . hen he seen her , brilli nt p p ) with di v - a u a s u - tb a n - u a a o f ine be ty , tho gh (( a ) more h m n , the he rt the k - a d a s r t d . u wa s s . a . a . 8 ing s ge incline (p p ) tow r her There p on ,

a v a s h - n - h ing le rned tha t sh e (a cc . ) wa t e da u ghter o f a Ap sa ra s he m a rried her by the gandh a rva - ceremony (fi lm ) s u ita ble - for

i - - K a tr a s. 9 . D u ssa n ta a d v a da a n d s y , fter welling ery m ny ys nights

a a a d d a k u n ta la a n d u d - o wn in the hermit ge , b n one Q ret rne to his

. 10 . a d a va h a d d a city Afterw r s , when K n ﬁnishe his p ilgrim ge , 4 l a n d u d a a - o f - ret rne to the hermit ge , le rning (fa g) the news his

’ 2 3 da u - - - - - m a a o f D u s sa n ta . ghter s rri ge , he sent her into the p resence

- - 1 1 . The roy a ls a ge a t first disowned (W TE IL Q GTJ Ca ku n ta la when z l she wa s c o m e - to - the - c i ty ; bu t a t l a st he p a r txm° a 7fi \ ) 3 1 2 i a ------a o f r u 12. I n u her the p l ce the fi st q een . the co rse o f tim e

” a s u of. 375 3 . To eng ge in the p ort of h nting ; below , ,

I V 1 42 Lesson XXX .

7I o e i ve o m oun d . v a r e de te r mi n 3 . A . P ss ss c p s The p ossessi es a ti ve com po u nds to which a r e gi ven both a n a djecti ve inﬂection

a s u a n d a a n a d v a o f a k ( j st shown) , lso jecti e me ning ind best

’ ‘ v deﬁned by a dding h a ving to the mea ning o f the determin a ti e .

’ ‘ ’ u d d a u o f a o d b n . Th s , the ep en ent am , be ty g , ecomes the

0 ‘ d ’ v t 3 . . n . a v th e a u o f a o ; p ossessi e 23 6 h 11, m f , h ing be ty g

‘ ’ v m . a r m m v the descrip ti e ﬁ m 3 , long , beco es the p ossessi e

‘ a v m . f. n h ing long

372 . d t u a r e a n o t u Dep en en com po nds , by com p rison , often th s

Bu t v v r t u rned into p ossessi ves . p ossessi ely u sed descri p ti es a e extremely frequ ent a n d va rio u s ; a n d some hinds o f combin a tion which a r e ra re in p rop er descripti ves a r e very common a s p o s i se ss ve s.

373 d k m . An a jecti ve a s p rior m ember ta es the a sculine stem

v u to a u a form , e en tho gh referring feminine no n in the ﬁn l member ;

‘ ’ u m 3 a a u u f . th s , Q ua mﬁ (fro 11151 ) p ossessing be tif l wi e

74 r u d 3 . As prior members a e fo n

’ 1 . d u o f v . 2. a A jecti es p rop er ; th s , W other form P rti

‘ ’ i le u n c s a 3 . N u a p ; th s , m whose mother is sl i . mer ls ; a ‘ ’ ‘ - ’ - u u fa d . 4 N u th s , a gfi q fo r ced ; fi fi tfi a three eye . o ns

‘ ’ r - u a si a d e c ti va l va u u d a d d . E s with q j l e ; th s , fm gﬁ gol h n e p e ci a lly common is the u se o f a no u n a s prior mem ber to q u a lify

a a o r b w a o f u va m a the other pp osition lly , y y eq i lence . These y

‘ a d a o i ti on a l o e i v . u a v well be c lle pp s p ss ss es Th s , W 1“ h ing ’ “ ” ’ ‘ ‘ Krsna a s n a me ; éﬁ w h a ving men who a r e heroes ; Q

‘ ‘ ‘ ’ ‘ ‘Efl t fl fl q n si n g spies a s eyes ; m a h a ving thee a s m es ’ . b a a senger 5 . Ad ver i a l elements (esp eci lly insep ra ble p refixes) ;

’ This cl a ss o f comp o u nds is ca lled by the n a ti ves ba huvr i hz;

‘ ’ a a n a o f a m a v u . the n me is ex m ple the cl ss , e ning h a ing m ch rice

v m a a a d d u d The p ossessi e y gener lly, in ccente texts , be isting ishe

m a a v a ff fro the origin l determin ti e by di erence of a ccent . I ‘ Lesson XXX V. 1 43

’ ‘ ’ u ‘ d 1 1 ‘ th s , W endless ; W3? chil less ; 333 with excellent

’ ‘ ’ a i ll- a v a v sons ; g rﬁq s ored . The a ssoci ti e p reﬁx a (less often

‘ t a d k a n a d v u o f k m U3 ) is re te li e jecti e element ; th s , m li e for

‘ ‘ ’ ’ H ? o r a m with a so n o r h a ving one s so n a long with o n e ; g v

‘ ‘ ’ a v a . . O a v a r e (G + Q n . ) f or ble 6 rdin ry erb l p W W . ‘ ’ ‘ ’ u o f d a - ﬁxes ; th s , m a n wi e f me ; mg limbless ; ﬁ rst 1

’ ‘ ‘ ’ a a d v p o werless ; m with u p lifted fa ce . 7 . Ordin ry erbs ;

‘ ’ u d d . th s , {g ﬁ rﬂ with mind irecte hither

3 75 C a v u u . ert in words , ery freq ent in the comp o nds mentioned

a t 3 74 4 a v i n a a u a a a . , , h e p rt won p ec li r pplic tion

‘ ’ u va v o 1 . Th s with m beginning (or the deri ti es W r i nf“ ) a r e m a de com po u nds signifying the p erson o r thing de si n a te d a u o r et c eter a g long with others s ch a p erson thing .

‘ ’ ‘ u : a v I d a a s ﬁ r st . . th e Th s , 2m I N the gods h ing n r , i e

’ I d a . O u a u m d u gods n r , etc ften the q lifying no n is o itte ; th s ,

° - ‘ k ’ 1 v a m ma ff? d . 2 . W k n a ri food , rin , etc ords li e 33 (a i ) a r e u d a w a to d a m a a d se in the s me y , enote cco p niment ; chieﬂy

‘ ’ ‘ ’ d ve r bia ll . 3 . u e b u u a t th e y The no n w } o ject , p rp ose , is se

e n d a u d a s a u . u . a c c . o r . o r of comp o n , oftenest ne t s bst ( instr

’ ‘ ‘ a k a n d k u il to signify for the s e of , the li e ; th s , { E m } for

’ ’ ‘ ’ a a a i a k e a . w D m y nt s s e ; m } for bed (See belo ,

‘ ’ 4. a s u . u . a v u ﬂ a t ( ne t s bst ) often me ns other in p ossessi es ; th s ,

‘ ’ ‘ n . a . a h a s a ff o f 2m m? , nother region (lit th t which di erence

3 76 . I n a a v a m do p p osition l p ossessi es , the ﬁn l ember , if it

a a a o f d a sign te p rt the bo y , sometimes signiﬁes the p rt to which

belongs wh a t is design a ted by the p rior member : th a t o n o r in

’' ‘ ’ u k a o n . u which it is . Th s n ﬁ nﬁ lq with nec l ce neck S ch com

u a r e m m a a t u l p o nds com onest with words e ning h nd ; h s , a fﬂ nﬁq

’ ‘ ’ ‘ d u a with swor in h a nd ; E 113 “ with cl b in b nd .

377 e a a u the m e . The p ossessi ves a r not lw ys sed with si pl I V. 1 44. Lesson XXX

va u o f u a f a v . a v a a l e q li ying djecti e Often they h e p regn nt sense ,

‘ ’ a n d become the equ iva lents o f dep en dent cl a u ses ; o r the h a ving

‘ ’ implied in them becomes a bo u t equ i va lent to o u r h a ving a s a

' u ‘ a a a do sign of p a st a ction . Th s , m g eﬁ a a p ossessing tt ined

’ ‘ d ” i e . ba v a a c lescence , . ing re che dolescen e ; WW W

‘ ’ ‘ u d d k . . h a s u d 7 with nst u ie boo s , i e one who neglected st y mm

’ ‘ ‘ ’ ‘ ' ‘ a . . a whose bre th is gone , i e lifeless ; m g cg to whom de th ’ 1 8 come nea r .

B . m o ﬁ n a 78 . d ed 3 Co p o u n s wi th g ver n lm em be r .

1 . a r ti i i al u d u v V d P c p comp o n s , excl si ely e ic .

u d . u m 2 . Pr ep o siti on s ] compo n s Th s a y con veniently be ca lled those comp o u n ds in which the p rior member is a p a rticle with tr u e

a lva u a n d a l m a u v p rep osition l e , the ﬁn ember no n go erned by it.

‘ ’ ‘ ’ u a v i m a u Th s , W T? l sting o er night ; Efra n ? beyond e s re ,

0 ‘ ’ ’ e x e w e ‘ e a r c ss ; Erh ard} next the .

37 Ad ti ve o m ou n d a s n o u n a n d a dv r b . C m u 9 . jec c p s s e s o po nd a d v k a r e u d u b a v a s a b " jecti es , li e sim ple ones , freely se s st nti ely str a c ts a n d v a u a n d i collecti es , esp eci lly in the ne ter , less often n

a n d a r e a u u d a dv a a u a the feminine ; they lso m ch se erbi lly, p rtic l rly

. u in the a ce . sing ne ter .

u a v u 3 8 0 . The s bst nti ely u sed p ossessi ve com p o nds h a ving a

u a la s m o f a d v c o m n mer prior ember , with some the strictly jecti e

u d a r e a d b H d u a s a a a a a n d a p o n s , tre te y the in s sep r te cl ss , c lled

’ duayn E x a mp les o f s u ch n u mera l a bstr a cts a n d collecti ves a r e :

‘ ’ ‘ ’ n . a z n . a o f a u fa g “ , the three ges ; fa ﬁ a ﬂ , sp ce three le g es .

‘ F eminines of like u se occ u r in the l a ter l a ng ua ge ; th u s fi éfi afi‘

d 0 3 ‘ d ’ (by the si e of 5 the three worl s . b d 3 8 l. Those a dver i a lly u se a ccu s a ti ves of second a ry a djecti ve

‘ ’ a a a a a n d a s The n me is s m ple of the cl ss , me ns of two cow (s a id to be u sed in the sense of ‘ worth two

1 46 Lesson XXXIV

' m u u 376 t fi fl . , fish . j nct re , k d n . a . . m , chest, bre st ug s ille

“ “ u . m . b a . . i av g , o r m . f n . yo ng

7 " f . , a . : 3 3 p in I n decl.

t u . m . d . WE E ng , ten on ; bowstring I then , here p on

a dv a ce . . Adj Hg ( . ) therefore

0 b a a u f. 3 11, l meless , f lt a m so long ; often merely

do n e do ch . less . ,

v a a s a s a s a s fai . a ; m a , ; Wi a , f f or ble n long while soon

bst a v . a s . n eat: su . , f or

a s n eu t a v a v a v wa r , f. inner ; El sse er ti e p rticle ; gi es to

f a n su bst. dd o , the interior , mi le ; the p resent the force

va d ff e a a . inter l , i rence ; occ sion , historic l tense

r is IV Exe c e XXX .

' ' ’ a ft-13m a avi a n Tani 3 a vft ca aut wra gvurfmlm 33 1 u nﬁ t Rein u ea 11 “ﬁ reman? W : a fa a ufa w I a a $5521 an d mi?

' “ a t a wn: a I a s: 3 3 uufim (pres . p r ) uéa finm fi we r

’ a s 7 a m q rr. a a a n mim r gs ui u a 3 1 um ' ' ‘ ’ ’ = a fi : I 8 lfuu fiz sm elt afirmfa sn m fi § gfi i m i mam m fZ FfiTC Efir -{T “Em it wa rm I u I a m a nd 6 mm : - ” w e: sfi xm a m 1 3 : t anti w a r a f a m a 1 . m w

fi lfi fl a t h a la m us! “ nso 1 a r e a m un m fi r m u e a s ter fi fi m mm ua fi laa lm w a m a m un m fi u as lW m fi tfia ra “ $3 125 m 6 13

- “E mm i u : use ! a re s Elfi n tam? a ug men t?sti mu ‘ fzfiwam‘étfl fire ma n as la t sfiz an : n at! u

- - - - - 16 . a v d v u do a v a Those who h e one e il m st p en nce twel e d ys , n I V Lesso XXX . XXXV. 147

’ - - - si x a o r h a . 17. P u r ﬁ r a va s I a a d d ys , t ree d ys , ndr s friend, m rrie the ” - - d a r va i 1 . Bh u ka h m oon fa ced fa u ltless limbe Ap s ra s U e . 8 rg c e a i d a d . 19 a s sit ua ted (3a ) o n the Na rm a . There st n s the long

- - - - - i n - a a m d a d k o f n a w . 20 . r e , bro d cheste ing the A g s , s ord b nd The

- - - f - - a o . 1 I n p a th o f k nowledge is better th a n the p th works 2 . the

- - - - c n 1 r - - d i 0 o i n str . o n e h Opinion o f the a ncient seers ( p 0 . ) whose u s

- - - a d a d m a a a t a u . 22 . v d b n is de y choose second p le s re Lo e is bo iless ,

’ - - - - - a n d r s h i n a o a 23 . a a bea a ﬁ s his b nner ; s s y the p oets . The Br hm n s

” ’ - - - a u i a b a i s u . 24. k a u d ghter , S t y n me , lot s eyed The ing, ltho gh

M - m a v d . 25 . elo u e n t a h a s (wﬁ l) ny wi ed , is chil less The q p ndit

v - - W - u r n o G. tu e d fa c ta ka a rri ed with his schol a rs . 2 ith p e (W E ) Ca

a - p r ys for r a in wa ter .

L esso n XXXV .

8 3 F i r t o u t o n of r b . r en t I n thi s 3 . s C n j ga i Ve s P es

u a a v a c t. 2 n d . i m v. a c t a n d 3 r d conj g tion the Op t ti e , the sing . , the

- l i . r a a u . m d a e d a p , forme otherwise th n in the conj g tion

3 84 tr on f o r m m a u . S g s . The forms in which the ste ss mes its

r : . o f n d strong form a e these the three p ersons sing the p res . a

f i n i m a i l o f v. ct n d m d . n d . di e . a ct . a l . a a imp , ﬁrst p ersons the , ,

3 r d i m v. a c t . o f m the sing . All other forms the present syste

r a e we a k .

3 8 5 . En di n . F o r m 7 a n d g s the iddle endings ﬂ , W 11 , m

“ a r e u u e n d a n d a d u a s bstit ted 3 a, a m m ; fter re p lic ted stems

a n d a fe w E a n d a r e u u th e ( others) Wﬁ l. ra, W s bstit ted for

“

a a d c ds . . . Second ry j . p , fem in Q

D e d “ ” . c k p p , s illed in s p eech .

F o r a comp rehensi ve view o f the wa ys o f form ing the. present

o f v a u a se e I du stems erbs following this gener l conj g tion , ntro ction ,

78 . V 148 Lesson XXX .

a v a n d 2n d . i m v. cti e endings wﬁ a , W ’ a n The sing

o r d a r e often ta kes the ending fg ﬁ x. Otherwise the en ings the

a - s a me a s in the conj u ga tion .

- i m o o f o t . a c t . et 3 8 6 . O ta t ve de i n . 1 p s g The sign the p is 11 y ,

da d b u t d 3 r d l. a n d with secon ry en ings ; W is the en ing in the p ,

d d u m is ropp e before it ; th s ,

3 8 7 e n t ar ti i l m i ddle . I n u a . Pr se p c p e the ﬁrst conj g tion this

a a d u p rticip le is m e with the s fﬁx W [3 1m ] , before which the

k a r d l . . . stem ta es the s me form a s before the 3 p . p res ind The fem

a a is lw ys in W .

3 8 8 n - - a d b a d . Cla ss I V. A : u cla ss . The p resent stem is m e y ding

‘ a b n u u c m5 to the root the syll le E! [g n ] , in strong forms ﬁ

‘ “ [Eh The 3 o f the cl a ss - sign m a be drop p ed before 3 a n d y \

o f d w d d n d l. lst u . a st q the l p en ings , excep t hen the root en s

‘ in a conson a nt ; a n d the 3 before a vowel - en ding becomes ELor

a d a s d o n e o r b two a . B a d ccor ing it is p rece ed by y conson nts d d d n d . i m v The en ing fg o f the 2 . sing . is ropp e if the root end

a v in owel .

‘ ’ 3 8 9 . I . R ot i n v l . o s owe s g press . i I n d ca ti ve .

v . d Acti e Mid le .

’ ’ ’ ’ sa n a va s su n u m a s sun ve su n u va he sun u m dhe

2 . gra m gram gas! $33 F i ﬁ 33 3

' sun u thds su n u thd su n u sa sun vathe sun u dheé ga r?

’ ’ ’ ’ ’ sun o ti sun uta s sun va n ti sun a te sun va te sun va te

’ “ E a ﬁ a r e a a v w h The forms E K , g la , g a é , mﬁ , ltern ti e it

v a v 1 st d a . a n d l. a n d u t those gi en bo e for p , occ r of ener.

1 5 0 L esson XXXV.

I mper a ti ve.

1 . WW m ent: m a m a mm? w ere? W W ?

tr 3 . 3 1m i? w ere straw W m am a m

Pa r ti ci ple .

“ 7 “ i “ 311 . a ed an a . SIT 3 3 1 . f mp g n , f

” o f The other forms o f this tense follow the model g .

‘ ’ 3 9l. 1 . a a 3 a The root g , he r , contr cts to 3 before the cl ss

“ 3 u} a n d 5 m r m a s a n d a m sign, forming 3m gn 3 g a strong we k ste ;

2n m . . d s i m v . a c t. 2u d d a . 1 n d . a c t. t o r g 3 g ; i ” W , etc

- 2 . The root $1 shortens its vowel in the p resent system .

r Vocabula y XXXV.

i /wn dti dbun u te a . Ver bs : i w , ) sh ke

o n d. a cn u té a u a . 1 7 071 v zu té c o ve r su rr u w ( ) cq ire , obt in 3 03 3 ; n ) ,

a ve m obt in 3 ” co r, etc

' m (dp n dti ra rely dp n u te ) a o w Op en .

u a . a a m a . q ire , re ch ﬁ t exp l in , nifest

a u . + 3 13 , n , or m , re ch . a n sh t

’ “ i n dtz i n u té a a a kn dti c c . a . fa ( , ) g ther mg (p ) be ble

zdti té o r a . u a . + 11 W t , g ther g (; rz , pm ) he r

’ o r d d st étz st zu té + fi fa fi , E rp , n a . fl t q eci e, con ! ( ) sc tter, strew

u d a e l e . a n sc tter .

‘

u n hi n dtz d . 3g 11 rge o . ﬁg ( ) sen

r t lz du n dti . u a + a d dr a t br i n ba ck . 3 ( ) , intr , b rn , feel p in g um w y 0 g

o r d tr . a o r istress ; , p in distress

a cc ( . )

m . k mm: , door eep er .

' l m . . n . r . a m q p , p , cert in de ons .

m m w W . , ight , p o er . V XXX . 1 5 1

° . 3 u N , f lT, meritorio s , holy,

u a u sp icio s .

‘ m . a . “ a . ( H , t ste , feeling TE L sh ring

0 m a a m a . a a m g ; . , Br h n in the m , f m , entr ncing, gree

third p eriod o f his life .

m . B r a a . fa n , hm n d E m . u “ a: , so n ; noise ; word .

Adj . :

“ i “ n e a r, f. Q T, w .

E r is V xe c e XXX .

’ m m fﬁ a t f ai th 3 3 3 15 611433?I W W 3 ﬁg s : “ M au ri ti ann so u

' W m m ztm a m fi sts a lé W m fi l'U lE'fl T WW W ailW 1 W W W 3 3 1m m a nag e r {alfa

- “ - fi t rt ezzswim 8 I m i ner a we a n ti : a ?s van 7 1W 5 15 m m fifwéfi tita n 3m : ( an?Elan a ?a fem ur ’ qtflmfi m m lélfi smfi fm anaemia : fitfi ga ni m e l n ew? fem ? wi m m a gi ifqa w m m?fi tfi fi te w mg

“ 3 m m fia t-am t; “ W fl w fi mfi a fl zle lm a mew: a w ait 5 13m u so u H 1 1 . a ving entered the temple o f the w o r ship fu lGF IHFU

Vis nu we he a rd the e a r - entra ncing (W song - o f- the - yo u ng

u se ? a t en d o ad 12. thi s o f a women ( a ! f q ) . Listen to word de v d s r d a ss r t f , a s . a r t . d . 13 . . a ote ( ﬁ g p p ) frien The g ee y (w , p p ) , who a r e a a a v a a lw ys g thering riches , ne er tt in the enjoyment of

ln ﬁ n o f . g. i s u m u m a The instr . sometimes sed to express the edi , or sp ce

o r a o r a a v dist nce ro d , tr ersed . VI . 1 5 2 Lesson XXXV . XXX

m 1 a u - e m a a a the . 4. By t stef l , well comp osed p oems y y tt in glory

k u n ta la a u o the wor ld . 15 . a in the ten regions f (W ) Q , m yest tho

- - - w - d imu . a u a d o f . 16 M t o get ( ) h sb n worthy thee . y brothers eter

’ - 1 . M a mined to tra vel to Ben a res . 7 y the king s sword bring grief to

------o f f . 18 . C ud i m u o r o t. a v o . p ) the he rts the wi es his enemies lo s

k k . v 19. co er the s y . Let the door eep er close the door

L e sso n XXXVI .

‘ - 3 92 er . Cla I . B . u la Th e fe . V bs ss V c ss . w roots (only six)

‘ ' “ o f su b - a e n d a a d c o n e n c o n si d this cl ss lre y in ( except , i , of

l - i n e r a b e u a a n d a dd a s a . irreg l rity so only 3 cl ss sign The ,

“ ﬂ e c ti o n u a o f n u - a u a is q ite th t the cl ss , the 3 being g n ted in the

m a n d a b u t a a a a strong for s , drop p ed (op tion lly , in f ct ne rly lw ys)

E a n d before L R of 1 st d u a l a n d p l ura l .

‘ ‘ ‘ ’ 3 93 . u i a . lst Th s a t , stretch , m kes W WW , a ﬁ fﬁ , etc ; d a o r a l c r m i d , m ( a m ) , st p a m t ( a m ) ; Ha , was

“ - - . ll k v n a a o f u a . amg, etc li e owel root the cl ss

‘ ’ 3 94. a k a k a k The root m e , m es the strong stem afﬁ , we “ 5 the cl a ss - sign 3 is a lwa ys drop ped before 1 a n d q in lst d a n d . a l t l. d s a n a o t . a v . u p , lso before q of the p cti e Th s

n di I ca ti ve.

v Acti e . Middle

“ a r w- E f ﬁ e ag te a i n 3153 W pm m gm?

I m p er f e ct . m a ss? was sta r-é a . st fifi a W W sum “ fl i t W m eta m

I 1 5 4 Lesson XXXV .

’ - - a n d so b a d v a n d u . u e 3 f. , from oth jecti es no ns Th s , lf 1W ,

‘ ‘ ’ n . a k o f a K sa tr i a . fl fi a fi , the r n y

r Vocabula y XXXVI.

“ m a o r v Verb s I “ ke known , isi

' n kur u te do m a k . . i ) , e ble

l do v a m en . 3 95 a a a l e il to , h r (g , + m ) p rep re , dorn ;

loc . o r a . , consecr te

a a d . i k a zu té u . a m p rep re , orn ﬂ t s z ) wo nd

‘ ’ a vi ka r o ti a k WTfHQ ( s ) m e Hi stretch , ex

k b . d a a nown , exhi it ten p erform ( s criﬁce) .

1 d en . a u b a b u . + 3 1 do goo to, beneﬁt (g , + 3 17, c se , ring o t

n sp re a d a bro a d

d a m a u i dds a ti d e ﬁ le d . hi e ; bl e , ﬁnd f lt g t ( y ) be

w m a n u té k . ith 141 ( ) thin , consider

u t t a d Et a p a the he .

a u Hf?! p y , recomp ense ; p nish

i n d ar a . a ce . r e e . a t . o r lo c . ( , g , p )

m . n a u . Subst a , f lt

f du f m . a . o Wfi i gfif a fl; , p riest of cer fi fi , con ct

a k . t in ind . p olitics k d m . m da . 3 3 3 . W . , p rogeny, escen nt 1 3 1 , ing

7 m a v £ 1 n . . wﬁ i m ” p l n ; iew ; Op inion 3 1 3 , kitchen

‘ ‘ n . H iq , ﬂesh .

n . a m , s lt. — ‘

o f a a . a n . . anf d . , ch rm , gr ce rm , S pice

m . d m . a 5 a . “ E EK , stonishment . 13 m , tr e

. ‘ d l n . a a a m . u . 3 1g ﬁ q , cert in s criﬁce . a “ , o bt k m . o f m . . a a a a . , coo h — , n me tribe 1? f f . v . at a f r aid , eil VI Lesson XXX .

. a . Add W , f de r

- “ a 0 a i t . d . E i . 3 . w 1, f m, blin lﬁ li , f 11, wrong , f lse

0 3 “ . 3 . d . . 3 a 1 f a t, goo , p rop er W , f 11, necess ry 3 ,

“ 0 ” 0 a d . . . . 3 a , f 3 11, knowing E a , f 11, re y

N J? enjoying .

E VI xercise XXX .

” a 38 3 3 1 W ’swa f er W i tt n as n

” “ fl a t m i {a t a t a t; W i l l ‘ ’ a m m a ta rfi r w fi r fi a m : " as "

v - a a n A n ih o tr m m u Catur m as a 8 . E ery ye r g st p erform the y

a u O G r e a t ~ K i n th k d ben eﬁ tti n 9 . M yest tho , g , p rotect y ing om , g

a n d a th a a thy friends h rming y enemies . 10 . Br hm ns ﬁnd fa u lt

- o W a d i n sa lt . 1 1 . a th e n d mi d a with the tr e h t idst ( ) , th t distresses d d v n o w . . t thy frien s e en 12 M a y I recomp ense him ( a . ) who h a s

d a - v 13 . m a done me a ser ice . By the co m n of the gre t king consecra te

u a to la w - Th the fo r p rinces ccording the (ﬁ ﬁ J , 14. e

uluk a s a An a hila a a ka 247 a Ca y held sw y (W i n) in p t ye rs .

- - a - o f- - a u - d v n 15 . By the ch rm her f ce the lot s eye ecli p ses (ﬂi t ?) e e

. 16 . I f a a. a a h im m a the moon one consecr tes schol r , te ches , kes

. c d 374 Poss p , cf. , 5 . VI I . 1 5 6 Lesson XXXVI . XXX

o n e m d 17 . him holy , then this beco es his chil The king

o f- the - Ka linga s wo u nded his enemy in the brea st with a n a rrow .

L e sso n XXXVII .

- - m s 99 n it la s. a n 3 . Ve rbs . c s The cl ss sig is in the strong for

a 7 mi d a d a d d the syll ble 11 [m p ] , ccente , which is de to the root ; a in the we a k forms it is ﬁ t 717 [ﬁ b u t before a n initi a l vowel

” o f a n en ding the f i o f VII m [qfi m] dis a p p ea rs a ltogether . ’ ‘ ’ hr i d a 400 . u bu : aifi Th s , Efl y strong stem afiqn p , we k fi

' kr i i i a n a v kr z . ( before owel , m )

I n di ca ti ve .

Acti ve .

I m p er f e ct . W e °fm

madma W e “ ﬂ a re n .

’ a ﬁ ﬁ a m w he n wi a

I m p er a ti ve .

1 . aﬁmﬁ r

2 . W e 3 m tg W a rn m e W m

Optati ve . W E

etc .

Pa r ti ci ple .

” ﬁ l m, f. an

40I. o f 2md . i m v. a c t . v The ending the sing is fg , ne er ﬁ x;

a n d r e B u t a there a no exa mp les o f its omission . roots of this cl ss

V 1 5 8 Lesson XXX I I .

I mp er a ti ve Opta ti ve . m ﬁ r w m w m m

3 . m m a m m m m m m m s; g a. a

- ‘ a r t. a . i P m c f m or m ﬁ

lr V Voca bu a y XXX II.

' a la va te Ve r bs 3 “ ( p ) drench .

’ dt '‘ 2 a n dti e a t . n ba dlm z ba dlmzté d “ ( p ) a ( , ) bin ;

' ' ‘ ' kr i zi te bu a aﬁ z ) y . c tch ; join ; comp ose .

r hn dtz ba i a t i b t a a . w (g ) string together ; n ( ) gle m , gl nce

m . 1 man a u co p ose “ ( ) me s re .

k zi té k z k a a . a ? gr z ) t e , sei e . ﬁ m; wor , cre te

‘ “ a t m u sn ci ti a ﬁ xhold , restr in , check . a : ( ) ste l , rob .

‘ H ?! a k v . 2 ﬁ a . f t e, recei e g ; (W ) lq ste l

’ ' ‘ ’ d n dti an i té k v i té : a va r a a ti - l j . 2 m , te ﬁ ( , j ) now 3 ( lso y )

W t a w . . i llo , p ermit choose 2 dti m ( p ) p rotect . fa x vi rem a in o ver . ’ ’ “ usp a ti a k a o r a stm atz strai té ; se e a i n 31 (p ) m e incre se ! ( , lso

w . V w gro Voca b . XXX ) stre .

12 n dti un i té “ u a . sn ti a . (p , p ) cle n a t d b the .1 ( ) ‘ i d i L r t a c t. v v . ﬁ (p p , , delight ; g p a n remo e

m id . , rejoice .

f . . Su bst W , crescent

m . a u o f m , E lf . k a . gest re resp ect j ﬁ , wor (liter ry) ” 5 f u l . m . a u a u greeting 33m , tre s re ; tre s ry .

“

f . . m . n . m ( a t , wish W , , oment ; time .

. i n . d m m rise n ﬁ rm , gol .

two a ll a n d a n d a The h nds ho owed op ened , r ised to forehea d . I Lesson XXXV I . 1 5 9

- m . d m . f gTf . va h m a , e on m , height, ele tion ; hig

k . . m . a m , sn e p osition

- a n . a d , . ? , le ing ro p e cord Adj . : ” “ - k f - a 278 m . . o d . Hm ) , stirring stic Elma ? to y

‘ u m fﬁ ai right , j st .

m a . a o f n . a ne a M t dis i , s criﬁci l p ost r (P rt g) kindly d n . a . . m , forehe d p ose

' lé c a r d m . u lt ( ) , s itor , bride m groo .

‘

2 é vdr a m . v r( ( ) , choice , pri ilege , Adv. :

a v . f or W before , in the presence

- a . r a a k d o f w. em . ﬁn m p . , sn e emon ( g )

u a who s pp orts the e rth .

E ercise VI x XXX I.

« straw 353 m: “ a i m sire n : I

' f a iti efi vr a“ i r it as n g , W W ’ fa éfi w amw gm ze ta m a fi a gra d "( W e $1a u an n “ tea m : went 3?!s a rm ) W a i t “ a t — “ - ” wa g valm a g 133 3 ( E j fi ta a fi cr u a n Qat a r Emmi mfi a figi a wtfifa fi fi m m sfi m m a lm m w a t gmd fi fa fit afi m t m m?! " 8 u a s W germ ?? ’ a e i m n u n W t fi 'a 1m m m a fi a fi st pa r am fi ’ w w ni fi e‘ fw m u é u m i s s es?m fi t a vn

' w ere m am a n fa mﬁ rr u e n W pi tt e

9 . o n o w 10 . a k a v Allo w me to g . T e these jewels which I h e

W ith the s u fﬁx a ?! (sometimes a ) a r e m a de a djecti ves fro m

‘ ’ ‘ ’ a d v a o f u a 1 a erbs , esp eci lly time ; th s , I la ncient , m ! e rly ,

“ l o f m ’ ama the orrow . V I I 1 60 Lesson XXXVI I . XXX I .

v o u a ss. 1 1 . a a v gi en y (p Let the gre t p oet we e (M ,

- - - i a 12 . E v da t w o i i ) a . verse wrea th o f word p e rls ery y

’ 3 . e v a r t thie ves robbed the king s trea s u ry . 1 H who recei es (p ) he d gifts from e very one is p oll u ted 34. T Crea tor forme

. a k fo r the world by his will (g m ) a lone . 15 Bet e thyself ( an)

’ k a k s a l va tion to the gods protection . 16 . Let ings restr in the wic ed

’ . W a w Ra a a u o u t by p u nishments 17 . e s m s d ghter coming d r es a r t. o f u 1 . m a a d (p . p ) the ho se . 8 Let the bri egroo gr sp the m i

’ d . a u e a t a n e n s h a n before the ﬁre 19 . An Ary n m st not

’ - t in a v v a ss. a r t n eu . s . 20. u other s le ings ( i f“ , p p , g ) One m st

u a r r o m i a . 21. b a the d a ily in nconﬁned (p t . f f t w ter M a y the

- d o d a - d - a - - a d three eye g , the gre t lor whose forehe d is orned

- - o u . with the crescent , p rotect y

L e sso n XXXVIII .

* - ’ — 4 7 er b . Ro o la n t d R d a n i v 0 . V s t c ss, co . oots en ing in owel

‘ ’ o r a n u - vowel (excep t VK g o ) ch a nge these into ( a; a n d 3 1

- k v d i n a w u a d. before owel en ings we forms , hen not g n te

‘ ’ = f 408 . R a ct . b u t u d m i d . : oot go ( , se in with the p rep . af ix

‘ ’ ‘ ’ o v fo r . . a a a g o er oneself , i e rep e t, le rn , re d ; the then be comes a s a bo ve) .

di I n ca ti ve .

v . dd Acti e Mi le .

a rts {W W m ww m

’ - “ ’ J fi t m a r-tr m ifi r m i twa “ fish

’ A n u mber of roots belonging to this cl a ss a ccent the root

a b u u a a s la — syll le thro gho t , in we k wel s in strong form s excep t o f u co rse in the imp erfect.

Lesson XXXVI I I

o - i d . : . a r ti i le . . : i . a rﬁn M m P c p Act g a t , f g

‘ ’ J I2 a a k u - v a 4 . 2 s { The root 3 y , t es the nion owel fter the root * d a a a n d . u when strengthene , before the initi l conson nt of en ing Th s

I n d i c a ti ve . l dd . Acti ve . Mi e

1 a . s ti re ala s 33m as? ’ i ’ i 2. a atﬁ r m i n a? a n t? ar a

' ‘ 3 . a qtfi t 33rd g a fifl {a safe grab

- ‘

m . I e f t . . : t wa w ; p r ec Act w a t , r4h , W 3“ ; i a etc i l. W . M d . : w a . 3 r d l. w t . p W gﬁ , i m etc ; p i “

“ I m er a ti ve . . : 31 . 3 r d l. p Act 5 3 , 3 , a m ; 3 3 13 etc ; p

v e c . e . M id . : 3 3 g t ga j , 3

. : . M i d Opta ti ve . Act W etc 3333

: i ‘i a ti i le. . M d . : e r. P r c p Act W C g n

4l3 Em h ati r o n ou n . u n i n ﬂe ete d a d . p c P The p ronomin l wor

‘ ’ ‘ ’ o w n . I t i s u d a s a W signiﬁes self , self oftenest se nomin a v a d a ll a n d u b b u t ti e , long with wor s of p ersons n m ers ; not seldo m i t rep resents othe r ca ses a lso .

V Vocabulary XXX III.

I t a a a u . Ve r bs expl in , te ch ; nno nce

ét a e t i o c . ( ) g . fa expl in ,

“ a dhi té a a d . r a ti ti c r a wﬁ x ( ) rep e t, re Q ( ) y, scre m .

“

d a . a a a . am go w y , ep rt fa scre m

té i a a . o . a ff x ppro ch ﬁ x(c ) lie, sleep

o i ‘ m e N o f h e a ve n ly b d e s) . Q ﬁ x lie a sleep o n

3 o f a v b d . b a . ?rise ( he enly o ies) ring forth , be r

‘ a a Bq pp ro ch . n bring forth . é br zt t a k sa a ste ri li a . ) sp e , y, st te . g ( ) p r ise

a a u a v a r e a a Sp eci l irreg l rities in this erb occ sion lly met with ,

' ‘ - i u a s t T . o f v b a r e a be s ch ar , a ﬂfg Some the er s in 3 llowed to f d k b u t d so a a r e a . in lecte li e 3T, forms m e r re Lesson XXXVI I I .

Su bst

- o f B u ddh a m n . r . a a far1 ” p , n me

‘ ‘ f u . ﬁ g l . , tong e

m n ' r . £15 13 6 a p

m . . m , logic

° a a . n . . . WT W , ﬂower m , f , l ment ble

° = m . u . a . w , q estion 3 ﬂ ft 1 m king, doing

n u ta i . m . , sense , nders nd ng Ad v

m u . o n m . k W , illing , rder m below , down ,

3 m n: m . n . r . u . 3 i , p gro nd

O ‘ ‘ m a . W . , com p nion ; a f

i Exerc se XXXVIII.

W e reti re me n ts m e t m edi a wag W e m e a n u a . u

’ a sh a mw m ma afia n a n W a s te: fi ttest W m a r 2 64) {fa us u a lts W W IEI W e mi tte r: I a rem n a nt “ ' 9 3 avian ?am a m fi g a m 3sfi wfi fi r n 8 n m amm ’ a m fa fi fi e ai fwfi fm m t a fa gfi t : n u u w ere ’ ‘ “ t f ; i - r M as e ra fi r a a a fi u t. n e t tng t ur f“ silt? sta t wfvfi ' “( a n n e n m a rsh : ta mm it a gar?u u se e sa w:

“ B RET: “ at fe a st? n Q n w W I G HT: WE T-[Ti — e m i a far W a rezﬁ t n so u

1 . v D a a r a th a u 12. Ra a 1 The three wi es of c bore fo r sons . m

- - a n d L a k sm a a b i a . n , followed y S t , went into the forest

W - - r - . o 13 . om en whose h u sba nds a e dea d m u st sleep si x m onths n

- - - u d 14. a a n thin tha n wha t wa s the gro n . A witness st ting y g other

- - a r a i to u ut a ss a r t 15 . . u seen he rd s be p nished (f . p . p . ) All g ilt

- - - - a o n h o ha a 1 . m u dep rts from e w s done pen nce . 6 One st not look

1 1“ I I I . 1 64 Lesson XXXVI . XXX X

- h n 17 . h a h u a t (n i ﬁ ) the rising o r the setting su . W y st t o come x

“ - - - - n - d (a far i ) to m y ho u se with wife a d with chil ren ? 18 . Pra ise

” Va ru na : th u s the gods a ddressed Ou n a h ce p a who wa s bo u nd to k a a 19 . a a u . 20 . I n a the s criﬁci l p ost . Alw ys sp e the tr th kingless

l a nd the rich do n o t sleep in p e a ce

L e sso n XXXIX.

- ’ I r . Ro o la on t d . Ro ot en di n i n on o n a n 4 4 . Ve bs t c ss , c s g c s ts.

md r d l f n d 3 . r e a d d o 2 a . a c t . a d The en ings the sing impf gener l y ropp e ,

‘ a n d the res u lting root - ﬁ n a ltrea ted a c c o r di n g t o the u su a lr u les fo r

ﬁ n a ls Cf . 239 242 . B u t a a d a u m , root ending in ent l m te so e

times drop s this ﬁn a l m u te inste a d o f th e a dded i t in th e secon d

a n d o n h a d a o r p erson ; , the other n , root stem ending in a some times drop s this a inste a d o f the a dded i t in the third person in either ca se esta blishing the ordin a ry rel a tion o f a a n d Q i n

the d n secon a d third p ersons . 4l5 . Roots in q a n d EL s u bstit u te Q for those letters before

“ n d l ‘- a b a n d . i , Q (which then ecomes before ix Th u s t ; K l \ ,

‘ ’ “ “ ‘ a k : a t m u d W Sp e af r, ﬁ fh , qf fﬁ (only these three for s se ) .

‘ 4I6 . R F k a c t . oot rag now , ( only)

d I n i c a ti ve . I mp er f e ct .

“ 1 . fem ﬁ rm ween i nf ers afa r

' 2 . 3 m fa w n ﬁ rst a léa or s ki n M W e

- - a a fi 3 . fi ts: f t Tm f refie a f rm ’ ‘ “ - I m vo z é t a r lfl fi . fa fa , 3 a ; m , fi fi fl t . f t im ; 3 35m

t ' fa? ) fi o O “ fi lfl l‘ e tc fi p l,

I n o f r o o ts a a o la a n d the inﬂection with ﬁn l conson nt , f this c ss

du a a n d a a a u n u ﬁ n d v fr e the re plic ting n s l cl sses , e p ho ic r les ery

u a a d v q ent p plic tion . The st u ent is therefore a d ised a t this p oin t ’ t o re a d ca refully the chief r u les o f e u phonic ch a nge in Whitney s

a a 139—232 a z Gr mm r, (the two l rger si es of p rint) .

1 66 Lesson XXXI X .

‘ ’ 422 . 1 . u d h , r le inserts before en ings beginning

‘ ’

a n 2 . E i d ; u 2n d . Qfi fi . F s with a q th s , sing f L wish in k l . a d u 3 r d . a . we forms contr cte to E R ; th s, p B fl ffi

' ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ' 423 . 3 3 r u b a h a s v ddln 1 K, , cle n g in the strong forms , a n d Op tion a lly a lso in wea k forms when the en dings begin with a v I n a o f tbe - ﬁ n a l v owel . the tre tment root this erb follows the

i - u i n d . r d . . , 3 m fi d a . i l. ifi fl o r roots in t Th s sing , gm , p {F e wa rm .

V r I ocabu la y XXX X.

o f Ver b s u wip e . “ i ' a u w. em . a a a m dlméti do Q R ( sz) r le , own ( g ) ( “L n: ( p )

’

c a e +3 1 a a a . . W ( sg) 1 rel te ; c ll , n me wrong

a . va i a n exp l in a “ ( sz) wish .

' ' '

d ve i dvz é a . éttz f st , st l v véd a k d . “ ( ) h te ﬁ lg ( ; ) now, consi er

“

a . I I h te extremely 3 1 + ﬁ f e; smite .

ér i r u b t 5 m . . i k ( st ) , wip e fa kill ff 1 a a o . + 3 1 : wip e w y ,

3 4 n . a a . S u b st 1m m , gr mm r i l . m . m n r R . 3 . . . a i ) ? , p 11 3 , p , ishi

t m . a u . ﬁ ] , , f . a . dec y destr ction £ 351 , hesit tion

‘ ’ n e e . . m . n . r a a o f a m , y Q é , p . , n me i .

“ g m . u . n a i , conq eror E FI . . g J , le rning

“ 2 f . a . m a 3 11 , comp ssion , p ity Hﬁ cre tion .

d u m . . m u , estr ction f . d . fQ ﬁ T , con ition , existence

m n . r . a a va 313 . , p , n me of i . G Adj . :

a “ t ra m d a . a m c ul , s cre text ; sp ell , ch rm 3 15 1, f. HT, bl eworthy,

a I ] ! m . o f . a e n , w tch ( the night) p hl .

u . ? n . 3 , cond ct Lesson XXXI X .

I Exercise XXX X.

' W a m zfi fi m a m fl éfi t a fi a m fi fe W e s w a n t u as u

‘ m ‘ é fi a u ? rfi u a: u a —m f e se gw f gi n ti W i gw a m u a u 118?{Fri ma : fi re m

’ a n ? 313 m : " a n ufswfii wfi i f'i li Hi m m ' s fi r. n a lug fwm fifmfi m fl rfi un s 1 8 i t m fi fe vi a a t ?fm a fi fi rfi fi éa m n u n aft s als a a ft a ' r W i lm a? w fi rfi r m fa a wis h “ : w a s]: fag : u a n

fu au: u e u vii a t ri a “ é m a fi a " ri o u w m afit fi i

z 3 74 6 “ ? ﬁ af m § , ) a s ” W m u as n

12 . H a o f a d m a n a r es e r the words the le rne who exp l ins (p .

- - a r t. 13 . w tha t R m p ) the science o f gra mm a r . Kno a a i s the

s o n a u - - d o f D a a r a tb a a n d u , f mo s in the three worl s , c , the conq eror

- - - o f Rava a o f a n a . 14. H a v a n , lord L k ing sip ped (Err Q R) w ter

H o n e d o n a ce 1 . thrice , wip es the lips twice ; ccor ing to others , . 5 Two

a - a - o f- -Afi a s w ho w rriors smote (wfi i gfl ) with rrows the king the g ,

ha d u d 6 . u m r ered their com pa nions . 1 Kill witho t hesita tion e ven

a a a a a st . a ss. a r t (Wﬁl) te cher who p pro ches ( p p p . ) in order to kill

o u . 17 . W h u a ﬁ dra thou h y y dost tho consider (fa g) me C , g know

- - er . m ing (W g ) y le a rning a n d con d u c t ? 18 . Do not h a te the sons

- - - - o f a u . 19 whose wer e d a v a m d P nd . The women sons e d , h a ing l ente

a a m . 20 . u O u t gre tly, wip ed the te rs fro their eyes Tho , Lord , r les

v a n d u a u d em o er bip eds q dr p e s (g ) .

R a a u u e efers to f lse witness before co rt . An ntru th wher

s a l a . a r e d v v d u n m l be sts (shee p , etc ) concerne , in ol es the estr ctio

o f ﬁ ve a w a e a r e o f ncestors ; here c ttl concerned , ten , etc . L 1 68 Lesson X .

L e sso n XL .

’ ‘ ’ - di e . 2 . a c on t d. s i t I n 4 4 Ver b s. Ro ot cl ss, m

I m f . e tc . a n . w e. p we . w e , w e ; w e re ; m e. y

a c . I m v. e . a r t a rts . W K , m m i w est, m et P

u u W ( niq e) .

425 . m m a u u a The root m , co nd s bstit tes in the we k

h a - a m i l u forms wit conson nt endings the we kened ste w l; th s ,

l. . i n di e . . . d a . b ut 3 r d sing mfg etc ; . fm etc ; p m “ I m f . : . bu t 3 r d l. p 3 1mm , 3 1mg , m ; m etc ; p

‘ I m v. 2n d . r d l: . m . sing mﬁq; 3 p 311115 26 ‘ ’ a c . 4 . The extremely common root be ( t loses i ts

v m a a u . Th e owel we k forms , excep t when p rotected by the gment

d i m v. . o n m 2n 2n d . e sing . is Q ﬁ x; in the sing indic a is o itted

2n d a n d 3 r d . m . in the sing i p f i is inserted before the ending .

Th u s

I n di ca ti ve . I m p er fect. s 1 . afer era a re W a re :

2. arts e m ta s um m a m

3 .

I m p e r a ti ve .

1 O t . : . 3 r d l. . w ﬁ r we re 3 mm p a rm etc ; p gm.

“ 2 . Pa r t . : . . ufa g m Q 1 W e f mi}

3 . a s m a s

‘ 427 . R i n a n d m h i oots g (excep t fag g g) co bine g wit t ,

” u a n d a n d 3 a e ; q into 3 , then lengthen p receding 1, ; befor

i n 2n d a n d 3 r d . . a ct . th e K 1 g becomes q; sing imp f (where

‘ ‘ ’ d a r e d th e o m . u s k a c t. en ings dropp e ) g bec es z Th , fa g lic (

a n d I m f . a ct . : p W , W Wag ; m , m ,

i O r o r m v. m ( , imp f ) .

4I4. i a u i n 2n d a . See Wﬂ li s s id to be sed p ers . lso

1 70 Lesson XL .

— ' “ i i i; n fa (p r a vi ca la ti) m o ve rm 8 111 a ppro a ch .

i ste a d v . stir m (p ) comm n , go ern

‘ 3 dé dhz a a . fag ( g ) sme r . 3K bre the

' “ “ “ o r 1 a do dhi du dhé k . i f! 3 11 bre the gently, gig ( g , g ) mil O ‘ ‘ HTEL f vl sh u t (the re vi ve . ’ e d u w. en . eyes) . f t be conﬁ ent, tr st ( g

o r 10 0 . o er s . ( i weep . f p )

‘ i ‘ u tti ha ti a . lé hz li hé . 1 a st ) rise fa g ( d , d ) lick Q g (

3 13 lick .

“ u i l m . d . Sub st G a , sho l er

m . “ W . , enjoyment Adj

‘ 3 m . a . E . u . 5“ , h ir ﬁ t , f ﬁrm , resol te

° d k d . n . . fi , f . 3 ﬂ3 shrew , s ille m , gift, generosity gm

0 f . a . i . . 3 1611 , girl , m iden E mm 3 1 , right, p rop er

“ u . a . 1 m . n . . m , Q T, 3“ , , cl b , p estle f c reless b d n . ( ﬁa t , loo . I n decl

‘ ' ‘ . n . a . I a a i r , s criﬁce lla e rly , in the morning i g

n u n 3 1 a u . Gra i l . r . s 2 4 , m p , the god 2 1 ; gre tly m ch

a u n S vita r the s .

‘‘ 1

Exercise XL.

fa r- vii fa fa m a t an em ( a, y ? g ; “ m fi ' 1 a t a a h . e m g 13 31 n ri m 5 11213 E11 11m m; 3 7117-1?a t — f ' m u rm ur: ufi rw f m r e 71 611 1: 11 ac 11 find as ? 155 53 grm was !) ( ra i s i ns: mfi x m fi r ‘ fi mg rrct 11 9 11 fi va rfi mfig a fw fi rfa gfm n s n wa " ‘ afa n éi- n w m fi xm f a ng: 13s Elq d 11 a 11

H a o f a n d d d u After g , the initi l {t Q " w is ropp e ; th s ,

3 m m for W Q TﬁR. XL I . 1 7 1 Lesson XL .

‘ ' re fr a i n? ﬁ fsmfa sa i ﬁ: M W 11 8 11 g e m n a r rate magm as St a r-e m n e w 531151 11 14 11 W t

' afi rt u 11 W aite r fw v fi fiqfi fi vu u s 11 W

‘ a s : g age mi fine : a s} a g ufi i fa m a fi mgm z 11 c u

“ ” n em e si s : 3:11m v1 Gi raffe 11 e 11 ( rea m 3

- ll. L ong m a y the grea t king go vern the ea rth a ccording to

la w . 12 . Ther e w a s a k a a a i so n o f mighty ing , N l by n me ( n n ) ,

------V r n . 1 f a z i a se a 3 . a a o a The lion , s ti ted with the blood the sl in g elle,

k d hi s m u hi s u 14. u d a lic e o th with tong e . Let the ho sehol er s y to

“ ” u d u the g est : where di st tho sleep d u ring the night ? 15 . The

d k th e t a . 16 . b o a cowher mil ed cows wice d ily The y , be ten by

his a t 17 . W a u a r t u f ther , wep bitterly hose d ghter tho ,

? 18 . w tha t a t b u v a n d girl Kno th y which tho li est , the whole

- d v i s d . 19 H a v a m worl li es , the worl sp irit . ing risen in the orning,

v su n . 20 . I f o u d o n o t a Ram a e re erence the (W ) y p r ise , ther

w be a va o u u se i n r es. ill no s l tion for y ( m , p

L e sso n XLI .

r Redu li a ti n Cla . a m 430 . Ve bs. p c g ss This cl ss for s the p resent

“ stem by p r e ﬁ x i n g a red u p lica tion to the root .

4SI u v d u a a r e a s . The r les go erning the re plic tion follows

o th e u a a a 1 . The conson a nt f red plic ting syll ble is in gener l

- a u . B u t a a n o n a s the ﬁrst conson nt of the root ; th s , W , ( ) pira te is su bstitu ted for a n a s pira te ; a n d (b) a p a l a ta l for a gu t tu ra l

Only a sm a ll p re p ortio n o f the roots o f this cl a ss reta in the

- a ccent o n the root syll a ble in the strong forms . I n the grea t m a

o r i t a o n u a m j y , the ccent is the red plic tion , both in the strong for s

n a n d in those wea k form s whose endings begi with vowels . L I 1 7 2 Lesson X .

o r u ; n 0 3 ; th s , m . em ; ﬁs g , fs fs g i t , ﬁ s) ; ( ) if the root

a b a a - a a u a begi n with si il nt followed by non n s l m te, the l tter is

a va o f a n o t a u rep e ted (with obser nce ), the sibil nt ; th s , E n, N T

2 v l i n du a a . A long owe is shortened the re p lic ting syll ble ;

“ a n d " a u T- a n d i a v a i 33 is repl ced by I ; th s , Q {T { n bo e ; ft, fa ﬁ ;

- m u n a te s - v 432 . The p resent ste g the root owel in the strong

m u fa i ﬁ , fa ﬁ ; f a i , f i . for s ; th s , strong l strong a rs

‘ v s o f a m o f 433 . The erb this cl ss lose the 1 fro the endings

r l a v a s la s i n dd a n d i n the 3 d 51 . the 3 d p . in the cti e wel the mi le ; 1

k h a . a ct . a wa a a n a a a l v w s impf l ys t e 3 K , before which ﬁ l r dic o el

wm u e s i ; th s , s t m m

’ 434. R o 3 a a . F o r 2n d a n d 3 rd . . a ct. o t 2, be r , c rry sing imp f , 22 I of. l , 4 4.

di a I n c ti ve .

i 1 . f rm fa ? a ﬁ uﬁi

’ 3 a -fa uﬁi ﬁ m fa fa gs f rm s

I m p er f e ct . m uta n t s

2 a “ . 3 1fmrg s tr ngest s ta ge W m s te m li a is e :

I m p er a ti ve. - L fmm fi n fa un a fem ( m fa n ? fi rm s? fi lm s ? fe ign fi nge r fHH W TR tangen t fa wn te ams; fs m am

“

O t. a et . : . m i d . : a . . p Fa ti m a etc ; f rm etc

a r t . a et . : m i d . : P q ﬁ lH Fﬁ ; tea m .

‘ ‘ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ e 435 . Th l v a n d 11 u t a roots g l, gi e , 11 , p , lose their r di

c a lv w i a a k a v a k a n d 21 . o el the we forms , le ing the we stems {g {

L I 1 74 Lesson X .

‘ fi i ffi a n d a - d fi r a n d r fi g} before conson nt en ings , q fi g before ’ ‘ ‘ ‘ - v d u 3 r d i n di e . . owel en ings ; th s , p ersons fi n fifi , fi rfl fi , fi m fi

“ ‘ ’ “ . n d a k d 43 9 . u a a c t a m 2 n . 3 p o r, s criﬁce ( es the sing

r d i m v. ﬁ 3 3 1 . ss i ; p ersons imp f W m W , W ’ ‘ ‘ k 440 1 . a m a i ts v a . aﬁ , fe r y shorten owel in we forms ;

‘ u a o r o r . 2 . b e th s , f mi n e fafi rm . fe w fi fi n mt f r,

’ r a sh a med ch a nges its wea k stem fa ? t o fa i “ before ’ - v di u i n di e . 3 r d owel en ngs ; th s , p ersons fi i fa , fi fi taq, fa

Voca lar LI bu y X .

u mi d a v . i n p t on ; ( ) t ke , recei e

’ ‘ c a a da 1 dada li da tte v . + F1 , . 31 ( , ) gi e rr nge or in

u u u t la o n . I ! entr st . HQ nite , p together ; y

’ dha ti u a ba n do n n e le c t . 1 dadha ti dhu tte u t a . 1 1 211 ( , ) p , pl ce 3 (j ) q it, , g

' “ u i hr e tz a a . Fi ﬁ ! close , sh t. i f} (j ) be sh med

th e a u u a Sub st formed bl tion c stom ry

a t e n d u u a . n . a a . 313131 , s fety ; feeling of s fety the of religio s p p il ge

w l m . d . Ad i t , emon j

- a v f. a . . . ensf a , obl tion as , f s, di ine

“ m a 3 m . n . r . . a , 1 n , p rafﬂ e ; f excellent, re rk

1 m . a z . a . 11 ? , g elle ble 6

n a . fa ? . , possessions , we lth Adv. :

m . n a d . a t v . i s , . , rest , rem in er a m e ening

m . o n e h o h a s e r m , w p

Exercise XLl.

fi fi u fi e fi sfi fi m fir m fe n so u XL I XL I I . Less on .

1 1131 m a i n" sen 2 12111 1111111 131 1: 1

“ a s fa fii m h m vfi vim fi e sta 11 as 11 21: 115 113 1211 9 12 1 Hara re m a dam a fa wfi r e a 3 1111 1 1 fa fi fa 11 C1 11 e m m a fiwm fi was a rm

- wra 11 a 11 a 3 a usi f an s1? n sfii W a nd ( sati re 11 a 11 ii i Em m a sm a m mfafi fim 11 3 11 w w fsmsn mfi 2611 31113 11133 1 fa rm a nd 1113111 W 11 t1 11 fi 1s1i a1s“ fi i ( vo c sins f i i i fi i wra t h fi i fi i s wi m " £11 113 11 611 111

‘ - N W vrri 115 1) 11 11? v1 W 11 s 11 a s um m m i 1 e s g ft rcn u e fiwqfi fi ea rn e as f am e w e 11 11 113311

2 1 a a c e . k 1 w t : a 11 11 11 (p rt s p ) $3 s ﬁ m fag i h m m c 11 - m fw ﬁ i 1111111 gna w 611 gre w 11 so 11

1 1 Adhva r u s u a a ff . Let the y p o r the s criﬁci l o erings into the

- 12. a n a a la s ﬁre . The seers ord i forty s cr ments in the w book

. 13 . D a a r a th a u Va si s h a a s a (agfa ) e entr sted his sons to t schol rs .

“ d a : 14 . a a u s Meeting wom n in the forest, one sho l y to her Sister,

n o t a a 15 . a S n ata k a a a a a a a n d a n be fr id Let c rry (we r) g rl nd ,

- - - - - n d 16 a k a r t. u o r a u mbrell a a shoes . . One who t es p ) roots fr its gr in

- m a a ﬁ e ld to u . 17. tw o fro str nge , is be p nished Let the doorkeep ers

’ . 18 . a a . 1 close the door Do not neglect the te cher s comm nd 9. The

“ a - a m u - a roy l s ge , who wore ch jewelry, shone ( Fa HT) with gre t

- - - a k su n . 20. a a v a brilli ncy, li e the The schol rs who h e not le rned their - a r e a a a ce or lessons sh med before their te a cher ( .

L e sso n XLII.

44I. la . Al o o Ve rbs . N a sa l c ss l roots f this cl a ss end in c n

a a - a a a son nts . As cl ss sign they insert n s l before the ﬁn a l con

W u a r e d a d v ith the s fﬁx W , f. forme jecti es signifying

‘ ’ ‘ a o r o r o f . I n d bc a r m de com posed consisting the secon line , ’

a m . . a r e a u . the n me erely, i e not in re lity s ch 1 7 6 Lesson XLI I .

a u s o n e a a a s n a a son nt , nles be there lre dy ( in Hi ) ; this s l is

a d a a d p te to the conson nt , excep t in the strong forms , where it is

‘ ' e a d d a v a a . xp n e to the syll ble I [m], which be rs the ccent

442 a o f a a d a a . The combin tion the ﬁn l r ic l conson nts with those o f the p erson a l en dings is in a ccorda nce with the r ules a l

a d v fo r a n d d u a a re y gi en the root re plic ting cl sses .

‘ ’ 443 . u 1 3 a Th s , 3 k join ; strong stem we k gi ’

di a i I n c t ve .

A v . d cti e Mid le. as “ ste a m " 11111 1 1 as

I mp e rf e ct .

i I mp e ra t ve . W 311 531 $135 313 W g t . : a c . i d . : Opt. m etc ; m g a “! etc .

a r t . a ct . : . mi d . : . P a a 1 f a Fﬁ ; g \ g W

‘ ’ 444 R u a . oot W obstr ct ; strong stem ( ant , we k

I n di cati ve .

v . Acti e . Middle w i fe 11“ “ a 113 131“ w e v ?

’ m fg f em a % W s

I a d o f a n d k a nste gqa m , W , the li e , it is llowed a n d u u a e a e w ( more s l) to write M , W t lso W , ﬂ , a d 1 a a i m inste of ( 3 K etc . ; in e ch ca se omitting the conson nt m d a a a e i tely following the n s l .

I I l78 Lesson XL .

i i . W n . , C Subst wr t ng, op ying

h H a a f . d a . n i m . t e a Mts . W T , con ition , st te fs a v , im l y

d a d f . a m , wn ; lso p ersoniﬁe

U a a . s s, the D wn

“ b fo r K sa tr i a s . m . u a m m . , thorn ; enemy i n? s it le y

“ u g u . I d i . m m bite , mo thf l la omest c

0 u a v a . Hfm , f. m , nf or ble C\ “ d a u u g“, f. WT, splen id , be tif l ,

excellent .

3 a v 3 3 m rel ti e .

E ercise x XLII.

W v a n?gfi i w fi t a s 1s 1 ‘ - i Ra m a s 1 1 tes ts =1 th s ? 11 as 11 a mt £ 1m W fi fis {1111211111 1 111311 a m m i W m a 11 as 11 fi na fs aa $1 fi 1fl fi a a é aa m 1

' ’ m fi fi s fi fi a fi mfi m a m n 38 11 ” 7 7 1 ” 1 3 11 W 11 $1 11 wa s . m a fia? fe as ts 116 11111 11 farm 11 s 11 Sfi a w fi a li a s w as ( 13 1 151n 3113 111 ’ ' ‘ ’ F ETTW W 11 Q 1lw a m a fi a 3fi 1 mfl afifi re i i r fi s t mafi a 11 3 11 “( i f M m : 3 513 : W WW s m fi W E fi 11 8 11 m afi a a raw a m a s simfi a m i a fifsa fii ( a mfi fi v fi ajfla u s 11 t h

“ W m ffi fi ug a na emi a 3 13111 311 a na turi sm . fi r aya : 8 1111 11 15 11 a s? n faafi r fa fa fi ifa a f a m isfi t s m ar t? 11 m s 1913 13 1111231 fa g : 11 so 11

d Gi r i n a a r a d d 1 1. J a a inh h d After y s a a long besiege g , he estroye

The a ntecedent o f this rel a ti ve is the s u bject of Ela m

a a a s u a i v Tr nsl te tho gh d t e . ' I Lesson XLI I .

2 . a a t l 4 l (11a ) it a t l a st . 1 An scetic sh ll e a on y 2 0 mo u thf u s in a

' “ d r e u a month 13 . Kin le the ﬁ ; o t br nches fo r ﬁrewood

” (M ) ; milk the cows ; grind g r a in : th u s s a id o n e p riest

l - o 4 . a u t a nother ea r y i n the morning . 1 The te cher entr sted (fa g al)

a ' o k c d f 15 . the schol rs with the copying the boo s ( p , The

mo u nt a in - r a n ge H i m a va n t checks the co u rse o f the clo u ds

e d - 1 d - o f - 0 with its exc e ingly high p e a ks . 6. The oers right ( 3m)

’ a r e a H a v o u -o f- that r - . 17 . h ppy in e en , enj ying the fr its works A king who h a s conq u ered a foreign rea l m m u st not extermin a te

- - a a . 18 a d d ﬁ r e a t the roy l f mily . Ary ns m u st kin le the omestic the

- - - m o f dd . 1 W m u . ti e the we ing 9. o en p o nded the rice with p estles

L e sso n XLIII .

- 447 . n a u a Ver bs. Per fect System . I the l a ter l ng ge the p erfect

i a n d a v m a n d a a a system comp r ses only in ic ti e ode p rticiple, e ch

a dd I t a is a a k a ll both cti ve a n d mi le . s form tion essenti lly li e in

v a a r du li c a ti o n 2 . o f erbs ; its ch r cteristics a r e : l. e p ; distinction strong

a n d a k d i n u a 4 . fr e we forms ; 3 . en ings some respects p ec li r ; the

q u ent u se o f the u nion - v owel

i i n a a r e u a a c 448 . R du l a t o . I a e p c 1 . niti l conson nts red plic ted

L d u a r e cording to the r ules gi ven in Less . X I for the re p lic ted p

- sent stem .

n d a r e 2 . a a n d v a Medi l ﬁn a l owels, short long , rep resented by

d v d the corresp on ing short owel , dip hthongs by their secon element ;

” b u t o r a a b i t v b a s th e a ( Q I ) is rep resented lw ys y , ne er y in

- u a d . u red p lic te present stem Th s , M , W ; Q T, HQ I ; m , fa fi lfl s fia f sfia g m 611 11 4 1 3 31

3 . I a a a niti l El, followed by single conson nt, becomes WT

G -ﬁ u al u m m . (thro gh l n) ; th s , g , g

a a n d ‘ a m a a b u t 4 . I niti l 3 follow the s e n logy ; in the strong I I 1 8 0 Lesson XLI .

- v u a d u a v forms, where the root owel is g n te , the red plic ting owel is

m a b o f o r u p rotected fro combin tion y the insertion a a th s ,

' “ - - I i as a k . . 1 ( t strong p erfect stem m ( y ) we i n (i e “ 1

u - v -o k u - c c a u . strong ( ), we W ( )

R v b a u o r d o 5 . oots beginning with owels long y n t re p osition

n o t a a k d a - bu t u se a d in gener l m e the or in ry p erfect system , inste

a a a n . B ut a n p erip hr stic form tio (see below) m is excep tion , m a king the consta nt p erfect- stem 3 111 ; a n d a few roots with initi a l

e 3 ] o r EH show the a nom a lo u s red u p lica tion m in the p e r fe c tﬁ.

449 k n tr o n a f r m . . a c t . S g a n d we o s I the three p ersons sing :

- d u u a a a n a a . the root syll ble is ccented , exhibits s lly stronger form

As rega rds the strengthening

1 . I n a v a u o r roots with medi l owels long by n t re p osition , a n d in those with initia l 3 B the diff erence o f strong a n d we a k form s

n o t a a a . does p pe r , excep t in ccented texts

2 . d a a n d a v a r e u a Me i l initi l owels g n ted , if p ossible , in the

“

n u . . . , s fa ; n w . 3 stro g forms ; th s , ﬁ g w W , ﬁg { o i i ,

- w . s. a a e 448 W ; W 1 w , h r , d 3 . Me i a l 3 1 before a single ﬁn a l conson a nt is vr i ddhi e d in the d 3 r . a n d a lst u lst . p ers , Op tion lly in the ; th s , from W , in sing

e s 2n d i 3r d . either on ]; or wor t , in qu p, in m

4 . a v l a u za o r mi d/11 lst A ﬁn l owe t kes either g z a in the p erson ,

u za 2n d vr ddbi 3 r d u m lst o r g z in the , in the ; th s , fro ﬂ , in ﬁ t?

6 2n d r F 15 , ras, s a ﬁ ﬁ

“ - 45 0 . c m a u a m a n d l k e s , a1 The root i , irreg l rly the p erfect ste i, a d a v - d s H before owel en ding . a

4SI. a v Some roots , inste d of strengthening the owel in the

The gra mm a ria ns p rescribe ( do u btless fa lsely) this r e du pli ca tion for a llverbs beginning with w o r ﬂ followed by m ore th a n

a one conson nt .

I 1 8 2 Lesson XLI I .

’ d a . 1. a 2 . 3 . e 1 2. f a f ﬁé, W . fa w i ; p fa ra ﬁ .

3 . fa fa ﬁc.

2 : Act . : . 1 . e o r i e a a a o r é . an} Sing fa m : f r m n f rmm fa ﬁw,

l 1 . 3 . a d a . 1 . f f f 2 W I ; fa fa ﬁra ; a a a a . ER p

“ - i n o r h e la t e d . 45 6 I . Ro o t d lo f t s . I s 3 3 1 follow the mo e mention

‘ ' e o s u : Act . : S . 1 . ng r r 2 1 2 . g n o t f Th s, g ing ﬁ 3 3 , g m ( g g m

“ d u se e 45 3 . L i 2 . 3 . a § , i a , a q, a lg gg g ﬂ w ct

‘

Ac t : d a . . . g g fa a etc

45 7 u a . Cf. . is irreg l r in the p erfect (

v Acti e . Mi ddle .

3 a ma s n a gs; W E 3 315 ! 3 1 3 13

m a . I II . Ro ot 45 8 . se c 45 3 s g ( § , 1 stars a m s ga a my 1131 s aga s a s“? s a ga s at

- a i r«11a s a ga E1131 1 1111111

‘ ’ o 2 m S a i , ( 2 . . a a k lso i 2, 3 choose The other roots in e the

u : , o r 6 1 ﬁa a ﬁrst p ersons th s from 3 m W I , 3 3 , a ;

“ 45 9 I f a 1 d b a o n e a . the ﬁn l 13 be prece ed y more th n conson nt,

“ 1 o r a a s : . a , 2 . B ri the form tion is follows ﬁg, W m a ,

a d . 3 . d u . u a e f a a . s m ; m ( , W r, etc the being g n te

46 I n u d w n a v 0 . oo t i V. R s n WT (i cl ing those ritten by the ti es

‘ ‘

n d r d . a n d a k n t a 3 a c t. with Q o r i o r ah) . These t e i f) i ls sing ;

“ - n the i n is los t before v owel en dings a d E . 1 . 1m

’ f - 1 . an i aﬁ x61 aﬁm a? arm M

“ 2 . afi m avatar as afl ffl 0 113 afi m avast asa as aw? afa r?

2. a n d m a a k i a m 351 , si il r roots , m e the r we k forms fro the I I I Lesson XL . l8 3

- ‘ " m t . a n d m a m a simpler root for s ﬁ , 3 etc ; 3 1 kes its strong for s lso

u 3 o r 3 1 3 . from 3 ; th s , $3 3 etc

B. Roots in fi nalconsonants.

di al o l m v c a a bl f u a . 46l. I . W i th e we p e o g zz

‘

1 . : Act : . l. . 3 . du . t fl ag Sing fa fi gfl fafi q , fm ; fi f i

‘

. l. . M i d . : 2. F fga etc p fa fi q fl etc fa fi i g etc . So from i g

- a 1 : 1 . Fir . 3 . 2. re ; ﬁg etc from g p 33 3, « fi ; or m

‘

a . d . g gﬁ la etc

2 I I . i h i n i t i a l o u a 46 . W t v wel ca p a ble o f g n .

- : u 1 . . 1 . i 2 . a 3 . s d . 1 . d ( a Sing ( ts , ( i ms , ( a ; {f a r,

c l. . . . 1 2. 3 a 2. n , 3 r z . f“ , s 2 ag i sist { a y p i i , {HQ r

‘ ‘ ‘ ’ é . 3 . o a r u B ﬁ a etc The root g , lso follows this le, forming

4 ‘ rd l . . 4 8 5 3 . . 4 a {W etc . , p m W m kes (see § , ) W E ,

6 . 4 3 I I I . Wi th i n i ti a l i t.

a a 3 . a . B ut a w , e etc ; lg , m etc m (origin lly f r)

m a k a . 448 es m in etc ,

64 . V . i t 4 I W h m edi a lat.

-“ 1 1 . : Act . : . o r a 2 . a i s 3 . 1 am sing ren a , rmf r t, m m ; d u a . M i . a . d . mﬁ qa etc : wai t etc

u a ll u a o n e a Th s s ch roots beginning with more th n conson nt, o r a n a a a u u a m u o r with spir te , g tt r l te , g .

" 465 2 . R a v d a a . oots in gener l h a ing me i l 5 ! before single

a a a n d a a a ﬁn l conson nt , beginning lso with single conson nt which d a u a d u a . . n o t a n a a is rep e te nch nge in the red plic tion i e sp ir te,

a u u a a u a o n e a g tt r l , or g contr ct with the red plic tion into syll ble ,

” a s v a k a n d a d a with Q its owel , in the we forms ; this is llowe lso

- d . 2n a c t . u v a . u in sing when the nion owel is t ken Th s , Uﬂ .

. 12 n d 8 a . m? m , w 3?

Se vera l roots not h a ving the form here deﬁned a r e s a id to

u a a m s a ndergo the s me contr ction , o t of them option lly . I I I 1 8 4 Lesson XL .

‘ ’ ht w 3 3 in fi rst? fi a i i x fi ffl i a W . a 3K

C a a c a a o n e a 466 . 3 . ert in roots beginning with t ( lso with a y )

” o n e a d u a a a n d en ding in conson nt, re plic te with the syll ble 3 (the

u a n d a v a o n e root j st mentioned , with f ) , bbre i te the a (a ) of the

root to B in wea k forms . They a r e trea ted lik e roots with

initi a l 3 § 463) b u t reta in the fu l l root form in the strong

‘ ’ a r e 1 a n d . 3 ﬁ , 3 , p ersons These roots 1 , g HQ , 11, W dwell

“ “ u : . . 1 . o r 2. e a m W , a a rg; lso Th s , ﬂ Act sing

‘ ‘ - - - - d u . u u c i va . M id . . éf w o r B afﬁ n 3 . W 3 ; 3 51 3 ? ( ) etc Bi ﬁ etc

2 . o r o r 3 . f a : . . 1 . 2 31 W a lt Act sing { 1 { ( m , ( m ; i id . . M . s da . { F313 etc { } etc d 467 4. v a a v m a . Se er l roots which h e e i l 3 between single

a bu t a u o f 465 d o u t conson nts, c nnot follow the r le , rop the a t

a k . a r e a a a ua from the we forms These roots , in the cl ssic l l ng ge ,

? a n d a 3 3 d m , m , m , g “ lso 1 1 , which might be exp ecte to

465 . a k El W m follow § They form the we stems ﬁ g , m , e g ;

a n d . u o r . . 3 m a k Elﬁ Th s , a m HQ W etc , a f a etc es its \ g 3 1 strong stem m a n d El“ .

468 . 5 . 3 a n d o n e o r r e d u li The roots 1g , @1 , two others , p

” a v a n d a a n d to a n d c te from the semi owel , contr ct a a 1 B in

a k . u o r a k we forms Th s , strong gm W , we

‘ ‘ ‘ ’ 469 . 1 . a a i s u The root g, sp e k , fo nd only in this tense ,

n d n : " a i . 2 . 3 . d u . 2 . only the following forms sing W , m g ; 3"

l. . 9 3 . 3 a v va u 3 3m m m ; p . m These forms h e only the l e

‘ o f — 2 . l k w a k a ut the present . The root ﬁ g , no m es p erfect witho

du a bu t u a h a s - va u re plic tion , otherwise reg l r, which only p resent l e ;

‘ ’ se e 4l7 é ‘ m ” 2 u a . § . f lg , ﬁnd , for s the reg l r raga

- 47 0 . i a n d a s The roots fa , fa l, ﬁ n, fg , form p erfect stems

f e a n d . a t s, fa rm . fa ﬁ r, fa te

V I I I . I 1 8 6 Lesson XL XL .

u f m f. t o r o f . 3 , a nq a iqm ; 15 Th s , ro W p m m t from i n ,

o r e o f th e f t . I n a a a k 474. F c Per ec cl ssic l S ns rit the p erfect

a a s a s o f a a coinci des in me ning with the imp erfect , ten e n rr tion , b u t i s less often met with .

L e sso n XLIV.

- h a 5 . . F u tu r t m a n d o n di ti o al v s 47 Ver b s e Sys e ( C n ) . The erb tw o u u : I s- u u h fa r d f t res . The simp le , or f t re , whic is by the ol er, d a n u m a a n d I I . a m ch ore common , th n the other ; the p eriphr stic

u u f t re .

47 . d a 6 I . a a n v m Si mple F utu r e . This tense cont ins in ic ti e ode a n d a a a v a n d m . I t m a m a d a ll p rticip le , cti e iddle y be e from

- v . a a dd d erbs The tense sign is the syll ble Q , e to the root either d - o r b u v a a . irectly, y the nion owel (in the l tter c se becoming m )

The root h a s the gu ild - strengthening when p ossible ; a n d some roots

d “ with me i a l a; gu n a te with inste a d o f g ig . The inﬂection is precisely like tha t of the p resent indica ti ve o f a v erb of th e a - u a u ° f conj g tion ; th s , from ufa wﬁ r, a

477 . W n o t a k a l a a a u ff hen is t en , ﬁn r dic l conson nts s er the

“ s a m e ch a nges b efore Q : a s before a in the inﬂection o f the root

a o r d u a o r a a a . u cl ss re p lic ting n s l cl ss Th s , from gg, M ; i w . h a rf fl a , e ; fi t; “ a fi ffl ; H t g W w e “ ( fl fifi b t - - ’ fifa rfii ; f t l . e . d a k m , W i ; a g a ff l The root HQ well , m es

‘ 478 . 1 . ts v u Most roo ending in owels reject th s , {1

1 3 Erra ; m , m rra a 3 . . 2. Bu t a ll e s f . mi n ; 55 W e roots in

a k u a n d a 2 3; t e th s , ii . E LM “; , W ﬁ f ; lso the roots I f} i — g a n d l 3 . a k (a ﬁ mrfa) a mts am) a s m es m in. Lesson XLI V 1 8 7

479 . I n e a th e v a k n g ner l , erbs which t e in the inﬁniti ve a d

a u u a k a p erip hr stic f t re (see below) , t e it lso in this tense . B ut the a da fa r m a n d a u d a ccor nce is fro complete ; these p rts sho l be le rned , a a f u a a n v s a o v . m tter s ge , for y gi en erb

48 0 . o f a u a v a n d a v Stems c s ti e inﬂection , denomin ti es in ER] ,

“ m a k u u - m ﬁ lm ; h u ? e their f t re ste s in t s , ﬁ g , WW W

a r ti i e . a d id a r e a a c t . a n m . m P c p l The p rticip les , , m de fro

u u - m a s m - u the f t re ste precisely fro the p resent stem ; th s , 3 T, 31

o f' a n ; , a r m Cf' 260 ( w ), E g 3 m , ﬁ t m )

2 62 .

A di 2 o n di ti on al. a d i n e . 48 . C tense c lle the conditio n a l ( only) is m a de fr o m the stem of the simple fu t u re p recisely a s the i m

- a d m a n d a . p erfect is m e fro the p resent stem , simil rly inﬂected

u I t Th s , W Q R, m ; fl qrfi , fi fi fi is of extremely

u ra re occ rrence .

48 3 . I I . er i h a ti F utu r e . a w P p r s c This tense, which is llo ed to

“ a m a llv a a a v a v be m de fro erbs , cont ins single indic ti e tense, cti e ,

I t d b n o men ai en tis a v va u o f a u u e is forme y the g in 31, h ing the l e f t r

f a r e a d d th e a v a . . o cti e p rticip le, to the nom sing which (m) d e , in

lst a n d 2n d o f a ll u d ﬂ d p ersons n mbers , the corresp on ing in ecte

‘ ’ o f o f 1 . I n 3 r d n o m en forms the pres . 3 m be the p ersons the

a en ti a u d a u u a u a . g is se lone , in the prop er n mber , witho t the xili ry

h a c a se s a 484 . The root s in most the s me form before the

u w a k th e o f v . u s fﬁx g hich it t es before an the inﬁniti e Th s ,

” t 6 ; W , m m g ; “ﬂ i ; 35. 5 g

48 5 a s . The inﬂection is then follows

H d u a a d a ha s The in s lso prescribe mi dle form tion ; it , how

e v a c a . er , p r tic lly no existence V 1 8 8 Lesson XLI .

orist-S ste A y m.

6 . a u a 48 The orist comprises three q ite distinct form tions , e a ch with certa in s u b- va rieties ; bu t a ll a r e bo u nd together i nto o n e

a d o f m a n d com plex system by cert in corresp on ences for mea ning .

a a k a a r e a a v a va ue I n cl a ssic l S ns rit orists comp r ti ely r re . Their l

a . f. a s o f a a u r is q u ite th t of im pf or p tenses n rr tion . B t they a e

u n o t a so a s v o th u sed a lso (tho gh ne rly often the p rohibiti e p t. ) wi

a th e a u d the p rticle m , in p rohibitions , gment being then omitte ;

‘ f ‘ ’ u I : do v m : d o n o t a . W th s , “ Q T not gi e ﬁ ﬁ fe r ith this ex

a a h a s a u a c ep ti o n the a orist lw ys the gment in cl ssica l S a nsk rit .

‘ a a ua a n d a v m d The tense comprises , in the l ter l ng ge, only in ic ti e o e .

v a a r e : I . I R u The m a in a rieties of orist three Simp le Aorist ; I . ed

a p lica ted Aorist ; I I I . Sibil nt Aorist .

Ro or i 487 . I Si m le a o i t . 1 ot a t . a . p r s ( ) s This orist is p recisely

- l I t like a n imp erfect o f the root c a ss . is limited to the a cti ve voice

o f fe w a n d o f I E . . a roots in WT, i g lg ‘l‘ bi 1 W W ' ﬁ lm W 3 1313 3 13531 2 a g a r w as wa s m it t slam was

” ‘ k t : 0 3 Li e a W . m ; en . W W ; m ; " T 3 3 "

- f a - 48 8 . 2 Th e a a or i . k a n o a ( ) st This is li e imp erfect the cl ss ,

‘ a v a n d dd . u lst s cti e mi le Th s , from m , p ersons afe “ , Hfi fi fl m

I n a m ; Wﬁ ﬁ ) m g a W m fs gener l the root

r e a ti v a o r a v bu t so The p c e is strictly a p ecu li r a . opt ti e ; it is

a a m a u d a d r re th t its for tion se not be expl ine here .

I V XL V . 1 90 Lesson XL .

o o o o du . 1 . sé 2. 3 . l 1 . mﬁ rs ; ta rra fw m . a m ; p f awﬁs,

' ” ° 2. 3 . e o n l a o r i st o f a r e rm , f mﬁ This is the y which forms m a de in the secon da ry a n d denomin a ti v e conj u ga tions (b u t for

d d m a u a v a n a v . c s ti es eno in ti es in W . cf

- 493 . 6 Th e si a o i t a v d dd e ( ) s r s is cti e only, the corresp on ing mi l

- s . a u : . 1 . being of the form An ex m ple will s fﬁx here . 1 11 sing w

- . u k th e o f i a . m fg “ etc , q ite li e inﬂection the s orist

“ h - P 494. 7 T e sa a o r i t. : . . 1 . 2. ﬁ ( ) s m Act sing mfg“ , q,

d o - 3 . a n so n k a n . o f a u a . B u t i n , li e im p f the conj g tion the

. a a a b 1st . . a n d 2n d a n d mid the gr mm ri ns p rescri e the sing m ,

“ c 3r du . n d d a m a m .

495 . Aor i t a i ve. G a d o f a 4 s P ss ener lly the mi dle forms orists ,

5 o r 7 a r e u d a fo r a v . R do d , , se lso the p ssi e oots which not or in

r i l a a m a a k m k 4 or 5 a y t ke orists of these forms , y m e the li e esp e

o r a c i a lly f the p ssi ve .

B ut a r d 496 . 3 . . o f u a a h a s pers sing , p ec li r form tion , become

a a recogni zed p rt o f the p a ssive conj u ga tion . I t is formed by a dd

a k a a u m a n d u u a ing to the root, which t es lso the g ent, is s lly d a b u za v ddhi . strengthene , in some c ses y g z , in others by r After

’ d u a a d . a n 1 fi r. sta t a m o re , a re n fin l is ed 1 Th s , r s ; s, ; 35 t ; ‘ e i a b u t a . a r. w nts ; ea . larm g t . wzfi i ; at, watts

L L e sso n X V.

r n ati n Derivative or Seconda y Co jug o s.

da u a a r e a 497 . Secon ry conj g tions those in which whole

o f e o r a d a d va v system forms , mor less com plete, is m e from eri ti e

u a - h b u u a conj g tion stem , this w ole system eing s lly connected with a certa in deﬁnite modiﬁca tion of the origin a l ra dica l sense . These i u a a r e : I . a I I . I n v I I I . a ve . conj g t ons P ssi ve . tensi e . Desider ti

I . Ca u a V v . V. a v s ti e Denomin ti e . Lesson XL V . 1 9 I

- m o f h a 98 . a i e . a v s n 4 . I P ss v The present syste the p ssi e bee

r d u d u a 3 . . a s a o r a described ; a s a lso the pec li r p ers sing se . p ss ,

‘ ‘ a a o r a n d f u t. a . a the p a st p ss . p rticip le in a a , the p ss p rticip les

n a ll a o f v m a r e o r ger u ndi ves . I other p rts the erb iddle forms

u d a a v m a . se , if necess ry , with p ssi e e ning

I I . I n t n i ve . v n u a 499 . e s The intensi e co j g tion signiﬁes the intensiﬁca tion o r the rep etition o f the a ction exp ressed by th e

f - p rim a ry conj u ga tion o a root . F orm s ou tside the p resent system a r e a d d v a too r re to nee notice here ; in eed , e en within th t system

a r e b n o a a a ua I v they y me ns common in the l ter l ng ge . ntensi es fa ll into two cl a sses .

o f i 5 00 v a a c t . n . 1 . The erbs the ﬁrst cl ss (only ) form their

v - m u a a n d d u a a tensi e ste by red plic tion , the re p lic ting syll ble is

“ d i e d u i d . a . Ra a a n d a r e a d strengthene ic l n a re plic te with s“, t n d a n d 3 a 3 ? W ; u ﬁ a }, . i with Q , with } th s , W , w , “h i

6 . m d u a a h a s a a l a a k So etimes the re p lic ting syll ble ﬁn conson nt , t en

m o f u a r . 0 . m fro the end the root ; th s , ﬁ x, ia So etimes the

d u a d a a n i - v d a re p lic tion is issyll bic , owel being inserte fter the

a l a o f d u a a u ' ﬁn conson nt the re p lic ting syll ble ; th s , W The m odel o f inﬂection is the p resent - system o f the red u plica ting J a b u t v a a r e n o t a a u a a n i s cl ss, de i tions r re ; in p rtic l r, { sometimes

n inserted between stem a d ending .

- 5 0l. F m v d m a 2 . ro the intensi e stem a s j u st describe y be formed a a d a a a v - b u nother , form lly i entic l with p ssi e stem y the s fﬁx 3 7°

I t a m d o b u t h a s n o a v va u u d t kes id le inﬂecti n , p ssi e l e , being se

‘ ‘ a s v u . u 3 ﬂ . p recisely is the intensi e j st mentioned Th s , 5 1 , émﬁ

5 02 . A fe w v a v va u a s u m intensi es h ing lost their l e s ch , co e to u d a s a n d a r e a b a v a m a a be se p resents , tre ted y the n ti e gr m ri ns

‘ ’ a s . u 31 1 a v o f 1 a simp le roots Th s 3 , re lly intensi e ! w ke , is

d o - : i a t a . m rﬁ i . d a . a . ssigne the root cl ss p res etc , w etc ;

. 1 . 1 2 . a 3 . d a . e tc imp f m m , w n ts , m ; w ga So L 1 92 Lesson X V.

“ ‘ ’ a . o f r u n u a s a lso ( fr at , intens a , sed p resent with the sense

‘ ’ ‘ ’ a a n d u se v be p oor . ﬁ ri l w sh , some others , the intensi e

- m a w a a n d a r e a ssi n e d r e p resent syste in the s me y , g to the

u a a u 3 r d . 3 r d l. . d p lic ting cl ss ; th s , sing fifi ffi , p W E

u d - a r e v a I ntensi ve forms o tsi e the p resent system ery r re .

I I I . D i d e a ti ve . u a d a d 5 03 . es r By this conj g tion is denote esire

a o r d d d b u for the ction con ition enote y the simple root ; th s ,

r ‘ ’ ‘ ’ I d k de si d t I d . fi rmfi r rin , . fi nm fi wish to rink

d - 5 04. T o d a v i s u a form the esi er ti e stem the root red plic ted,

a n d . a dd a o f du a s a , sometimes “ C The conson nt the re plic tion

is determined by the u s u a l r u les ; the v owel o f redu plica tion is

‘ h a s a n a -v a n i - v o r a n d if the root owel , owel , a , 3 if the root

h a s a n u v u t ufi f v ar owel Th s , a , fi m ; a, fi fi afi ; W e ; e: - at afl éfi ; fi fi fi re fi ; fi s fi fe na , fi g t

u b o f m a n a v a a 5 05 . A n m er roots for bbre i ted desider ti ve

u . stem ; th s , m , W E ; Q T, fgmﬁ

5 06 u a i n - k a o . The conj g tion the p resent system is li e th t f

a - u d o f a d d a v a r e u i n other stems . O tsi e th t esi er ti e forms q ite

u a . o freq ent . The p erfect is the p eriphr stic The a orist is f the

‘ ‘ - - f. t u . u u a r e a d ; form ; h s , m , m ; Elf aﬁ fﬁ g The f t res m e

a u a v u with the xili ry owel th s , W ﬁ , i ﬁq g . The

verb a l n o u ns a r e m a de with in a ll forms where th a t vowel is

‘ v a k . A a v m a m a u t i t d d e er t en p ssi e y be de ; th s, ﬁ qﬁ is esire

’ ‘ a d a t to be obt ine ; p rt ﬁf qa .

- 5 07 . I V . a u a ti ve l. o f C s . The present system the ca u sa ti ve

h a s n a d o f a a d . 2 . a bee tre te lre y The p erfect is the p erip hr stic,

the deri va ti ve no u n in WT being forme d from the ca u sa ti ve - stem ;

u . 3 . a u a d m a d th s , W a m The orist is the red plic te , e in

a d m a n d a u gener l irectly fro the root, form lly nconnected with the

a u a v - u t ; E ’ a . I n a fe w a c s ti e stem th s , 3, WW m n ins nces, where the root h a s a ssu med a p ecu li a r form before the ca u s a ti ve

e u a a r m a d m m sign , the r d plic ted o ist is e fro this for , not from the

I a - E G a 1 94 . S nskrit nglish loss ry .

Glossar to the Exer i y c ses.

F o r a a the lph betic order o f S a nskrit words se e p .

r -E lish l. Sansk it ng .

- - d v a d u a d . A jecti es in form their feminine in , nless otherwise st te

a ksa d . m . di e d a dba s a d v. w , , ice . , belo , own

a ksa n k . . a si z275 n . e e . a dlza std t a dv . ( ) , y , below ; p rep , w

’ a m m . . d a . a s n . r . u y , ﬁre ; p , Agni , the gen , n erne th

' n 0 d . a dln a dv . v a b v o . g Of ﬁre , , o er , o e,

' ’ a m ho tr zn m a d d a u . . a k d e hika a . a d g , in of p ri st . , ition l ; s p erior

- a r a n . i f a dhi i . t e n d a dlzi ta a . o g , front ; p , . p rt

’ a h a n . b b d a dhu n a a d v. . y , lim ; o y. , now

‘ a ﬁ zr a s 25 3 m . a a a dhva r u m . g ( ) , cert in mythic l y , p riest who recites

a a a u da . ch r cters . the Y j r ve

’ ﬁ a h / b a a m . 429 a u Vo c . a n j , gest re ( 1 ) re the ;

m m a . a a s n . a . m a v . , sm ll ; , tom p bre the ; li e

a ta s d a v . a v. . a n b . a , hence , efore cons , neg ti e p reﬁx

’ a tz a d v . a a c ds a n a u h 278 m . o x . , cross , p st ; in p , d ( ) , i m m e di a tel t o a n a n ta r a m a d v. a fte r excess . , , y

w . a bl. a ti thi m . u a a d a s . , g est . fterw r ; p rep , ,

a tr a a dv a . . , here , hither . right fter

b u . a t a a dv. u a n a r tba m . , then ; there p on . , misfort ne

a h r d d a . a u . t a va ve a m . u V da . a n a va a , the fo rth e y , f ltless

a da s a hi la d a ka n . n . r . a . sd u : 287 . a a n a ( ) p ron , th t one ; p t , p , city

- - d . so a n d so . a n u a dv. a a a , fter, long, tow r

- d a r ble a s n . fa vo r . a a d v. to d a a n u kﬂ la a . fa vo a y , y . , ; ,

- a d a n d . ta a a o f to da a n u ﬁ d f . y j , y . j , p ermission

’ dr b a oba m . a u a n u r zt a a . u a . , f ithf lness . p , s it le

dh a v . a r m a m . u wxo n a meka a a , inj stice, g . , se er l - a E G a . I . S nskrit nglish loss ry

a n ta n u u . a va a a . a . r . , ntr th py , necess ry

a hd f d a a n ta e n d lo c . a t a . a v st . . m ; in , l st , con ition , st te

n ta m a s n . 0 126275 0 272 a . d a . a a . , inner ; , interior, ( ) , ownw rd

dd va f o c /la a n u té a u i a mi le ; inter l , di ference ; j c ( p ) cq re , obt in ;

- a u u Of . 376 4. sa m u a d . . , p i em c sion , j nct re

a n dh a a 2a a n éti e a t a u . d cd a . , blind . V ; ( g ) ; c s ( y

. i a k e a t v e a t . n /e a n . r a t a d r m . . , p , p eople ) m e , gi e to

n a d d . a i ti 3 32 n u m . . a n n . , foo , fo der p ( ) , eighty

a n a 23 I . a d . a r u n . a . y ( ) pron j . , other p , te r

a n a tr a a d v . . a va m . . y , elsewhere p , horse

’ a n va ﬁ c 272 a . . a m n m . d u . 72. r . A vi n s ( ) , following c , p , the c

n a a d da . I d a A xoﬁ oz . u u m . LB g , escen nt , progeny (the n i n ; p )

27 l d a 2 n a 7 . . a . 33 u m . . p ( ) f p , w ter at ( ) , eight

a a r a 23 3 n . a d . d a da a 3 32 n u m . . p ( ) p ro j , hin er ; sm p ( ) , eighteen

. a d vi ﬁ a ti n u m . twe n t other st c , y

’ a z I90 a dv . u u a s . p ( ) , nto ; f rther ; eight

’

. a v . la s a sti : 426 . conj , lso, e en V ( ) be , exist

' ' a sa r a s f . a v . Q a s a s a tz u p , he enly nymph V ( y ) throw , h rl ; a bha a n o f a a a bhi a u d a y . , feeling s fety ; s fe rep e t , st y , le rn ;

’ r a w ty . m entr u st ; p thro /' a b n a d v. u a d o r . , to , nto . forw r into

’ ‘

bhv . a r ci a . d m a v . a si m . p y , pl n , design ; iew , swor a bb d sa r d m u d a . a su a m . y . , st y , recit tion , emon .

a m ta a . a a s n . a . a sd u a a s a da s. r , immort l ; , nect r s me m ‘ a ber 273 f a ka n u sthi 275 n . m si : . ( ) . , other . ( ) , bone a a m a a s i da m a sm u d a a s va m a s m y s me . s me ya ; ste i a r m . c ds . 3 5 2 4 , enemy . in p , cf , .

a i ms a r t/m . n ba r : m u m a a ba a n . da . , p rp ose ; e ning ; ( , , y I a . a ha m 223 . we lth ( ) p ron , . / ’ a r tha a de n a r tha a te a k a hi ta a . d a a 1 y ( y ) s , is gree ble .

fo r r a a ho . o h la h l (w . two + p idem . excl , a r a ma n 2 d 8 4 . n bo r d tr a n . a a m r . a a n d a t . y ( ) , . p , y nigh

' V a r h (a r h a ti) deser ve ; h a ve a

w . . . a d |30 a dv. u a s right to ; inf be ble . ( ) , hither , nto ; prep ,

la m d v a a . u v . l. u . . . a b , eno gh ; ery ; w instr , w , hither from ; ntil

' u o f a a k w . da t. d ci r a m . u . eno gh , w y with ; , , form , ﬁg re

u a b fo r . d kd a a i r sk . s it le c m , y

“ - a li m . be e . d k a a (i k , rst p rt . of m.

a va a d v . o ff. d kr d n ta a o f , down , p rt . 13“ - a E G a . 1 96 I . S nskrit nglish loss ry

i ta r a 23 I . a d . . d a m a n a n . a va . g , rri l ( ) p ron j , other “ k a n d v a i ta s a dv. . d cd r a m . a , w l con ers , hence ” d v. u so . du b va . i ti a tion ; con ct ; o ser nce , th s ,

w so . i tth a m a dv. a d c d r a m . a . y , te cher , in this y, — d {da m 28 5 28 6 . d ﬁ d f . a . j , comm n ( ) p ron , this , this

a tm a n m . u . , so l , self ; often simple here ' i dh i a db i n ddlze : 444 k d reﬂexi ve p rono u n . ( ) in le,

d . di m . i n c s . d , beginning ; p , cf light i n d u m . 375 1 . , moon . ,

' ’ dr r I d a . czdzt a m . su n . i n a m . n . . y , , p , the god n r

de a a d . i n dr a r a stha n . n . r . D . d m . c , comm n , p rescri p tion p , p , elhi dd d a u a i n dr d zi f . n . r . a . V p cq ire , re ch ; z , p , go ess

’ — - a va m o r a m t m d z a n t 2 63 a . so a u . + , p , p , i em ; y ( ) , gre t ; so m ch

{ a m . o f oda m . 8 a m idem ; ﬁnish . y fem

i dv t o s . a s k . d a d f . a a . va a . o s p , c l mity , p p , ; li e

' '

f d u . lz i c chdti : 09 d . a ta a . o | p p rt p , tr stworthy ; ﬁt V s ( ) wish , esire

- d d u m a n t 263 a . v . { n m . a . y s ( ) , long li e a , rrow

o vi d i lza a d v. d vi s a a . f . t , p rt 9 + entered , here , hither

b . ( y) , i . e ﬁlled (with)

/ti i u h 0 e . c k a t d a d a f . e se e c , p 1 s ( s ) , behol ; + p

’ d u a . . r a tz . g , swift neglect ; +p exp ect

a i d d r a m a m . . . a u c , hermit ge rc, f . , s ch . f a s dste : 424 si t a u . a i a e : 422 u o w n e n V ( ) ; c s ( Vc ( t ) r le , (g ) .

’ ’ u a i t b i saz a tz a s va r a m . a d m a n y ) pl ce ; p y ; p , m ster ; lor ; rich .

v w a it u p on ; re erence .

’ ' - (wa n d. n . a a . u cchr zta a o f u d r z . , se t, ch ir p rt . c , high

b r a a n . . u d a o r d a z d v. u u o u t . z , bringing , p , p forth ‘ d d hci r a m . . u da ii c 272 a . a . , foo ( ) , northw rd

h i f a ff u da dh u t . . i m . a . d , obl tion , o ering , oce n

u da a m y . , rise .

‘ / hi da r a i étz a d u n . . 1 ( go , belly

i v a d u d a ta - m d . a a . o f u d a m a , go o er , re p e t , re ; y p rt y , re dy.

' dh a ti d a u . a d a a u d n a n . a . c s ( y p y ) te ch ; y , g rden

n fo llo w a a o a a u d o a a u m . d . + ; p g w y ; y g , iligence

’ bhi s d z a a a a ta m u o n a . + pp ro ch ; y g , diligent , energetic .

’ li t l o su n u a a dv. a d . ( y g home) set (of the , p , to, tow r

d a n u u a u a a a n a n . a . rise ; p p p y , initi tion

’

r a di e . u a m a d V a f . a d . p ro ch ; + p go forth ; p s , cert in e ic works i c b u o a f . . a bh a m o . m . , wish p g , enjoy ent

- I a E a . 1 98 . S nskrit nglish Gloss ry

10 d a t . kam a m . d v a s n . r . . . 0 , esire , lo e ; p , gen , , or

o d o v r ada s a k k o r v b the g f lo e . + p m e nown isi le ;

kd ma du ha a . a m m 395 a a d . g , gr nting wishes ; ( ) p rep re , orn /k a s . u . se . dben u fa b 2 w a f s bst , , the 1 r stre , sc tter ;

- u lo u s W d c o w . vi d . on er , i em

k u h /Ic ‘ t IIO c ut c u t o ff ama d a . m , ide . j g ) , ;

d . d kd a m . a va . y , bo y i em

kar a za n . a a u k ti f . k a . z , re son , c se . r , wor (liter ry)

’ - in a a u a k k tr z a d d ka r . . m a . a . , c sing, m ing r , opte

b u k t n . kd r a n . . s a a . y , siness , concern r , whole, entire

la . . kd m k a za a . a d . , time rp z , p oor ; nigg r ly

. n k k li dasa . r . d f a . a m a . . u , p , p oet fp , gr cio sness, pity

kcw a n . . k d a a d a w y , p oem V m r w ; r

’

kd i f . 72. r . a a . o n o r u k atz u . c , p , city, Ben res p ; ( ra ) p lo gh

' kd za n a d k i a u u . sﬂ . , f got ; woo . gs f , gric lt re

' kd s ha ma a a . a d o f d . k i va la m . u a d a a a t . t y , m e woo gs , h sb n m n , p e s n

i m f Ira k t n r k u . o u a . a k a s m . . . t v . r a ne t ; w . , howe er gsz , bl c ; , p , the

ki a n t 2 63 n . a d . h o w o d a . y ( ) p ro j , g Krs n grea t ? V klp (lcailp a te) be in order ; tend ki k l r ti f . o r du a u . a , glory . con ce to c s (

' - ku ta s a d v . ?wh ? a a ti te da a . , whence y p y , ) or in , pp oint k d k tu u tm a v ? e m . a . ? . , where whither , b nner k t k u n a m . a e a m . a , sp e r . c , h ir .

’

ku kd a z k i lasa n . t a . a m . . r . a u a V p ( p y ) be ngry (gen , p , mo nt in

o r ko i f . a k ti . g , p e ; p oint, p

‘ k m r k u ci a m . b o . o a m . a . , y, p rince p , nger l ku a . k a a a b v a ed . o a m . a u a u . c , le ; cle er ; le rn s , tre s re ; tre s ry

- ka r a té: 3 94 5 a k kd un te a m . n r . V ) m e , y , . p

' d o / u ka usa l d f n a d n t a t . . r . , p erform ; p y , p

’ a d a u v kr a m kr a m a te : l34 the he , m ke r ler o er V )

a a do v a a ti a b d p e il to , h rm (gen . , step ; p ss eyon ;

lo - l c . a c e . a a d a a a , ) p p y ; tr nsgress ; p ss (of time) ;

' a la m a a d a c t s d d u a a k p rep re , orn ; stri e p to , tt c ;

’

a vi ka r o tz a k k 71129 o u t . ( s ) m e nown , ex go / b u a d o d to be kr i kr i n i té b u . bi it ; p goo , 1 ) y ﬁ ’ n e t . ti r a s ti kr i ci f . a . (gen , ( d , g me, S p ort

’

r a sk. d a s r u db kmi db a tz be a ) hi e ; bl a me ; p a r k ( y ) ngry (gen .

’ u t a t a d r a tz a o r p the he ; + p p y ,

u a c c . kr o dlza m . a . recomp ense , p nish ( rei , , nger a - E a I . S nskrit nglish Gloss ry . 1 99

? ? ci t sa m m id . kva a dv . , where whither ( ) come together ,

m v so etimes , e er . meet

ksa za . a r i a s . v a n . m . z m . , oment ; time g y com p , ery honor ble ’ / i ’ n f 2 a e a tz . ksa tr z a m . a m a o y , w rrior , the 1 9 (g y ) sing

d - i a n lza a . . d a . d r v a secon c ste g , f , , in the m nner

o f G a d a va . k a a m . d a d u . s y , ec y , estr ction n h r s

/k a n k a u té u h ci ha te u a 1 s s a ) h rt . n (g ) p l nge ; va

d v r u d u d . o u a wo n i e pl nge n er ( c e ) . ’

k a l k d ld a ti a i r f . v . y s ( s y ) w sh ; g , oice , song

’

d zr i m . u a i em g , mo nt in .

k d i r a a . u a K sa tr i a s . i ta n . . a , s it ble for y g , song ; singing / ’ We t k i n o ti d u za m . u a 1 s ( s ) estroy . g z , q lity , excellence .

’ ’

m . k ztz a . k u r u . a m . s p , ing g , te cher i /lo t ? u w uh t ha ti : I0! d a 1 s} h rl , thro . Vg (g ) hi e , conce l ;

i /zd i k za a . 2k i d u d de c a u . a a t d . s z p rt of s , re ce , s (g y ) i em

‘

c a e d u d u kct f a v . y , r ine . g . , c e

i k i m u ks r a . . n n . . , mil gr , ho se

k u d r a a . a ha stba m . u a d s , little , sm ll . gr , ho seholder, he of k u dh f . u a s , h nger . f mily .

k etr a n d . b a a . d s . , ﬁel gr y , omestic . 2 o 0 m f . u g ( 9) . , , b ll , steer, cow ; / ' f kba n kha n a ti di a s . ﬁ . e j ( ) g . , g , S p ech .

- d . kka r a m . a ss. o tva n . o x a u u , g , n t re , st p i ity

a a m d e d g p . , cowher , sh p her ;

’

a ﬁ cz f . n . r a . u a d a . g g , p . , the G nges g r i n / d ' ' a a m a . o d a e n . o a a tz h e g j . , eleph nt 1 g p g/ ( g P y ) kee p

' ‘

a za a d n a tz u u a d . e . : a za m Vg z y ( g z y ) n ber, er ; g r

u a d . d u r a va n . co nt ; a v esp ise g , weight ; dignity .

' f r a n t/z a tz . a u . g , g it ; co rse j/g string to

a n /za m d t d . r u g , o o , p erf me . ge her ; com pose .

a n dha r va m . a Ga d a va o n e r a n tha m . a . g , n h r , g , liter ry work , book

' o f a ba d o f a r a b /I ci ti r b i té v n celesti l singers . g (gr n , g n ) recei e , / ' a m dccba ti : l00 a n u z m d a lg (g ) go ; + sei e ; hol , restr in , k a bhi v a d r a li a k . follow ; isit , tten ; chec ; p t e

a va d a st m r a m a m . v u a d a a . n erst n ; g , ill ge

o d se t . i o sta m r a sa m . m u u . g own , (cf ) ; g , bite, o thf l d come ; u d rise ;

‘

m s m ha a m . o t v . come forth ; proceed fro ; g t , p , essel - a E a . 200 I . S nskrit nglish Gloss ry

’ ’ i - m s d u d ha . m s v hasa m . d or deci e , concl e ; g , fod er , y r a a vi d d u hee. + ; h ta n . a g ther ; i em g r , cl riﬁe b tter ; g p

’ 2 l sa m . Vghr d (j zghr a ti : IO ) smel . + collect

e u d . a n . ci tt , notic ; tho ght ; min

’ d a r e - u e ci n t ci n ta a ti d . ca . . a n ; g consi er encl conj , , lso, , g V ( )

efr a m a d v . a . sometimes if. , long, long time d a ti cu d m a u . r a co d . g ) , ca kr a n . p in c s (p , wheel V

a see d . oa ks (c ste : , behol ; imp el ’

a a cu r co r d a tz a . a rel a te ; c ll , n me ; V ( g ) ste l

- k . - cﬁ a f . to a vi d ex p l a in . d , p not , sc lp

ced a d v. o st o s. . ca k us n . e e . , p p , if s , y

- ce te a v . r 32 n u m . u . , c a tu (3 ) , fo r V st ) stir be li e

c d u lu k a m . n . r . a . c a tu r tba . 4 a . u . , p , p eople , f , , fo rth g e a c dva te a + vi ca tur da a 3 32 n u m . u . totter, f ll g ( ) , fo rteen V g ( g )

a a a . a tu a d 28 2 a . u a d u . c sp ( ) , q r p ed f ll w y

’

a tvd r i rz a t 3 32 n u m . . c c ( ) , forty

cha ttr a n . u a . ca n dr a m . . , mbrell , moon

h a . c a d f . d ca n dr a m a s m . . g , sh e , moon ’ ’ hi d ckzn dd/zé c u t c u t c a m u d d a c dm a ti c , y , se only with ( ) V )

u t o ff ; + a va d ; + d a k sip ; rinse the mo h . i em t e a a v + u d c a m a tkd r a m . a . w , remo e ; exter , stonishment y / ' a c a r c a r a ti a d a z min te . 1 ( ) go , w n er ; gr e

a tr . (of c ttle) ; , p erform , commit ;

d o it a a t n . a w v p erform , comp lete , ; j g , th t hich mo es ; men

su m - ii d u d a u i em ; c s a n d be a sts ; the worl d .

u sa . a n a la te I5 S a n a a ti a . prono nce , y Vj (j i/ ; j g ) tr ns

c a r a a . v . a n ai a ti a n d a v b , mo ing, going (j g cti e forms) , eget ,

’ i n . n c d ca r a za m . . du a . a te a z , , foot, leg pro ce ; intr ns (j g

a r i ta n . a v . dd b c , beh ior , life mi le forms) be orn (mother in k d ca r m a n n . d a . a u u , hi e , s in ; le ther rise, sp ring p ;

c a r m a m a a a . a . u d a te b e a g , le thern ( jj y ) born , rise

a l r a v m sa m d V c stir ; p mo e p or i em .

a - i n o n a r vi tr . v a n a m . m a n l. a n d . , m rch ; + p , , mo e , j , ; p , coll k stir . sing . , p eople , fol s .

cd tu r m d s a n . a a a . a n a ka m . a . g , cert in s criﬁce j , f ther

d m i ka r a n . d a n i f . . c . a n , gol j , mother

c d r a m . s . a n m a n n . . , py j , birth existence

c d r u a . a u u a a m . v . , be tif l . j g , ictory

ci ci n u té a a r a s 28 0 f . o ld a e . V ) g ther ; j ( ) , g

- a k E a . 20 2 I . S ns rit nglish G loss ry

/tu tds a ti a k a u da a 332 n u m . te n j s( g ) rejoice, t e ple s re c ( ) , .

da a r a tha m . n . r . in (w . p , p

“ s . o f da ri V tr cross o ver ; a va d a ga p a rt c . ’ b descend ; u d emerge ; p m V da h (da ha fi ) u rn . ' da ti da tté : 43 6 d v . lda da v a u . in c s ecei e V ( , ) gi e ; in ' - i t ti a . a a . d . c a n s . da a a t a k v o r r g , f , thir ( p g ) m e gi e

i a a k 3 I2 r a Vtrp (tfp ga t ) s a tisfy oneself. p a y ; t e ( ) ; + p

d v a t s za f . . u a . r z , thirst , esire entr st ; gi e in m rri ge

’ ' te a svzn a . u a u . 2da d a ti : I32 c u t . j , co r geo s V ( g ) ' d t a t a a ti a v a a d dat m . v a s a . Vg j ( g j ) le e , b n on ; r , gi er ; j gen

' ' ﬂ v ~ r a r z a v o u . e o u s . + p le e , gi e p

d a a 3 32 n u m . dan a tr a o . n e . g c ( ) , thirteen . , gift, p res nt ; generosity

tr i 3 32 n u m . . da n a va m . d ( ) , three , emon .

2 u tr i vi a t 33 n m . . dasa m . a v . g ( ) , thirty , sl e , groom

- i d i t l . k f . da f v v ri oka n s . a a a . , , the threefol , fem le Sl e , Ser nt

d . di v a n d a . worl . , y

d i v k tri v t a . . d 277 . a s . r , triple , threefol ( ) f (r rely y

- lr i i r a n a . a d . di va sa m . da g s , three he ed , y. f tr i u bh f . n a o a . di v a a . a v d v st , me metre g , he enly, i ine .

' i m - di di dti tr a tz n u . . w o u t g g , eighty three V p ( g ) Sho , p oint ;

tva o f . 2d . 226 a a d u a a stem pron of p ers ( ; comm n ; p te ch ,

. 3 5 2 u cf , instr ct .

- l d i tva d so a l . tva . d f . a d a c e stem of p ron p , p oint , c r in l p oint ;

tva m . n . r . a o d Tva sta r u a d szr , p , g , . q rter , region ; irection .

' di /z de ahi 428 ma V ( g ) S e r .

ri da a ti i ba a dv a da . d r a . m a . a . V c ( g ) bite g , long ; , f r

h s - a ri r a . di r a u v d d f a . . st , tooth . g g , long li e

da k a m n r di v di v a ti a . s . , . p . V ( g ) p l y

' k z - u u di da za a . a u . d . s s z , right h nd ; so thern V intr , b rn , feel

d a a m . k u d t r d ad , stic ; p nishment . tresse ; . , istress

' ’

da a a n da a a tz u n du kha n u . de . : z V nd g ( zd g ) p k . , misery ; misfort ne

d . . du h a n . k ish g , mil

b da dhi . r n u . d a d a n : 275 n u d . d u a a m . a ( ) , c r s j , sc m p , rog e ’ - da db a ﬁ c a k dhi n r r a a a u . d a . o m . . . f g (we est ) , p g , misfort ne

a dam a ti I3 ! r la bha n d a d m a u . du a . a ﬁ V ( g ) control ; c s , h rd to or re ch ;

da m d a ti a diﬁ c u lt ( g ) t me ; com p el . .

dd a ti ld da a f . a u d de ﬁ e . g , com p ssion , p ity. V s ( sg ) be

da r i dr a a r a u k a b a d a . . . du t a . a , p oor sp y , ly rr nged d r a a n a n a d u a n ta m . n . r . c . , p hilosophic l system . ss , p - I . a k E a S ns rit nglish Gloss ry.

d d a . ha n . dus . ba us a bo w; insep preﬁx , ; h rd , '

du h dd dbi du alle : 428 k dba r m a m . la w v u V ( g , g ) mil , right ; ; irt e .

du hi t f . da u . 1dha dddlzati dba tté : 435 ut r , ghter V ( , ) p ,

data m . m v . a a i v , essenger, en oy pl ce ; p close, co er,

' i i a d i . dar a a t v u a n a u u t m id . V r c s ( g ) te r keep Sh t ; p on ; ,

v a m - op en . recei e ; s a la y o r p l a ce ' u da r a a ti V df g (I27) se e ; ca s . ( p g ) on ; vi la y down ; ' dr a te a - a . r z i n a u . dba d a ti a Show ; p ss ( cg ) seem , p c s p g ) , m ke

k . u t o n tw o loo p , clothe in (

d f . k a u e e . vi a a da rc , loo , gl ce ; y rr nge, or in ;

' - deva m . . i sa m u t u la o n . , god ; f , goddess ; p together , nite ; y

u 2dba dhd a ti : l26 u k q een . V ( g ) s c .

d va ki f n r . dha t m . e . a , . p r , cre tor .

b n a deva ku la n . . d a n . a . , temp le y , gr in

deva ta f . d v d . dlza r mika a . u , i inity, eity , right, j st . db de a m . a . av dva ti r u n g , region , l nd t ( ) ; a n u

- i d v . r u n da i va . a , f , i ine fter .

dba va n a do a m . a u . n . u u . s , f lt , r nning ; co rse dhi‘ d u ti f . a . f . u d a d . g , brilli ncy , n erst n ing , insight b dbi dr a v a n . . m a n t . u d a . y , p roperty ; o ject , wise , p r ent

V dhi r dr a r a u a . d m . a a a a v . st , seer ; thor (of edic , ste f st, ﬁrm , br e

' din? dlmn oti dhu n u te : 39I hymns , V ( , ) ,

dru dr a va ti r u n . a V ( ) sh ke . f ' dr u h dr zib a ti diz a u dhar a a ti a . V ( g ) be hostile , o fend V r in c s . ( y ) be r

dva 332 n u m . db ti u a f . ( ) . , two r , ﬁrmness ; co r ge . / t k . d wn u dva stha m . d f . c o w . l , oor eep er ,

diz ir dva r d a . a a n . a d a . f . , oor, g te g , ste f stness

' av a dh a dh a ti k m . a a . if , Ary n . V g ( g g ) thin , p onder dvi ati m . a . j , Ary n

i i a n a dv . O t . . 207 . dv t 3 35 a . a w g ( ) , second . , not ; ith p , cf

n ksa . dvi d d a tr a n . u a a a 2 8 2 a . p ( ) , bi pe . , l n r m nsion

’ ' - dvi dve i avi é a t n a a r a n . i f . . V s ( st , st ) h e ; g , , city

r a a n a di f . v . p h te extremely . , ri er

’ d i n a n d n a n da ti - te bbi v m . a r e s , enemy . V ( , ) d i v s a d v. r u , twice . joice in , g eet joyf ll y d i i i ta m v n m . a . bo w p , p nther . V intr , , bend ;

t r . v , honor , re erence

h m a d a n a n . n a s n . . , money , riches . , honor , glory

dlza n i n a a m m m . m a n vi r a n d homo . ., we lthy . , ( ) - a k E G a . 204: I . S ns rit nglish loss ry

f f o l i ti f . u o n a r a ka m . . n , hell , cond ct li e ; ethics , p

I d . . f n . r a r v a n a r m a da . . , p , i er in n i ities

i r a n a la m . n . r . n u a . . , p j , he lthy, well

i la ka ba m n . r n a va a . n e w . n . . , m , p ‘ i n a va 3 32 n u . n r t t a t a . ( ) m nine . V (m g ) d nce da da i 3 3 2 n u . n tta n . . n a va t m . ( ) , ninety r , nce , ncing

n a va da a 3 32 n u m . . u a m . . c ( ) , nineteen rp , king k i v a ti m . . n a v n a a . n e , w . rp , ing

a a n a a ti n et m . a d . V g ( cg ) p erish ; r , le er

- n e r . d d a . t a n a a e c . p erish ; is pp e r , le ing rop e , cord ; y

n a k n dh a ti b d sa m mi n f . . V ( g ) in ; , shi p

d u n a ﬁ c 272 a . lo gir , eq ip oneself. g ( ) , w .

’ n a a m . a k n a a m . . g , sn e . g g/ , logic

n a a ka n d a a a a a a . . a . t , r m , pl y g gg , right , p rop er .

n a ma n n . n a mama a d v. , me ; , by

a a k a m . d t . a . n me p s , wing, Si e ; p r y n r i a k ia d a f a m . . . , wom n , wife . p s , bir

a /ca . d li f . du a ir n m u d b o . , p ip e, con it. p , , g

’ v a a m . d u a c a c a ti k . c , estr ction . Vp (p ) coo

’ a ri c 3 2 u m a dv. a 3 n m . ﬁ ve , down ; in , into . p ( ) , .

‘ - i c i t a . a r a da a 2 n v a a d a m a 3 3 u m . . y , const nt ; a ily ; s p g ( ) , ﬁfteen

d a ii ca a ii ca a 4 - a v. a a da 33 a . fi ft fi fth . , lw ys , ily . p p p ( ) , y i ' mi de a m . a d a r c a a t 3 32 n u m . . g , comm n . p c ( ) , fifty

mi n d n i n da ti a a d a ti t V ( ) bl a me . Vp t (p g g ) sp li Op en .

n i u za a . d k a n a . k d . p z , shrew , S illed . p i , s ille

’ - n i a ta a . i i i a m da a h a ka ti a d g , p rt of y , or in Vp t (p t ) recite , re .

d a i n i l . e d a . . . r . a , ﬁxe , p erm nent p r m p , p , cert in demons .

i r da a a i ta n a . . m . a d m a n a d g , p itiless p nd , le rne ; p n it .

n i r v ti f. a a t ata li a ﬂ u d r , contentment, h pp iness . Vp (p ) f ll , y ; ﬂ is . n a dv o u t u . , , forth . y p

n i ca a m . d a . a ti 274 m . d a h u s c g , ecision , cert inty p ( ) , lor , m ster ; m ' n a a ti a u n a a a ti a d a d . V ( g ; c s . g g ) le 3 b n

d a tt u a a a d a a r a n . a g i e ; p le w y ; p , le f, letter .

a u a u a tn i f . bring ; p introd ce , p , wife , consort .

a a n i s a thi a a s a n tba n consecr te, initi te ; p s me p .

a la a n e n d d t a a . bring to , etermine , p y , wholesome .

a d 28 2 a r i a d a u m . . settle ; p le bo t ; p ( ) , foot

a a d ad t - m rry . Vp (p ga e) go ; vi a in i ' n ca a lo w . a u . v a ada a ti k , c s ( g p g ) ill ;

- I . a k l a 20 G S ns rit E ng ish Gloss ry.

a u tr a m . a . a . p , gr ndson soci ble di a u r a m . z . r i a va n a . . p , citi en p g , idem

’ a e a a a te u . r i r i ti a ct . d p (p y g ) swell , get sto t Vp ( p n , ,

id. u . r i d . m a r a a dv. a p , forw r , forth light ; , rejoice ; c s (p

r ka i n n i a a ti a k a d a . a a . p c , bright, gliste ing ; z g ) , m e gl , p le se '

l l . a ct . u a . u a va te a , ill min ting Vp (p ) drench

r a ch ccha ti a sk a sk a u . Vp ( p r ) , bo t

h l u b . a a n . a . r a a f . a u u p j , cre t re , s ject p , fr it, rew rd

r a ti a dv an d . a k a ha la va n t a . u u . p . p rep , b c , b ck , p , fr itf l

o a ga in ; to wa rds (p o stp s. w

ba n d/z ba dhn a ti ba dhn i té d V ( , ) bin ;

’

i k l u fa v a . a a c o m r a t i t a a . p , n or ble ent ngle , c tch ; join ;

k a ii b . r a t a c 272 a . a p g ( ) , c w rd , west p ose

ba n dhu a d . m . a v . w r , rel ti e l d . ba a n . r a t a ha m a dv. a . p g , ily , strength , might

hd i ba la va n t a . r a th i n a u . r a t a t . Vp c s ( p y ) , strong, mighty l ‘ a d a . ba i ha a . . s p re ; p rocl im sg , strongest

hu 5 ba a . a r a tha m a 3 3 a . . u p ( ) , ﬁrst , m ch , m ny .

ba la o r a bha va m . a . u a s m . b p , might , p ower . , yo ng ; , child , y ;

’ - r a bhi t ta a . u a . . a . p , m ch ; m ny f , girl

bas a m . r a m a tta a . a . a a . p , c reless p , te r, te rs

d bahu m . a r r a a a m . n . r . a a a . m . p g g , p , All h b ,

- i n k r a u . b du m . r a u f d . ta a . o p g p rt p g j , rop

r bu ddh a h a k a o ktr m . a a u . a o f bu d a p y , rr nger, ser p rt . , w ened ;

la d u o r a a m . . d p y , estr cti n enlightene . b ddhi f . . r a h a m . u . u u d p c , q estion , p r ence , intelligence

a - a d bu d bi m n r a sa n n a a . o f r s d a t a u d . p , p rt p , well . , p r ent

' - - d d . bu dh bo dha ti te bi i dh a ti te is p ose V ( , g , ) ,

r a ha r a m . k w u d a k k p , stro e, Shot ; o n w e ; now .

r aho 272 a d a a d bu dha m . m a n a . p ( ) forw r , e stw r . , wise , s ge

l a hm r i a br a r a n . a m . . a ca p z , often p , bre th , life . g , life of holiness,

r a i n m . lv a u . e s . l u ud . p h , i ing cre t re p re igio s st entship

r h a ta r dv . a m a r i n u a br a c a a . d a p , e rly, in the morning . , st ying s cred

i tta n r a a c . a a d a s m . a a p g c , p en nce , exp i tion . knowle ge ; , Br hm n

r d v. a e za a u d . p g z , commonly. St ent

r a sa da m . a a br a hm a n n . d v a d p , p l ce . , e otion ; s cre word

r i a d a . a G o d a d k p y , e r . (of ) ; s cre nowledge ;

r i k r a n - a a m a . k d d . p g , in . worl sp irit

’ r i a va c a a b hm a n a e r . a a r a a b a p g , s ying p le s nt things, ( p rsoniﬁc tion of - I . a k E S ns rit nglish Gloss a ry .

' - b s hma n m . u u ha a f . a u a ) , the s preme All So l ; , sp eech , l ng ge .

b s C a . ha va n t a . b a a a n . Br hm , the re tor , Shining, rilli t br a hm a ha n 28 3 m i a bhi ks bhik a tc e t ( ) , killing V ( s ) beg , g by beg

B a a . r hm n ging .

b a hm a n . r a m a a bhi k a f . a . . , priest , Br hm n s , lms

‘ r i ti té a k a b iks br tt b a v br a s h u m . a a V ( , ) , Sp e , y ; , begg r ; scetic .

’ bhid hhi n a tti bhi n ddhé V ( , ) Split .

vi a a u . bhi bibhéti a bhi + expl in , nno nce V ( ) fe r ; in ca u s . (

a a te bha a a ti s g/ , g g ) terrify . h ' ‘ b a kta a . d v d u . 2bh tt bhu n a kti bhurzkté e a t , e ote , tr e V j ( , ) , ' bha kti f. d v . a u . bho a a ti , e otion ; honor enjoy ; c s ( j g ) feed ; ' bha ks bha k a a ti e a t u a V ( s g ) . p enjoy . bha k a n a - bh u n . a . a . s , e ting j , enjoying . bh n a a va t a . a b b . bhu u m . n . r . a V e di c g , honor le, lessed j g , p , p erson .

' - bha bha a ti te d v d vi bhu va n a n . d V j ( j , ) i i e ; + , worl .

- d b u . bha bhava ti tc istri te V ( , ) become ; be,

bha ii bha n a kti a d . a bhi v w V j ( ) bre k , estroy exist ; o erpo er ;

bha dr a a . d a a a s n . a r i r , goo , p le s nt ; , p desp ise ; p a

u . a u va ler fort ne rise ; be mighty , r le ; e .

67212 f a u bha a n . d . . a g , fe r . , e rth, gro n bha r a ta kha t a d bha ta a o f M n a s m . n . r . I a . . . u . zd , p , n i p rt ; n s bst ,

bha r t m . u v a u . r , s p p orter ; p reser er ; being, cre t re bh ti d m a u a d iz f. . lor , ster ; h sb n . , p rosperity, blessing b ‘ h bhu . bha va m . n . r . a a a zt m . , p , n me of i . j , king

‘ bha va n t bha i bhabh t m . u a . va t vo c . bhos . , f ; in , r , king ; mo nt in b ‘ hi t mi . . bha va ti u d i n u f a u d a d . f ; se resp ectf l , e rth , gro n , l n bh a dd a d o f u o f a a s 340 . a d . ress inste p rono n g ( ) comp j , more ;

- s d v . n d Cf. 2 64. a a . 2 p erson . § y , mostly

bh s bha sm a n n a . a a a n . a . . , shes n , orn ment

- bha bhati l a a bh bhar a ti te u . a n d V ( ) g e m , gl nce ; V r ( , ) s pp ort (lit

a o r vi i dem . h bha a m a a r bh uka cc a n . r . a a g . , p rt , p iece, Sh e . rg n p , B roch ,

- a I d a bha a . a . . j , Sh ring holy pl ce in n i

bha n u m u n bhr ta ka m . va . . , s . , ser nt

ha r a bh t a m . va t. b m . u d , b r en . r g , ser n

bh a m dv m u bha r a f . m a a . a . y , wife , wo n . rc , gre tly, ch

bhas I/ha a te k r a ti bheka m . . V ( s ) Spea ; + p , frog

bh . a a c e . o a m o a m . nswer ( f s g , enjoyment

v bho a n a n . a . con erse . j , me l - I a k E G a . 208 . S ns rit nglish loss ry

k ha n m a sta a a . bhos se e b va t. n he d

bhr a m bhr a m a ti : IBI a d m a ha n t a . a . V ( g ) w n er , gre t

k i tc h n a u a r i . m a ha n a sa n . e . bo t , ﬂit ; + p idem ,

h r m a k . bhr a t m . b . m a a a a . r , rother j , gre t ing

‘ b r m a hi a m . n . r . h tt f . w. , eyebro s , p

m a hi si f u . . , q een

k m a m ati m i mi té : 43 8 m ea m a ika f . a . l s , ﬂy, gn t V ( ; )

i s k a . m a ha va n 270 m . I a . u n g ( ) , ndr s re ; wor , cre te

m a m a a ti k m 1 d m a a d v a n d . u d V jj ( jj ) sin ; em . conj , not ; se in

k L t. a c m a i i m . b . a z , jewel . p rohi itions , etc , li e , '

I . m a ti f . . k u o f. 9S , mind gree j n

a ti m n t d u . m a sa m a a . w n . . , shre , p r dent n , ﬂesh

m tr f . m a ts a m . . a y , ﬁsh , mother .

thi a n tha n . m a dhur . m a a a s m a n . s me g , sweetness

ha m . m n h m o . m a d a d m o f a a a va m . m a n o c lle ste ; cf , ( )

5 2 m a n a sa u d a d . 3 4 . n . , , sense ; n erst n ing

- d z u m i . m a m ad a t an u a . u a V ( g ) get dr nk ; s , f , h m n

r a a . ma r a m . a d w a . p be c reless g , ro , y, street h m l a d u n a a f . a . m . . a , honey , g rl nd

hu r k m asa m a d a ka m . w . m . . p , s eet drin , month

i r h li m t a n . h . b e e . d m a d u m . , , frien

- a dd a n . dd mi tr a dr u h 2 9 d be m a dh a . s 4 a y , mi le ; , mi le ; ( ) frien

a w a ist . tr ying .

’ m a n m an a tc m a n a te k m i n a m V ( g ; ) thin . , ﬁsh .

i Su pp ose ; sa m honor. Vm i l (m la ti) wink ; + a i clos e d m n a s n . a . . , min the eyes

s hom o . kt m a n u a m . m a m u a f . a . y , n ( ) , p e rl

m a n or a tha m . . m u kti f . a va v a . , wish , s l tion , deli er nce

a a o kha n ha r a a . a m u . m a o n . u a , gree ble ; entr n , mo th , f ce

kh a . m u a a . ing y , p rincip l , ﬁrst .

' m a n tr a m . sa m u c m uri c a ti : a , cred text ; Sp ell , V ( free, rele se ;

a m uktva u 3 I2 ch rm . , witho t ( ) .

’ m a n tr i n m . m u . m u d m o da te a mt , inister ; co ncillor V ( ) rejoice ;

m a n th m a thn ati . a w V ( ) stir llo .

’ - m a n th n k . a 278 m . m u m m . a a ( ) , stirring stic , s ge ; scetic . '

n da . u m a r a m . n . r . a m u a m m u za ti a r o b. , p , o nt in V s ( sz ) ste l , a r a l m a n . a m u sa a m . n ub . n , de th . . , cl , p estle m a r u t h m . d l m u h ma a ti u . n . r . , win ; , p , p , the V ( g ) be conf sed or

- d a z u Storm go s . d ed or st p id .

k - i . a E a 2 10 I S ns rit ngl sh Gloss ry .

r a tha m . a . r a a n . a u , w gon p , form , be ty.

’ k d - h r it a a n . r a t a f . . . y , street p , gol p iece

r a bh r a bha te a a m i 277 . a f . V ( ) gr sp ; ( ) m (r rely) , possessions,

t a k d o n a . e hol , begin . we lth

r a m r a ma te a u r ohi zi f . n . r . V ( ) m se oneself ; z , p

' vi (vi r a m a ti ) ce a se

r a mi m . r a . la k a n . a u d d u a . c , y ; rein s , h n re tho s nd

sa m a la k mi 27 dd o f fo r r a . . 6 f . , t ste , feeling s ( ) , go ess

r a sa va n t a . a u . u . , t stef l t ne

' r aksa sa m . d m . la Ia a ti a a a . , e on V g ( g ) tt ch , h ng, cling ' - - - r a r a a ti tc u la hu . hu o r hvi a . V j ( j , ) direct , r le ; g , f g g , , light ; l u u a . shine ; be il strio s . sm ll , little

n k . la i i ka f. n r a a m . r . C . j , ing , . p , eylon

' k d la la a ti r a a n . . a vi c o m j y , ing om V p ( p ) p r te ;

r a tr i f . . a . , night pl in

' r a dh r a d/m ate u d a a la bh la bha Z c v a k V ( ) s ccee p V ( ) recei e , t e ; ' I v d o . a u . a mbh a a ti a k e wrong c s ( g ) m e rec i e ,

r a m a m . n . r . a v . , p , hero . gi e

[ l a r a m a a i a n . a d a a n . a d . y z , note p oe m . t , forehe

l va r a va a m . n . r . a d a n a n . a . a , p , emon . , s lt r i l ii a la l a m . a a n u . c , he p . g . , p o gh

r u r a di i : 4I0 a la bha m . a u a . V ( ) cry, scre m ; , cq isition , g in

i d likh li kh i . v . d t a i em V ( ) scr tch , write ' r d a t li li m a li a r u c c c a da t . . V ( ) p le se ( , V p ( p ) sme r ' a f lih le h Ii hé 427 k r . k d i : a . j , sic ness , ise se V ( d d ) lic ; r a a r a a d ddi ti : 429 v . V ( ) weep . i em d l l ' r a ah u h u z h a a i i r . a a . o f r u dh b d t t n s o b , p rt , esiege , V m ( z g ) u u d d u ff u d la lu m d ti a k to s rro n e ; s se . V p ( p ) bre pieces ; '

r u dh r u a ddhi r u n ddhé o h d va a u d . V ( p , ) e st te ; pl n er

u k a a la bh li i bh a ti v da t . str ct , chec , besiege ; p V ( y ) co et ( , l lhb n b c a a n . . esiege . , writing , copying r u dhi r lka d a o d . a n l. n . d . m . , bloo , worl ; sing p ,

' r uh r o ha ti u . V ( ) rise , spring p , p eople ’ b a u . r o ha a ti r o a a ti loh a m . d a va . grow ; c s ( g , p g ) , esire , rice

a k o r a lom a n n . a . m e rise grow , pl nt ; , h ir lha a va d o n . a d ; a , met l ; iron . escen climb , u a d mo nt, scen ; p r a gro w

u . va n a a a p g m r ce , f mily . r ak a a . a u va kr a a . k . s , h rsh, ro gh . , croo ed , bent - I . a E h S nskrit nglis Gloss a ry .

ks va a s n . a . va str a n a . , chest , bre st . , g rment

' va c va kti : 4l5 a k a aha i r a s e a h v t t . a V ( ) sp e , y ; V ( ) , c rry , be r ;

a a u . va ca a ti a k a d ﬂ o w w n me ; c s ( g ) m e ( intr . , p rocee ; ; blo . k a i e d . c o a . . a d . r written le f) Sp e , re encl , .

va z m . d . a va c f . v . zij , merch nt , oice ; wor

va tsa m . a . va c a a . a u , c lf g , bl meworthy , c lp

' va d va da ti a k sa a b V ( ) sp e , y ; le .

' a bh a a bhi i c n s . va da a ti t i a a in ( g ) vaz j g a tr de .

vi m id . d a u va t m . . greet ; ( ) isp te, , wind

a u r s a B a . van a a th m . a a rg e p , r hm n in

a dh k v a m . u a o f , illing , m rder . the third st ge his life . h ‘ va d tz f . a . va i f . . , wom n ; wife p , cistern

n d a va a n . . va a s m . w . , woo s , forest g , cro

- a n a v si n . m d . v a a d . va u . , forest welling g , win

a d a da . r i v n v n te va n . a V ( ) greet, honor , w ter .

a d a v va a ti a so w . vi a v. a a wa o u t. V p ( p ) sc tter ; , p rt, y, d u ih a 334 a va a s n . b v . p , o y ; ﬁg re . g ( ) , twentieth . h i va a m 223 . . vi a t 332 n u m . g ( ) p ron , we p ( ) , twenty .

i ta m a 34 v a n . ih a t 3 a . a s a e . v . g , g c ( ) , twentieth

' di t a m . kr a a n . r lva r a m . u d vi a . a , s itor, bri egroom . g , p , king .

’

2va r a m . r w rle e a v . vi c i ati b a d , choice, p g ; f or V j ( j ) trem le ; in ’ ati 3va r a a . w . c a n s . u dve a . , best ; better ( ( j g ) terrify

i t a n . a a . v t th n) , p ossessions ; we lth .

h i d vétti véda : — va r d a m . a . v 4l7 k , bo r V ( ; ) now , '

a r a i r d d a u . veda a ti f v a m . n a o . m r , . p . , g consi er ; c s ( g ) in or

a r n i a u d v za m . a . . z , color ; c ste . c s , i em

' ' d vi n ti - te va r t a a va r za a ti 2vi da a u . V z g ( z g ) describe V ( , ) ﬁnd , cq ire

- k . i d a . a . v p ortr y , nowing k d i d a f. a a r ti n a . a d . v . v , bi ing, being g , nowle ge , le rning h dva s a . k va r a n . a . vi . s , ye r , nowing, wise

- i dvi a a . a . o f i d i a ha d a . v v v a ll b a . v , e r st p ss p rt s,

s i d d . Vva c (vd g) wish . eteste

' ’

a s va sa ti d m i n vi dhi m . u a a a . Vv ( ) well ; , r le , f te ; Br hm

a b d r a a a vi dhe a a . d . h it , well ; + p go w y y , obe ient

o n u r a ti i n vi n a a m . d . a jo rney ; p y , obe ience

i v v a . u . h a bit . p rep , witho t (with instr

f d . o r a c c . o st o s . a sa ti . v , welling , often p p ) k va su n . a . vi a a m . e . , we lth , money p , ripening ; recom pens

va sudeva m . n . r . vi r a m . a a . , p p , Br hm n 14‘ - k E a . 21 9 I . S a ns rit nglish Gloss ry

’ - vibhu . bhe a a . va d fa r va r a ti a v a , f , p er ing, e s ( s ) r in , gi e r in ;

. d v a . ﬁ . re ching ; omnip resent, mighty g , shower own ; o erwhelm

ha m d . d k e vi va . d m a a ve a m . d s , we ing , rri ge , Science, nowle ge ; p .

vi veki n a . d . a d k d . , shrew s cre nowle ge, holy writ

' i a tz a m - a vcda a f vi v s n . a . V c ( c ) enter ; , p in a a u a a o n e veda n ta m a m o f pp ro ch ; p se t . , syste p hilo

r a a . self ; p enter , p enetr te Sophy . i vi . l. Va a vedi f . a a . c m p , p eople ; the cy , lt r

a . vai a sse v. a u c ste p rticle , to be s re , in

’ - vi i a a . o f vi i s u a a d. g st p rt c , excellent sooth ; often ntr nsl te

v a o f a ka . a i m . m a n d a . rem r ble gg , the thir c ste

vi r u ta a . o f vi r u a u . v a ii a n a n . . c p rt c , f mo s g j , Sp ice

vi va a . a ll V d . v a th a u . v a tha a ti c , ( e ic) v g in c s ( g g ) tor

d . . vi vasa m . u c , tr st , conﬁ ence ment

vi a n . v a dh vi dh a ti . s , p oison . V g ( g ) hit, p ierce

i r d a li ka . a . v m m . n . . a o . v a sz , p , g g , f lse , wrong

ha l - u a i a d a va har a m . a a w . v m . v g , bir . g , tri l , s it; tr de

h a - vi i t a . o f vi dha da d . v aka r a za n . a a . p rt , or ine g z , gr mm r

lvr u ati v u té v su r v a hr a m . t . V ( m , rn ) co er, g g , iger

- u d a v a a a v a dha m . u . ro n ; co er ; + p g , h nter

d . vi a a v a dhi m . a Op en ; exp l in ; m nifest ; g , ise se, illness d k a u hi ta a . . s m . v a Sh t y , Sic , ill

' - 2v v i té va r a a ti te v asa m . n . r . V r ( m g , ) choose, g , p a ti - te d . vr a vr a Select V j ( j , ) p rocee ; r ka m a d a n a s v . . , wolf w n er forth ; become

k a v m . . r s , tree cetic

v t c ar ta te u u vr a n a m . u . V r ( ) t rn ; exist, s bsist, , wo nd

b e b e c o m e n i r e t u r n vr a ta n . v o w a u . , + home , , oblig tion ; d ty

r a a - b a k o u t + p get going, re

a a hs a u sa ti a a u a u a c t . c o n rise ; contin e ; c s . ( ) V g (c ) pr ise ; p rocl im ;

u a r a a . tin s (tr n s ) . p p rocl im

tta le a kn ti m v n . d u . a d be a r , con ct V g (c ) ble ; so etimes

tt n a 322 . v a t m . a o f a ff a a . . r , st te irs ; p ss , cf

ka a . . a m . news c , Scythi n

r tr a ka m . r v m . n . r . a a a c a . , p , demon . c t ,

vr ddha a o f v dh a ku n ta la f n . r . . o ld . . p rt r , c , p ’ v dh v r a /c f a dh te u a it a . a . V r ( ) grow ; ca s . c , hesit tion ' r dh - 2 - va a a ti te a k a ta 3 3 333 n . a u . ( g , ) m e grow ; g ( ) , h ndred

u . a ta ta m a a . u d . bring p g , h ndre th

I a - E G a . 21 4 . S nskrit nglish loss ry

o a a 3 32 n u m . . sa ma a m a m . u . s d c ( ) , sixteen g , meeting, enco nter

sa m a a m . v a . j , con ention , comp ny

- sa i ii u lcta a o f sa m u r o sa mi dh f . a . g p rt . g j , p , f got

i e d sa m i a ea n . v v d a . a s with . p , n r ; , icinity ,

sa mva tsa r a m . a . a s . , ye r ne rnes , p resence

sa i ii a a m . d u . sa mu dr a m . a . c g , o bt , oce n

sa k t a d v. . sa m u n n a ti f . va r , once , height , ele tion ;

a k ha n sa kthi : 275 n . . s t . ( ) , thigh high p osition

sa khi 274 m . d . sa m eta a v d d ( ) , frien . , p ro i e with .

sa khi f . a a sa m ilr i a a . o f l sa m , fem le comp nion , friend p z p rt pr ,

sa a a . a d . u . jj , re y f ll

il o . a m a ﬁ s a ti sa a e : . V c s k d . sa a a v . V j ( j jj cf in g , well , p rop erly d o n sa m r a 22 a o n a m . a k . ) h ng , be f stene j , gre t ing ; emperor

sa r i t f v . . , ri er

a tka r a m . a t . sa r a m . a s , hos p it li y g , cre tion .

sa ttr a n . a ﬁ . sa r a m . a k . , s cri ce p , sn e

. u u . sa r va ll sa t a n a . a . y , tr th , righteo sness ,

ti i t d a r a tr a sa d si da s s v a . v V ( ) ; settle own ; be , e erywhere .

- i t . v o r a u a sa v m . n r . S u n o ercome exh sted ; r , p , the god Se

sa m - a a o n e vi t r a p p ro a ch ; + se t a ; su n .

’ - da a ti e n sa h sa ha te d . a u . sa u self ; c s g ) meet, V ( ) en re i u i t i s t sa ha a d v. . t co nter ; down ; , together ; p rep , of en

r a be a v a b . o st o s. a p f or le p p , with long with ,

sa da a d v . a a . , lw ys

- - sa d a . i a . a sa ha c a r a m . m a i f . rc , f , , Simil r ; worthy . , co p nion ; ,

h . d u sa nt di d a a u b u a d . . g , o tf l ; nste y wife

sa ii zdh a f . . sa ha sa a dv. u dd u k g , twilight , s enly, q ic ly .

f a s b sa ha sr a n a . u sa n t a r t . o l . a . , p , eing , existing ; , , tho s nd

d a s m . m a n a s . sa ha a m . a . goo ; , good ; f y , com p nion , help er

sa ti d a a a sak in m . . , goo wom n , esp eci lly s , witness

d wh o a . sa dha n a n . a v wi ow . immol tes herself , me ns , de ice .

3 2 . m ca ta 3 n u m . v s dhu m n a a a . p ( ) , se en . , holy , s int

sa ta ti 332 n u m . v sa m a n n V d d p ( ) , se enty . . , e ic melo y , song ;

sa ta d 2 m l am a v da . a a 3 3 n u . v . . p g ( ) , se enteen p , the S e

h . n a . va sa h a f u u . sam a t m a . , co ncil , meeting, co rt , ss l

m t a v sa dv. m r a am d . t a a . sa a , long with ; comp letely p , p resent . k sa m a sa m a dv . sa a m a dv . a t v . , before , in the g , e ening

. sar a sa m . a . presence of (gen ) , cr ne

sa m a r tha a . a a a sihha m . . , c p ble , ble. , lion - I . a k E G a S ns rit nglish loss ry .

' si i d r o z c s ii c a ti so n a m . th e i n to x i c a ti n V ( ) drip , p , moisten ; , g ferment

- a bhi a a k . e d u o f + noint s ing j ice the Som e pl a nt .

' lsi dh se dh a ti r a ti ska n dha m u d V ( ) rep el ; +p . , Sho l er .

a k d . si u stati ti : 4II a hold b c ; forbi V ( ) p r ise .

2si dh dh a ti u a n ti f . si c s stu . o f a a V ( g ) s cceed ; in , song pr ise ; p r ise

' '

sadh a a ti a u . si st dti st a te st ati ( g ) p erform ; cq ire V r ( rp , ra ; rp ,

si n dhu m . n . r . I du . st i té a a a , p , the n s ra ) sc tter, strew ; p

i da s m a n f . d u o u t a b . , bor er , bo n ry ; sc tter, estrew

k st a . en m . s irts . , thief

d v v t a eu a . w a . sto r a n . . , ell ; e sy ; ery , song of p r ise

eu sun dti su m t te . etr i 276 f . a . V ( , ) p ress ( ) , wom n

su kha n . u u k a sth ti ha ti a d a . , fort ne , l c , h ppiness V ( st ) st n , intr ; be in da r - i u o u sun a . a . u . r o n a d u a . a . , f , , be tif l , etc , be Sit te ; c s

' a - d a s h u t a su m n a s a . a v a st a a a ti a t , f or bly min ed ; ( p y ) p , p l ce ; pp oin ;

f a dhi u a d . , ﬂower . sto p ; mo nt , st n

sa r a a m . u a v u v a n u p , dr nk rd . o er ; r le , go ern ;

suva r za n . . o u t a . a z , gold follow , ccomplish ; (cf lso

su hr d m . . . 96 a u d a , friend p , l st note) ; rise ,

8 71 si t te a Vo c . a a a V ( ) gener te , bring forth ; rise (cf. p p

r a a a a r a m i d . +p gener te . p ro ch re ch ; p ,

sa kta n . V d a o ff a u . d , e ic hymn . st rt ; in c s sen ;

sit ta m . v a sa m c a u sﬁ a u to a , dri er , ch rioteer . + in , c se rem in d silda m . k . stha n a n . a a a . , coo , p l ce, loc lity ; ste

i r f stha . 290 . st a m . u . si ki ta a . o g , s n p rt ; cf , end

' sr sa r a ti ﬂ o w + a n u si ki ti f . d . V ( ) ; follow , con ition u a a a a u sn a sa ati a p ; + p go a w y ; in c s . V ( ) b the .

- sa r d a ti d v a a . sn ata ka m . wh o h a s g ) ri e w y , one p erform

' s s a ti a e d a u u a a t V rj ( rj ) let go, cre te ; the bl tions c stom ry

+ n a let loose or o u t ; ra ise (the the e n d o f religio u s p u p il a ge .

v . sn a n a n . a a . oice) , b thing , b th

s sa r a tz m v r a . sn a u. m . d . V rp ( p ) o e p idem g , ten on , bowstring

c i a sn i dha a . o f sn ih a ff a . ret f , cre tion . g p rt , ection te

setu m d d . sn ih sh ib a ti . , bri ge, ike V ( g ) feel inclined to ,

semi f a m . v . . , r y lo e (gen ,

sev séva te v sn u a f. da u la w . V ( ) ser e , honor ; s , ghter in / vi dwell ; de vote oneself to ; t w e (Sp rcdti) to u ch

s h s ha a tz de sxr e a ttend . V p r ( p r g ) n m f sa i ika m 8 a . a sse v. . , soldier . encl , slightly ; o ten

sai n a n . a . a m a a y , rmy cco p nies p resent tense, - I . a E a 2 16 S nskrit nglish Gloss ry.

ha r n a z v o f a n hi sto r i m . a . gi ing it the force , g elle

a . ha la . n . u . ic l tense m , p lo gh

sm r sm ar a ti k ha vi s n . a . V ( ) remember ; thin , obl tion ha sta m nd o n a d a e S . . a . ; c ll to min ; te ch ; p in , h

‘ ha a sma r a te a u . . sti n m . a . p ss . g it is t ght, i e , elep h nt ’ ' a d a . lba a ha ti a a v u tr ition l V (j ) b ndon , gi e p ;

- l d l . . sm ti f . a a w r , tr ition ; book neg ect b i t sr a f . a a . 2 a ih e : 438 v . j , g rl nd V (j ) mo e h hi i dti d r a . sr a m . a . n str , cre tor V ( ) sen ; + p idem ’ hi e u sva a . o w n o wn . a ss v . a u a a , ; one s p rticle , s rely ; c s l ,

sva ii sc a ate a a u . V j ( f ) embr ce ; for, bec se

r i f o 21 d hi hs hi n asti d . a C . V c . u p ( ) i em . V ( ) inj re , estroy ' d sva d a . la hi ta a . o f ldha a s a d . a rc , simi r. p rt ; j ,

’

sc a sva i ti : 429 . va n ta e o u s a s n . a dva a . V p ( p ) sleep g ; , nt ge hi ma n sva n a m . d a . va t a . a s m . p , sleep , re m , snowy ; , the

sva a m . o w n . H a a a . g p ron , self, self im l y Mts

- hi n a ha a hiz . . l sva mb a a s m . a a a g , self existent ; , p rt of , b ndoned ;

o f a . a . u . a . ep ithet Br hm w nting in ; w instr , witho t

r a kati u hu té ﬁ . sva a m . a v . a g , he en t (j , j ) s cri ce

- hu ta bhu bhu k m . . sva s f . . . r , sister j (nom ) , ﬁre h h sva du a . . i t se e va . , sweet V

‘ ' sva dh a a m . va a h ha r a ti a a a a g g , p ri te recit tion y r ( ) t ke w y ; ste l ;

u d a a d o f s a cred texts . p l n er ; p i em ;

mi d m i d . sva n m . . a a c t . a n , p ossessor, lord , fetch , bring ;

‘ - svai r a m a d v . a t le a su r . n a a m , p cite, ention ; p r a ty- a bring b a ck ; u d

ha ta a . o f h e n . a v u . p rt s e , resc e

ha n ha n ti : 4l9 a u . ha h d n a V ( ) kill ; c s (g r . , he rt .

ta a ti a v k d a a hr da a n a g ) , h e ille ; p g . , he rt . v a bh i h har a ti h a tz remo e ; smite ; V rs ( s , fsg ) rejoice, be sa m - a u d i t i k d r a wo n ; ill ; elighted ; p idem .

r a ti d u ff d he . . + p hin er ; inj re, o en ; interj , O , ho

sa m . hema n ta m . . write , winter

- 2 3 ha n 8 a . . hr a sva m a dv. a ( ) , killing , ne r by.

ha n u f . a w . hr i ihr e ti a a , j V (j ) be sh med . ha n u m a n t m . n . r . a o hr i f . d a u . , p , m nkey , mo esty , b shf lness

' ’ k hv hv a i a a t a s . ing . V ( g ) c ll ; in c a n (hva ’ ha n t m . a a a ti a v a d a r , killer , sl yer. g g ) h e c lle ; + ca ll , h a r i m . n . r . a o d . um . , p , g S mon

- E a k a . 2 18 I I . nglish S ns rit Gloss ry

a n a n a d. n . u ddha . : + b a ttle : r a a m n . ; y n born , to be j ; j

a b e : bba v t u a d both : a bha d . , to ; r ; (be sit te )

bo w : n a m . stha . , to

ka m ar a m . a : bh b si t b o : bala m . ; be r, to f ; ( ring forth) ; y

i a m . r a B a a : br a hm a a m . d e ; sit +p . r hm n n ; j

a dv a ti m . vi r a . bea r : rks m . ij ; p m

: h . a : ta . a ak a be t, to d br nch p f

a n t b a v : dhi r a bea u tifu l : sun da r a ; r ap a v . r e k b a : a r a s n . va a s . bea u ty : r ap a n . re st ; s n '

m : hint v t. d o : va r a . beco e, to ; r bri egro m m

~ m a dhu lih m : n i a h a . a li m . . + bee : ; bring , to + , r

r be to : bhi k . b a d : tha a a . g , s ro p r

h : bhr at m . : r a b a . begin , to + brother r

a c at u : d a h . behind : p p (w . b rn , to

kr a . d : i k . u : behol , to a b siness y n

’

ka i bu t : ta Ici n t ta a n a r . Ben a res : p f. ; ; p

d : n a m . ben , to

to 1k u a . a to : ba d a va c va d . beneﬁt , ; r + p c ll , ; (n me) ;

: a d r a . a a : sa ma r tha . beseech , to p +p c p ble

dh u a . : r u dh r u a : a ti . besiege, to ; + p c ste j f

: r e ha e ha . : o l best p st ; j y st ca ttle g m . p .

r i a . a k to : a a to : a m r a m vi . bet e oneself, y ; p + ce se , p ; +

r e a s a a s. i r a ta r i m a better : p g ; j g g celebr a te d : v p p n t.

ba n dh d : . a : har a m . bin , to ch in

: dvi a d . a sata bip ed p ch rioteer ; m .

: vi ha a m . a k i n a : ka n ti f . . bird g ; p s m . ch rm

i a a at f . n m n . d a m b : k : a u . r a dh irth j ; j n chec , to , c s ; .

k : k za . h a s a r a a : va n . bl c raz chest e ; s n . k i a : n i n d l ti r a s d : bala m . a m . bl me , to ; r + . chil ; p p

: bha a va n t a s : 2v . blessed g ; ( p reﬁx) choose , to r

r i . : va i p cistern p f.

d : r dhi r a b u z : au r a . loo n . citi en p m

to va h . : n a a r a i f . ur blow , city g ; p f.

b a : n au . v : bu ddhi o t f cle erness f.

d : a r i r a ka a to : r a h a . a n . v a s n bo y p ; p . ; y climb ,

su n o ti s n . : lv sa m ldha a i . , j y close , to r ; p

: a si k n u d : m e ha bone a n . clo g m .

b k : a u a a : mm oo (m n scrip t) p u sta ka n . ; co chm n m

k r a n tha : a m a a a i m . (wor ) g come , to g + ; g + ; + - I I . E a a nglish S nskrit Gloss ry. 2 1 9

a bhi o r a o u t : a m n i e da u : k n i d a a a tr f . a ; come g ghter g f . ; p ;

a n i s hit g . r f.

di a ii a d di v sa n d : a u . a : a . di a a m n . a ha n comm n , to p+ , j d + c s y ; ; n . ; i ri a f . n de a . d . : di n e di n comm a n d : aj ; p m by d . e ; p r a tga ha m ;

: c a r a lh . a da a n d a a h r a tr a commit, to ; r y night : o n .

a : sa ha a m . sa ha ca a d : m r ta vi a n n a comp nion y ; de ; p .

r a d d . : n i n i s. m eci e , to (settle)

a : sa m a a m . d ka r m a n com p ny j eed : n .

: m e. d : deva ta comp ose , to eity f.

d u : vr tta . d a : ta r a n a con ct n elic te .

to : r a dh n i . ta a u conﬁne , delight , to s, c s .

u : i . d v a : m a kti conq er , to j eli er nce f.

a : a i a a . d : r ak a sa consecr te, to p emon s m .

d : cin t lvid. a : i a a consi er , to ; dep rt, to p .

: a tn i . d : c a r a a consort p f escribe , to p y .

k : a c . d : la bh coo , to p esire , to .

: lchba n a . to : M a n copying n destroy, y.

d a d : a a vi ta 0 . d : ma n a va bha a ri cor , s cre p esp ise, to ; p .

- u : a a a . d to : ci n i s o r n i co nt , to g a g etermine , vi s.

u a u : te a svi n . d v d : bha kta sn i d a co r geo s j e ote ; g h .

u : a ti f . v n : bh a kti co rse g de otio f.

v : 1vr m i d. lv sa m : a k a . co er, to _ ( ) r die s m

di e : m ‘ i r a a d , to g ; + p ; p + vi .

co w : dhen a f . o . d u : da r la bh a da k ; g f ifﬁc lt s a r a .

di o : kh n d : o a m . t a . cowher g p g,

s d a d a a : . : o cre te, to rj iligence g g m .

dhat a d a : m . sr . : bh a m cre tor r ; sgr m iligently rp .

d a a a u : r a zi n m . a a t . : n a vi cre t re p z ; j g n is p p e r, to p + .

: ka la d a : r a f v a hi . d m . crescent f. ise se j ; g

d h a to : t u to : r a va . cross, r . ismo nt,

' a d o hk a r a ti - : va sa m . t : a . crow y isown , y p

u d : d a dha n d u to : va d vi . c r s n . isp te ,

k t h d to : da c u t to : c i d . , r ; . istress ,

d u o bha c u t o ff : k t a va hi d a va t : vi . , to r ; c istrib te , j

v : di a di ine vg .

d o : lh ca r sa m ~ a , to r ; + .

d a : n i t a a h i r a m : r h a . ily g ; ( dv. ) tya m ; p do estic g g

t a ha m d o : va n m . a n i g . g p ; p f.

d a : n tta : (Iva r . ncing r n . door f - - I E a k a . 220 I . nglish S ns rit Gloss ry

a i . doork eep er : dvahstha m . e ven p

t v : sa r va . do v e : kap o a m . e ery

d a a u . a a . a : va h . v a dr w , to e il ( j . ) p p ; (s bst ) p p n

a i . d k to : l a . : t rin , p exceedingly

v : sa ta a to : br a vi lv vi dri er m . ex pl in , ; r ,

- : si c c a k vi a . drop , to . s

hi d a d . : bi n da m . a to : c drop extermin te ,

k a n n . : 3 va s va s a i w e e : n etr a n . ca k a s n . a dwell , to ; ; d ell y ; s ; s ;

o n sa ﬁ lo c a n a . j . n

ka a m kha e r : r m a : a . a a . f ce n

a : thi vi f bha f . bham i . a : sa mi dh . e rth p r . ; ; f f got f

a a : r aii c E . : r a ci a : sa n da r a . e st, e stern p ; the p f ir i f . se . di . a : a t a t n a , p f ll , to p ; p + ; f ll to ’ e a t t o a d 2a bha k bha . : a k d : , ; ; p; s; j one s lot r ; f llen ( ille )

k a za ti ta m ta . e a ting : bha s z n . p a ; y

: He ti r a s. a m ki r ti f . a a s eclip se , to r f e ; ; y p n .

: a a a : va a a eight st . f mily s m .

i a : e a m a a m u : v r ta . eighth st . f o s p

e : a i ti a : d ba . ighty p f. f st (ﬁrm) ra

: a i ti ta m a . a to : ba n dh eightieth p f sten , .

d e f t : i n a a : ha a a . el est j g st . p ; p st

a : a a m . ha stin . a : a n a ka m . i t m eleph nt g j ; m f ther j ; p r .

e : k a u ﬁ n d llc ti r a s. v e a d a . a : le enth p f lt, to r +

m : t a d a u : a n a va d a . e erge, to r . f ltless g

: u bh a : bha a eminent, to be c . fe r g n .

: sa m r a d : k etr a n emp eror j m . ﬁel s .

e a : lv chi d a va : a ﬁ ca m a . ncomp ss, to r ; . ﬁfth p

e n d : a n ta m . to : a dh . ﬁght, y

du h : sa . : a r a sa m ar za . en re , to ﬁlled p a ; p z

: a r i m . a tr a d i a : a n te. enemy ; p m . ; v s m . ﬁn lly

to : bha . ﬁ n d : 2vi d . enjoy, j , to

e : bho a : a sa m . njoyment g m . ﬁnish , to p

to : vi r a : a n i m . ha ta bha . enter, c p . ﬁre g ; j m

a : m n d : sa mi dh . entr ncing a oha r a . ﬁrewoo f

v : da ta : r a tha ma a t : r a en oy m . ﬁrst p ; ﬁrst p

u h m a m : I da r a t a . entr st, to p .

u : n a h sa : m a ts a . m i n a m . eq ip , to m. ﬁsh g m e u : sto tr a : a logy n . ﬁt, to y j .

- E a k a . 222 I I . nglish S ns rit Gloss ry

dha r m a . a : m a d. u : a h ppy, to be inj stice m

a d o : da r la b : bu ddhi . h r t ﬁnd ha . intelligence f

h a : lo ha . a to : 1 a . h rm , r + p iron n

a : dvi da i r a h te, to s; s p .

a : r a . a w : ha n a . he r, to p j f bha m i m . r a tn a n . h da a b d . : a he a rt : r g n . ; r n jewel a ; ;

a v : sva r a a a . he en g m . s g n hea vy : ga r a .

ha n ha n c a us . : n a r a ka k : m a u . hell m . ill , to r , c s ; ; ,

: a tr a i h a k d : i ah . here ; . in le , to

~ ti m . a : r a m vi r a m : a a m . n a hero pa . ; . king rp ; rp ; p

hi v m a a n m . bhabha r t a . r hesita tion : pa raka f. ; j ; j

: a cchr i ta m . bhabh r t m . high . ; g

r k d : r a a u . high w a ter : p a a m . ing om j y

d u to : ldha a i . k w : lvi d ii a . hol sh t, p no , to ; j

: sci dha k d : vi d a . n an a . holy . nowle ge y f j n

: r i holy writ p a t f.

r ha m . a to : la vi . home g l ment , p h m dha a de a . oney : a n . l nd : p m

: a 71a m sev. a u a : bha a . honor, to p j ; ; l ng ge s f h 0 e : a a . a a t : a n te . p p f l st ,

i hi . : a va w : h r m a m . v d horse p m . la d a ; m

- u : h : sm ti f . dha r m a a ho se gr a n . m a ster o f the h la w book : r ; p

ha sth a . str a gr m n .

- u d : ha sth a la w u : v a va har a tn . ho sehol er gr m . s it g

- u : a r c hi ta m . a d : n i . ho se p riest p le , to h o w ?: ka tha m . d n et le a er : r .

u a : m a n a a . a : a m a va lvi d i h m n s le rn , to g ; ;

' u : v adha a hi h nter g m . d .

u : 2a s k i i a ka a la . h rl , to ; sp . lea rned : vi dvans ; p a nd t p

‘ u a d : a . bh ti m a r t m . a : vi d a h sb n p ; g le rning g f.

: /et sit a . a : c a r m a n hymn n le ther n .

a v a hi le ings : cc sta n .

I : a ha m . : a dh a a lesson g g m . a t d k o : I vi a i a u . : li h li h a va . imp rt , , c s lic , to ; d f : sa ih: : i vi ta n a s n . incline , to be li e j . ; ga ; ca r i ta n .

a to : v dh : . o ti . incre se, r light j y s n

I d a : bha r a k ta ha z a m . v : la h n i zd light (not hea y) g a .

a : i ti a a k : i va initi te, to p . li e . - I I . E a a . nglish S nskrit Gloss ry 223 .

: a i i a u : da kha n . a a d limb g n . misfort ne h ; p f.

: si kr i hha d : . lion m . mo esty f

li : o ha . to : si c p st m moisten , .

to : r a . a sa mr a m . listen , p mon rch ; j

v : i v v t a n r a : dha n a n . va sa . li e , to j ; r ; p . money ; n

: di r ha a d v . ci r a m : m a sa . long g ; ( ) . month m

k a t : i h r a : ca n dr a m a s m . c a n dr a m loo , to s p . moon ; . ;

d : i a r a v . a ti i n da . lor p m p m . m

u : dm a : a . bha a s . lot s p m n . mostly g

v : sn i h . m : r a ta r lo e , to orning, in the p .

v l : m r m . t b : ka ma a f . a a . lo e , god of m . mother ; f

- - u a a : n a k a tr a i n la w : va r a . l n r m nsion s n . mother p p f

i r r u a : i m . a va ta m mo nt in g ; p .

' ka n a u m a kha m a : f . bola m : iden g ; f. o th n

tn a idse r va n t : dasi m u : r a bha ta ba ha . f. ch p ;

k : h u u : r asa m a i . . e, to r mo thf l g m

i r : n a d : m u . ha n ha n m a n v r a m . um a /i s m . u a ( ) ; p ; m r er , to r, c s ; ; ,

a r a a m . ho m o n a a u . p s ; ( ) : j a m . ; c s

f a r h 2 a n d E x e r -J m a a m m n a m u st . 3 0 n a v . a m n a r a . ; sga . ; m : ; cf §

a k d : a n a m . l 30 . m n in j p . cise m a : ba ha r a bh ny ; p ata .

' m a : ca l r a a : n am a n . b n . : n am a . rch , to + p . n me n ; y

a a : vi vaha a : va c va d k m rri ge m . n me , to ; ; (rec on)

m a : a i a r i a a a . rry, to p . g n y

m a : bha r t m . a ti k : ka ha . ster r ; p m . nec nt m

a ka a to : ha . m t : m . l t neglect,

la m a : sadha n a : a . e ns n . net j n m d : a a a dha I ] v : n a Ica da a i ci d o r e icine s . ne er p , ,

m a m sa m c a n a . eet , to g

‘ m : sa ma a m a : v ttan ta . eeting g m . news r m

m u : h ta : r a tr i . elted b tter g r n . night f

- : ka o m to : h d n o n a i ci d o r ca n a . a a . ention , r + one + p , , ii m a : va m . : a da c N . : erch nt nii north , northern ; the

m : a a . a di c i f. 8 0 . di . erit p ng n , p

: ba li n ba la va n t vi bhu n o t : n o m a . mighty ; ; . ;

k to : du h . : n a Iei m a i ci d o r mil , nothing p , ,

k : k i r a n . a a s c a n a . mil s ; p g n .

d : m a n a s . m a t : dhun a sa m r a ta m m n i a . in ; f. now p

m a n in m inister : tr m . - I I . E a 224 nglish S a nskrit Gloss ry .

’

he a : ti r tha atr a . 0 : . p ilgrim ge g f

he a u s dhu : i d : a . obedient v g . pio s

- a ha vi s . a to : ldha dha sa m a . obl tion : n p l ce , ; +

u to : i a . 2vi d a . a : a da n . de a m . occ r, d p, p ss , p ss p l ce p ; p

: a da dhi m sa mu dr a . a : a bhi r a a . ocea n . ; m pl n p g m

ff d to : ha n r a ti lha . a to : r a h a u . o en , + p ; p l nt, , c s

ff a a : ha vi s . a : di v. o ering (s criﬁci l) n p l y, to

d : a a s o ld : v ddha . a : r a c . r ; Ol er j g g ple se , to

i . a : v bhu . . o m nip resent ple a s u re : sa kha n ; with p , p le s

' ’ : sa k t. a n tl z sa khen a once y y ; (wish , choice)

k . m . a t . : sve o n e : e a i ccha f. ka a m p

: va . c ha only e c ga .

i ha la m . n . m a t f . m a t u : la n a la n . Opinion ; ; a n . plo gh g ;

o r va o st o s . a tha va . u to : k . ; , p p ; p lo gh, rs

k : lu h h la a : a u . 1dha vi u d . ord in , to lp , c s ; + ; pl n er, to at ; r ; p

da d : vi hi ta : kav a or ine . p oem y n .

ii a u ka vi . : a a . : order, to j + , c s p oet m

a n a i ta r a a a r a o u t : di . other ; g ; , p . p oint to ; p

u : si m a n u d : da . o tskirts f. p oll te , to be s

v : 2 : da r i dr a . o ercome , to p r . p oor

v : v s : dha n a 11 o erwhelm , to r . p ossessions . ’

o wn o wn : sva . a a : a a m , one s post, s criﬁci l g p .

o x : a n a a h o t : ha a . d m . p g t m

u d to : i . p o n , p s

a : a m a u : ha . p ir y g n . p o r, to

a a : r asa da : ba la . p l ce p m . p ower n

i ba li n ba l a : t d u . u : a va n t . p rents p r , m . p owerf l ;

a : bha a m . a . sta ti sto tr a n p rt g p r ise, song Of p f. .

a : m ar a . a n tha n m . a to : a ns sta . p th g m p p r ise , p ;

a : m a kta a to : a r th . p e rl f. p r y for ,

a k i a : va . : a de m p e s nt rs la m prescrip tion pa .

a : ta a s r a a ci tta n . : sa mi a . p en nce p n . p g p p resence p n

: a n a k l v u ar va . l. lo a n d . s . a p eople j , p ; , p p re io s ; p

m : si dh a u ca r : tv m . p erfor , to , c s . ; , p riest r ij

- c a r sa m a a c : a mar a . + ; ( s a criﬁce) ta n . p rin e k m

u m e : a n dha : va sa n . dha n a p erf g m . prop erty ; n . bh ti : n a o i . : a . p erish , to p + p rosp erity f

: m a sa la : r a k 2 a a a u . p estle m . n . protect, to s p ; p , c s

: v a dh . t a r a a n . p ierce, to g p ro ection ; p n

- I I . E a k G a 226 nglish S ns rit loss ry.

i ti a a tr a m d : dv . : m . m secon g son p ; m .

- - se e : a d i k i k r a . so n i n la w : am a t m . , to p p ; i p ; s; s p j r

i . : i r f . i ta o seer : rs m song g ; g n . ; ( f p ra is e)

: stha r a a u . sto tr a . send , to + p , c s n k bh t a m . bh ta a . : atm a n ser va nt : r y ; r m so u l m .

v : sev. so w t o : va . ser e , p dh a l a . o f k o : et : a t va d va c bha . s , to (pl ce) ; (intr , Sp e , ; ; s

su n e tc . i a sta m a i n o sta m . a : k an ta m . , ) ; g spe r

a d : cha a . : va c f . bha a Sh e g f sp eech ; s f.

h e . : sa . ta . : a ha . s , etc , f Of Sp oon j f

to : a bh r a bha vi . a d stha shine , p ; j ; st n , to .

: n aa . a t o : br a . Ship f st te ,

: a a n a h . a : c a r m a la h shoe p f ste l , to ; s; ng .

: i a u . : o Show , to d p, c s steer g m .

d : a a . k da n a shrew p t stic : d m .

: u t o : ldha a i le sa m . : d a d f . i u m a . Sh t , p ; g Stone rs ; (precio s) n m

k : v adhi ta r a a . to r a dh Sic g ; gn stop , .

d : a k a . a a r a Si e p s m str nge p .

a . n h a n e a s . : r a t a f . m ar a Sin p p ; n street g ; g m .

: 2 a k : ta . Sing , to 9 . stri e , to d

: i ta . v to : a t Singing g n Stri e , y .

si : c a m a . : ba li ha p , to strongest st .

- : sva s . u d : i a dhi a s sister r f st y , to l 2 d a i bhi : sa sa d . a . Sit, to ;

u a d : v t. u b : r a a f. sit te , to be r s ject p j

: a u : i d Six s s. s ch rp.

ha u ff d h : a t : u kha . sixth s s . s ering n

k d : a a u ff u d a ddha s ille p t . s se : r .

di f di . i u a a n a sk : v . . ak : r a a . y ; p f p ; apa n . s it ble p

d s dasi u a v : a a m . : ikha r a 111 Sl e ; f. s mmit p .

o u n : bh a t : m r a u . ha n S an a m . a dit a m sl y, g, c s ; . ; y .

: so a i . u v v : i a d. slee p , to p ; p s r i e, to p s h d r a . : sva a smell , to ; g sweet .

ha n bhi : h r a a . : a a . smite, to r p ; swift p

so : i ti eva m : ta tha d : a si . ; . swor m

d : sai n ik sol ier a m .

eka l. a k : do a r a b r a h some p ; some t e , to ; g ; g

: kc ci t ke c i t r a ti ers . p .

: kr a ci t a k a : a n bba sometimes . t e pl ce, to j ; - I I . E a k G a nglish S ns rit loss ry .

a k u to : a d r a . a u : ko a t e ref ge , p + p tre s ry s m .

a u : r a sa va n t. ks ta r a m t stef l tree : vr a m . ; .

k r ta x : a a . : ka m . m tremble , to p d i a : i a h a u . di u : sa t a a u bha kta . te ch , to + , c s ; p tr e g ; (f ithf l)

a a . s t p tru th : a ga n .

a : a r a m . a c r da a te cher g ; a ga m . twelfth : dva p .

a r ba s a : d a a : a n . v dva a . te r p ; p m . twel e p

- to : ka tha a va d . : a ta vzn a ti . tell , g ; twenty eight s p

- : deva ka la . v : sa ta vi n a ti temp le n twenty se en p p .

da a . d i ten ; p twice : v s.

d : k : sa ndh a ten to , to ip . twilight y f.

: bhi a u . vi : ba n dh terrify , to , c s ; j + twine .

u . ca s two : dva .

- a str a text book : p n .

a : ta a a m a sa a u b a : cha ttr a . th t ; y ; . m rell n d d m : t da . u a : a a a va . then n erst n , to g

: ta tr a u a m sa m there . nite , to g

u : ta ta s. u u : a n ta n . a sa t a there p on ntr th r ; g n .

d : u a n i d : sten a m . ca ur a . u a a a thief ; m p nis p s f.

t k to : ci n t m a n k o n : us u : sev. hin , ; ; thin ef l , to be m dh a s s; g .

' d : t ti a . va a : sa ma n ta thir g g ss l m.

tr i n a t. V da : veda thirty : p e m .

- r lka R v : t a a str zn a t v : o m . a e . thirty three g p . erse p ; (of ig ed ) r f

ta a a m v : atr a this : ; g . essel p n .

u : to a m v u : t tho . ictorio s , to be j .

: tr i v : a a . three . ictory j g m

d : tr i v t v w : m a ti f . m a ta . threefol r . ie (Op inion) ; n

r i s v a : r a ma . thrice : t . ill ge g m

u : i ti eva m ta tha . v u : dha r ma m . u a . th s , ; irt e ; p ny n

v : a m a b : kala . hi . time m isit, to g

- a d a v : vac f . ir . to da y : y . oice ; g f

- va s to morrow : p .

a ha : i ha d a : r t m . tong u e j f. w gon

to : i v a th a u . a : k a tr i a . torment, p d; g , c s w rrior s g m

a to : k a l s . u : s . to ch , to p rp w sh , s ; p rp

‘ a la l. d : v a va ha r a va a . a : n . t a r i n . a . tra e g m . ; ng g w ter j ; ; p f p

a v to : w e r a ctha r a wa v : vi ci . tr el , p ; p e m

: va a m n . we g . - I I E a k G a . . nglish S ns rit loss ry

a : dh a u . bh . : hema n ta . we r, to r , c s ; r winter m

a : r a m . : m m a a o r a r i . we ry, to become p wi p e, to rj ; rj p p

° v : r a n th ba n dh . i . wea e, to g ; wish , to s

d : vivaha m . : sa ha w . . o r . we ding with , inst ; by instr

: r a d . a . weep , to lone

t l n : r a a n c : m a a . west , western p g ; the withered

: r a ti ci f . 8 0 . di . u : vi n a . W est p , p witho t (instr ,

a : sak in m . wh a t y . witness s

a kr a . : v ka wheel : c n wolf i m .

a da a : n ar i f va dha f . str i . when y . wom n . ; ; f when ?: ka da .

- ka a s . w hence ?: t wom a n serva nt : dasi f. w a tr a d : ka hd n va n a 11 here g . woo st . ; (forest) .

k a ka tr f da ?: v a : vac . a b . w here ; . word ; p m

h a . k : ka r m a n a r w ich y wor n . ; (liter ry) g a

ka a r n tha t a m . which (Of .

: ve ta . r d : lo ka m . a a t n bha white p wo l j g . ;

: kva ka tr a va n a whither ? ; . n

’ - w h o a . d i i : br hm n n y worl sp r t a a .

wh o ?: ka . to : a worship , p j .

v : a ka a i ai d o r : sa dr a whoe er y p , worthy p .

a n a b . a . u d k a c : n . ; often y rel lone wo n , to s

k sn a i r w : t . a : m a a f s a . hole r wre th . ; j f w h : ka ta s ka sm ai y ? ; .

k d : a a i h a r a . a : sa va ts m . va r a m . wic e p p ye r ; s . n

h n r i b ar a f . a : : f . tn i k a . a a u wife g ; ; p f yo e , to y j , c s . i : . : ta tr a . win , to j yonder

: va a m . vata m u : a va n wind y ; . yo ng g .

230 A pp endix .

' ’ v l r h ka r drzka va r v th e l a t . b. hu a p imiti e , with imit ions gi en in ; t s, , ; d ar a dr a bu t a r a i . a u a v g g , g gy h, g gg g n A n t r lly short owel in the

u l d b a u o f a a o r v p en t, if followe y gro p conson nts cont ining 3; ,

’ ' d n o t a b u r o ba la r a ba oes gener lly become long y p osition ; th s , p , p

kta l a m akta a va t. g ; ,

3 . I n v a n d v a d va v erbs erb l eri ti es joined with p repositions , in

u a n d d u a d a n d m d a l a gmented re plic te forms , so etimes in eclension

th e a v th e o r - a b forms , ccent is recessi e, if root stem syll le be Short ;

‘ u d a m a t an a ta m a n a hi ta m bu t a tk a m n i r akta m d a m a t th s , g , , si , zst , ; g ,

' ' ’ i a t u i bh r ti ta s ava a a a a a k b t b a . sp , , t , j g Polysyll bic p rep ositions, when

d to w d a o w n a a s da a p reﬁxe other or s , ret in their ccent secon ry ccent ;

iz d t u a a ccha ti a a m a a m . th s , p g , p g

4 I n u d u a . comp o n s , nless the ﬁrst member be monosyll a bic

d a a a a a b u t a o f wor , e ch p rt gener lly ret ins its own ccent, th t the

a m e i s th e t u r d a ar a sa m dr va ta i p rinci p l me b r strongest ; h s , j p , p p kha r akar a m ba t an m a kha m di a a m r a i a m , gg j , p p sy . The di vision o f syl la bles is m u ch m ore a pp a rent in S a nskrit

a E I n a d a k du th n in nglish . re ing S ns rit p rose the H in s genera lly

’ - d a O f r eci ta ti vo . V a r e a a a d rop into sort sing song erses lw ys ch nte .